manualshive.com logo in svg

Ronde & Schwarz 1304.0004.03, User Manual

Share
Download
Ronde & Schwarz 1304.0004.03 User Manual Download Page 1076

Index

R&S

®

FPL1000

Video

Trigger source ........................................................... 337

Video bandwidth .............................................................. 324

Auto (Softkey) ........................................................... 324
Impact ....................................................................... 318
Manual (Softkey) .......................................................324
RMS detector ............................................................ 318

Video output ............................................................ 300, 808
View filter

Limit lines .................................................................. 427
Transducer lines ....................................................... 527

Virus protection ................................................................. 24
VISA ................................................................................ 540

Libraries .................................................................... 548
Resource string .................................................541, 548

Visible

Limit lines .................................................................. 427

Volume

Remote control .................................................. 810, 811

VSA (Vector Signal Analysis)

Application .................................................................. 80

VXI protocol .....................................................................542

W

Wait

Remote ..................................................................... 617

Waiting for trigger

Status register ...........................................................565

Warmup time ................................................................... 537
Web browser

Configuration interface ..............................................595

Weighting filters

CP/ACLR .................................................................. 141
Remote ..................................................................... 644

White noise

Measurement example (statistics) ............................ 224

White papers ..................................................................... 14
White space .................................................................... 554
Window title bar .................................................................65
Windows

Access ........................................................................ 27
Adding .........................................................................91
Adding (remote) ........................................................ 750
Arranging .................................................................... 92
Closing ........................................................................ 92
Closing (remote) ....................................................... 755
Dialog boxes ............................................................... 73
Layout (remote) ........................................................ 753
Maximizing (remote) ................................................. 825
Querying (remote) .....................................................751
Replacing (remote) ................................................... 752
Size ............................................................................. 93
Splitting (remote) ...................................................... 825
Types (remote) ..........................................................750

WRONG_FW

Error ........................................................ 515, 534, 1025

X

X-axis

Adjusting (Spurious Emissions) ................................ 207
Limit lines .................................................................. 430
Scaling .............................................................. 268, 304
Transducer lines ....................................................... 529

X-Offset

Limit lines .................................................................. 427

X-value

Marker ...............................................................262, 350

Y

Y-axis

Limit lines .................................................................. 430
Max/Min (statistics) ................................................... 221
Optimizing display .....................................................315
Scaling .............................................................. 310, 315
Settings ..................................................................... 314

Y-Offset

Limit lines .................................................................. 428

Yellow star

see Invalid data icon ................................................... 62

Z

Zero span

Measurement .............................................................. 97
Measurement examples ............................................ 111
Softkey ...................................................................... 304

Zeroing

Power sensor ............................................................ 279

Zoom

Graphical .................................................................... 76
Measurement .............................................................. 76

Zoom limits

Search range ............................................................ 439
Using for searches ............................................ 357, 361

Zooming .................................................................. 437, 441

Activating (remote) ....................................................813
Area (Multiple mode, remote) ................................... 813
Area (remote) ............................................................ 811
Multiple mode ................................................... 438, 440
Multiple mode (remote) ..................................... 813, 814
Remote ......................................................................811
Restoring original display ..........................................441
Single mode ...................................................... 438, 439
Single mode (remote) ................................................811
Trying out .................................................................... 54

Sie haben Fragen oder wünschen eine Beratung? 

Angebotsanfrage unter

 07121 / 51 50 50

 oder über 

[email protected]

Distributed by:

Summary of Contents for 1304.0004.03

Page 1: ... S FPL1000 Spectrum Analyzer User Manual User Manual Version 09 1178337002 ÜQÔ2 Sie haben Fragen oder wünschen eine Beratung Angebotsanfrage unter 07121 51 50 50 oder über info datatec de Distributed by ...

Page 2: ...R S FPL1 B30 DC power supply 1323 1877 02 R S FPL1 B31 Li Ion battery pack and charger 1323 1725 02 R S FPL1 K9 Power sensor support 1323 1754 02 R S FPL1 K54 EMI measurements 1323 1783 02 2020 Rohde Schwarz GmbH Co KG Mühldorfstr 15 81671 München Germany Phone 49 89 41 29 0 Fax 49 89 41 29 12 164 Email info rohde schwarz com Internet www rohde schwarz com Subject to change Data without tolerance ...

Page 3: ... 14 3 6 Data Sheets and Brochures 14 3 7 Release Notes and Open Source Acknowledgment OSA 14 3 8 Application Notes Application Cards White Papers etc 14 3 9 Calibration Certificate 15 4 Welcome to the R S FPL1000 16 5 Getting Started 17 5 1 Preparing for Use 17 5 2 Instrument Tour 30 5 3 Trying Out the Instrument 42 5 4 Operating the Instrument 60 6 Applications Measurement Channels and Result Dis...

Page 4: ...Zoomed Displays 437 7 13 Importing and Exporting Measurement Results for Evaluation 444 7 14 Optimizing Measurements 455 8 Data Management 456 8 1 Restoring the Default Instrument Configuration Preset 456 8 2 Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data 457 8 3 Import Export Functions 467 8 4 Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings 470 8 5 Working with Te...

Page 5: ...11 8 Setting Basic Spectrum RF Measurement Parameters 758 11 9 Managing Settings and Results 917 11 10 Configuring the R S FPL1000 955 11 11 Emulating Other Instruments Commands 977 11 12 Using the Status Register 1010 11 13 Deprecated Commands 1022 12 Troubleshooting 1024 12 1 Error Information 1024 12 2 Error Messages in Remote Control Mode 1025 12 3 Troubleshooting Remote Operation 1026 12 4 Mi...

Page 6: ...Contents R S FPL1000 6 User Manual 1178 3370 02 09 14 5 Disposal 1035 List of Commands Spectrum mode 1037 Index 1055 ...

Page 7: ...wer sensors Noise figure and gain measurements Solid RF performance Low spurious response Low displayed average noise level DANL 40 MHz signal analysis bandwidth Low level measurement uncertainty Precise spectral measurements due to low phase noise Intuitive user interface High resolution display Multipoint touchscreen Flexible arrangement of results and MultiView Toolbar Quiet operation Fully por...

Page 8: ...ety Instructions Products from the Rohde Schwarz group of companies are manufactured according to the highest technical standards To use the products safely follow the instructions provided here and in the product documentation Keep the product documentation nearby and offer it to other users Use the product only for its intended use and within its performance limits Intended use and limits are de...

Page 9: ...ou mount products in a rack ensure that the rack has sufficient load capacity and stability Observe the specifications of the rack manufacturer Always install the prod ucts from the bottom shelf to the top shelf so that the rack stands securely Secure the product so that it cannot fall off the rack Connecting to power The product is an overvoltage category II product and has to be connected to a f...

Page 10: ...f electric shock fire personal injury or even death Hot surface Do not touch Risk of skin burns Risk of fire Protective conductor terminal Connect this terminal to a grounded external conductor or to protective ground This protects you against electric shock should an electric problem occur Handling batteries safely The product contains lithium polymer or lithium ion cells or batteries The use of ...

Page 11: ...qualified to transport dangerous goods and follow the carrier s transport stipulations in line with IATA DGR IMDG Code ADR or RID If you need assistance contact the carrier or Rohde Schwarz customer service Connecting headphones Take the following measures to prevent hearing damage Before using headphones check the volume and reduce it if necessary If you monitor varying signal levels take off the...

Page 12: ... and Regulatory Information R S FPL1000 12 User Manual 1178 3370 02 09 2 3 Korea Certification Class A 이 기기는 업무용 A급 전자파 적합기기로서 판매자 또는 사용자는 이 점을 주의하시기 바라며 가정외의 지역에서 사용하는 것을 목적으로 합니다 Korea Certification Class A ...

Page 13: ...control a complete description of the remote control com mands with programming examples and information on maintenance instrument interfaces and error messages Includes the contents of the getting started manual Firmware application manual Contains the description of the specific functions of a firmware application includ ing remote control commands Basic information on operating the R S FPL1000 ...

Page 14: ...rder numbers and optional accessories The brochure provides an overview of the instrument and deals with the specific char acteristics See www rohde schwarz com brochure datasheet FPL1000 3 7 Release Notes and Open Source Acknowledgment OSA The release notes list new features improvements and known issues of the current firmware version and describe the firmware installation The open source acknow...

Page 15: ... User Manual 1178 3370 02 09 3 9 Calibration Certificate The document is available on https gloris rohde schwarz com calcert You need the device ID of your instrument which you can find on a label on the rear panel Calibration Certificate ...

Page 16: ...customer requirements Offering low phase noise wide analysis bandwidth and straightforward and intuitive operation the analyzer makes measurements fast and easy This user manual contains a description of the functionality that the instrument pro vides including remote control operation The latest version is available for download at the product homepage http www rohde schwarz com product FPL1000 ...

Page 17: ...27 Logging On 28 Checking the Supplied Options 29 Performing a Self Alignment 29 Considerations for Test Setup 30 5 1 1 Lifting and Carrying The carrying handles are designed to lift or carry the instrument Do not apply exces sive external force to the handles See Lifting and carrying the product on page 8 5 1 2 Unpacking and Checking 1 Unpack the R S FPL1000 carefully 2 Retain the original packin...

Page 18: ...ts due to possible conducted and radi ated disturbances It is therefore not suitable for class B environments If class A equipment causes radio disturbances take appropriate measures to eliminate them 5 1 4 Setting Up the R S FPL1000 The R S FPL1000 is designed for use either on a bench top or in a rack or as a porta ble instrument with optional battery operation in a transport bag in the field Se...

Page 19: ...rheating and damage the product Design and implement an efficient ventilation concept for the rack To mount the R S FPL1000 in a rack 1 Use an adapter kit to prepare the R S FPL1000 for rack mounting a Order the rack adapter kit designed for the R S FPL1000 For the order num ber see data sheet b Mount the adapter kit Follow the assembly instructions provided with the adapter kit 2 Lift the R S FPL...

Page 20: ... bag With the help of the optional vest holster you can carry the R S FPL1000 in its bag and keep your hands free Together with the optional battery pack see Chapter 5 1 5 3 Optional Battery Pack R S FPL1 B31 on page 22 and packed in the dedicated carrying bag the R S FPL1000 is ideally suited for operation directly in the field even in rough environments Inspect the carrying bag for wear and tear...

Page 21: ... connector and in the data sheet For details on the connector refer to Chapter 5 2 2 2 AC Power Supply Connection and Main Power Switch on page 38 5 1 5 2 Connecting an Optional DC Power Supply R S FPL1 B30 The R S FPL1000 can also be equipped with an optional DC power supply connector R S FPL1 B30 If installed the R S FPL1000 can be operated by a DC voltage of 12 V to 24 V If you use an external ...

Page 22: ...in the R S FPL1000 batteries are charged via the common AC or DC power supply You can also use the external battery charger R S FSV B34 to charge up to 4 bat teries Charge in a temperature range from 0 C to 45 C If the temperature is above or below these values or the temparature varies strongly charging is interrupted If the battery temperature rises above 53 C charging is stopped Try not to over...

Page 23: ... 1 2 Power Key on page 33 2 Press the Power key See Table 5 1 The LED changes to green The instrument operates on battery DC or AC power whichever is supplied The R S FPL1000 boots After booting the instrument is ready for operation To shut down the product The product is in the ready state Press the Power key The operating system shuts down The LED changes to orange To disconnect from power The R...

Page 24: ... is Type variant serial_number for example FPL1003 123456 For information on determining the serial number see Chap ter 5 2 2 14 Device ID on page 42 For more information on LAN configuration see the R S FPL1000 user manual 5 1 7 1 Virus Protection Take appropriate steps to protect your instruments from infection Use strong firewall settings and scan any removable storage device used with a Rohde ...

Page 25: ...000 is calibrated for a 16 10 format If you connect a monitor or projector using a different format e g 4 3 the calibration is not correct and the screen does not react to your touch actions properly The touchscreen has a screen resolution of 1280x800 pixels Most external monitors have a higher screen resolution If the screen resolution of the monitor is set higher than the instrument s resolution...

Page 26: ...ing If an external monitor is connected the touchscreen function is erroneously mapped to the external monitor by default This mismatch is particularly cumbersome in extended display mode where touch gestures on the instrument screen actually operate on the external screen Also in duplicate mode touch screen operation malfunctions if the res olutions of internal and external display do not match T...

Page 27: ...r are installed or if the net work configuration does not comply with the default settings After the R S FPL1000 is started the operating system boots and the instrument firmware is started automati cally Tested software The drivers and programs used on the instrument under Windows are adapted to the instrument Only install update software released by Rohde Schwarz to modify exist ing instrument s...

Page 28: ...tion of the basic instrument Setup Setup menu to find out which functions are affected Automatic login When shipped the instrument automatically logs on the default Instrument user to Windows using the default password This function is active until an administrator explicitly deactivates it or changes the password For information on how to deactivate or reactivate the automatic login refer to the ...

Page 29: ... FPL1000 or after updating the firmware you have to perform a self alignment to align the data to a reference source Performing a self alignment Before performing this functional test make sure that the instrument has reached its operating temperature for details refer to the data sheet A message in the status bar Instrument warming up indicates that the operating temperature has not yet been reac...

Page 30: ...s most likely to occur when you connect or disconnect a DUT NOTICE Risk of electrostatic discharge Electrostatic discharge can damage the electronic components of the product and the device under test DUT Ground yourself to prevent electrostatic discharge damage a Use a wrist strap and cord to connect yourself to ground b Use a conductive floor mat and heel strap combination Signal input and outpu...

Page 31: ... 9 Internal generator output 50 Ω connector requires Internal Generator option R S FPL1 B9 5 2 1 1 Touchscreen All measurement results are displayed on the screen on the front panel Additionally the screen display provides status and setting information and allows you to switch between various measurement tasks The screen is touch sensitive offering an alter native means of user interaction for qu...

Page 32: ... status bar with error messages and date time display Using touchscreen gestures you can perform the following tasks among others See Chapter 5 3 Trying Out the Instrument on page 42 Changing a setting Changing the display Changing the displayed result range in a diagram Moving a marker Zooming into a diagram Selecting a new evaluation method Scrolling through a result list or table Saving or prin...

Page 33: ...cription of the corresponding functions is provided in the R S FPL1000 user manual Table 5 2 System keys System key Assigned functions Preset Resets the instrument to the default state Setup Provides basic instrument configuration functions e g Reference frequency external internal Date time display configuration LAN interface Firmware update and enabling of options Information about instrument co...

Page 34: ...e spacing C N C N0 Occupied bandwidth OBW Spectrum emission mask measurement Spectrum Emission Mask Spurious emissions Spurious Emissions Measurement of time domain power Time Domain Power Third order intercept point TOI AM modulation depth AM Mod Depth Meas Config Used to configure measurements and data input and output Lines Configures display lines and limit lines Mkr Sets and positions the abs...

Page 35: ...lowing mechanism is used If data entry has been started it retains the original value and closes the dialog box If data entry has not been started or has been completed it closes the dialog box BACKSPACE If an alphanumeric entry has already been started this key deletes the character to the left of the cursor ENTER Concludes the entry of dimensionless entries The new value is accepted With other e...

Page 36: ...following In an alphanumeric edit dialog box move the cursor In a list scroll forward and backward through the list entries In a table move the selection bar horizontally In windows or dialog boxes with horizontal scroll bar move the scroll bar 5 2 1 8 RF INPUT 50 Ω Provides RF input from a connected device under test DUT to the R S FPL1000 which is then analyzed in an RF measurement Connect the D...

Page 37: ...nd other labels requires the Additional Interfaces option R S FPL1 B5 The meanings of the labels on the R S FPL1000 are described in Chapter 2 2 Labels on R S FPL1000 on page 11 5 2 2 1 Li Ion Battery Packs and DC Power Connector With the Li ion battery pack option R S FPL1 B31 the R S FPL1000 can be oper ated independently of an AC or DC power supply The instrument can house 2 Li ion batteries wh...

Page 38: ...itch function Position 1 The instrument is in operation Position O The entire instrument is disconnected from the AC power supply For details refer to Connecting to power on page 9 and Chapter 5 1 5 Connecting to Power on page 20 5 2 2 3 GPIB Interface The optional GPIB interface R S FPL1 B10 is in compliance with IEEE488 and SCPI A computer for remote control can be connected via this interface T...

Page 39: ...ge 25 5 2 2 7 LAN The R S FPL1000 is equipped with a network interface and can be connected to an Ethernet LAN local area network The network card can be operated with a 1 GBit Ethernet IEEE 802 3u interface Thus a crossover cable is not necessary due to Auto MDI X functionality The assignment of the RJ 45 connector supports twisted pair category 5 UTP STP cables in a star configuration UTP stands...

Page 40: ... sensors see Chapter 7 3 2 Power Sen sors on page 277 This connector is provided by the Additional Interfaces option R S FPL1 B5 5 2 2 10 Aux Port A 25 pole SUB D male connector used as an input and output for low voltage TTL con trol signals max 5 V This connector is provided by the Additional Interfaces option R S FPL1 B5 13 1 14 25 Short circuit hazard Always observe the designated pin assignme...

Page 41: ...h output is provided is defined in the software Overview Output This connector is only available if the R S FPL1 B5 option is installed For details see Data Output on page 300 5 2 2 12 Headphones Connector The R S FPL1000 provides demodulators for AM FM and PM signals which can be routed to the headphone connector With headphones or an external loudspeaker con nected to the 3 5 mm headphone socket...

Page 42: ... This chapter introduces the most important functions and settings of the R S FPL1000 step by step The complete description of the functionality and its usage is given in the R S FPL1000 User Manual Basic instrument operation is described in Chapter 5 4 Operating the Instrument on page 60 Prerequisites The instrument is set up connected to the mains system and started up as descri bed in Chapter 5...

Page 43: ...he default 50 MHz 6 Close the dialog box The calibration signal is now sent to the RF input of the R S FPL1000 By default a continuous frequency sweep is performed so that the spectrum of the calibration signal is now displayed in the standard level versus frequency diagram Figure 5 4 Calibration signal as RF input Instrument warmup time Note that the instrument requires an initial warmup time aft...

Page 44: ...t the trace mode Average c Enter the Average Count 100 d Close the Analysis dialog box The display of the calibration signal is now improved The maximum at the center frequency calibration frequency of 50 MHz becomes visible Figure 5 5 Calibration signal with optimized display settings 5 3 2 Displaying a Spectrogram In addition to the standard level versus frequency spectrum display the R S FPL100...

Page 45: ...rag the icon to the lower half of the display to add an additional window instead Figure 5 6 Adding a Spectrogram to the display Drop the icon 4 Close the SmartGrid mode by tapping the Close icon at the top right corner of the toolbar 5 Close the Overview You see the spectrogram compared to the standard spectrum display Since the calibration signal does not change over time the color of the freque...

Page 46: ...ations in parallel and then switch between the channel set ups automatically to perform the measurements sequentially We will demonstrate this feature by activating additional measurement channels for a different frequency range a zero span measurement and an I Q analysis To activate additional measurement channels 1 Press the Mode key on the front panel 2 On the New Channel Setup tab of the Mode ...

Page 47: ... for this spectrum display In the Frequency dialog box set the center frequency to 500 MHz and the span to 1 GHz Figure 5 9 Frequency spectrum of the calibration signal with a larger span 4 Repeat the previous steps to activate a third Spectrum window 5 Change the frequency range for this spectrum display Trying Out the Instrument ...

Page 48: ...set the Reference Level value to 10 dBm As the calibration signal does not vary over time the level versus time diagram dis plays a straight line Figure 5 10 Time domain display of the calibration signal 7 Create a new measurement channel for I Q analysis a Press the Mode key b Tap the IQ Analyzer button to activate a measurement channel for the I Q Analyzer application c Tap the Display Config so...

Page 49: ...diagram for I Q analysis e Close the SmartGrid mode The IQ Analyzer measurement channel displays the real and imaginary signal parts in separate windows To display the MultiView tab An overview of all active measurement channels is provided in the MultiView tab This tab is always displayed if more than one measurement channel is active and can not be closed Tap the MultiView tab Trying Out the Ins...

Page 50: ...ments configured in the active channel setups can be performed sequentially that means one after the other automatically either once or continuously 1 Tap the Sequencer icon in the toolbar 2 Toggle the Sequencer softkey in the Sequencer menu to On A continuous sequence is started i e each channel setup measurement is per formed one after the other until the Sequencer is stopped Trying Out the Inst...

Page 51: ...et a marker on the peak in our first Spectrum measurement 1 In the MultiView tab double tap the Spectrum window frequency sweep with spectrogram display to return to the Spectrum measurement channel 2 Tap the spectrum display to set the focus on that window 3 Double tap the spectrum window to maximize it as we currently do not need the spectrogram display 4 Press the Run Single key on the front pa...

Page 52: ... 3370 02 09 6 Now you can move the marker by tapping and dragging it to a different position The current position is indicated by a dotted blue line Notice how the position and value change in the marker area of the diagram Trying Out the Instrument ...

Page 53: ...om the evaluation bar to the lower half of the display to add a new window for the peak list 5 Close the SmartGrid mode 6 To obtain a more conclusive peak list that does not contain noise peaks for exam ple define a threshold that is higher than the noise floor a Press the Mkr key on the front panel b Tap the Marker Config softkey in the Marker menu c Tap the Search tab in the Marker dialog box d ...

Page 54: ...ltiple Zoom icon in the toolbar The icon is highlighted to indicate that multiple zoom mode is active 2 Tap the diagram near the first peak and drag your finger to the opposite corner of the zoom area A white rectangle is displayed from the point where you tapped to the current position Figure 5 15 Defining the zoom area When you remove your finger the zoom area is enlarged in a second sub win dow...

Page 55: ...results To optimize the results we will increase the number of sweep points from the default 1001 to 32001 a Press the Sweep key on the front panel b Tap the Sweep Config softkey in the Sweep menu c In the Sweep Points field enter 32001 d Close the Bandwidth dialog box e Press the Run Single key on the front panel to perform a new sweep with the increased number of sweep points Figure 5 17 Zoomed ...

Page 56: ...fine a zoom area around markers M2 M3 and M4 Figure 5 18 Multiple zoom windows 5 Tap the Multiple Zoom icon in the toolbar again and define a zoom area around marker M5 6 To increase the size of the third zoom window drag the splitter between the win dows to the left or right or up or down Trying Out the Instrument ...

Page 57: ...nstrument settings to a file 1 Tap the Save icon in the toolbar 2 Press the keyboard key on the front panel to display the online keyboard as you will have to enter text in the next step 3 In the Save dialog box tap the File Name field and enter MyMultiViewSetup using the keyboard Keep the default File Type setting Instrument with all Channel Setups to store the configuration of all channel setups...

Page 58: ...t any time using the settings file 1 Press the Preset button to restore the default instrument settings so you can check that the stored user settings are actually restored afterwards 2 Tap the Load icon in the toolbar 3 In the Load dialog box select the MyMultiViewSetup dfl file in the default directory C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Analyzer Save 4 Tap the Load button All instrument sett...

Page 59: ... Trace Data Export tab 4 Tap the Export Trace to ASCII File button 5 Enter the file name MyMultiViewResults The trace data is stored to MyMultiViewResults DAT To create a screenshot of the display 1 Tap the Print immediately icon in the toolbar A screenshot of the current display is created Note that the colors on the screen are inverted in the screenshot to improve printout results 2 In the Save ...

Page 60: ...he LXI browser interface in a LAN network Using the Windows Remote Desktop application in a LAN network Connecting a PC via the GPIB interface How to configure the remote control interfaces is described in the R S FPL1000 user manual Understanding the Display Information Spectrum Mode 60 Accessing the Functionality 68 Entering Data 73 Touchscreen Gestures 74 Getting Help 77 5 4 1 Understanding the...

Page 61: ...u can hide some of the elements in the display for example the status bar or chan nel bar to enlarge the display area for the measurement results Setup Display Displayed Items For details see Chapter 9 2 Display Settings on page 502 Channel Setup Bar 61 Window Title Bar 65 Marker Information 65 Frequency and Span Information in Diagram Footer 66 Instrument and Status Information 67 Error Informati...

Page 62: ...y window to switch to the corresponding channel display quickly Icons in the channel bar The yellow star icon on the tab label sometimes referred to as a dirty flag indi cates that invalid or inconsistent data is displayed that is the trace no longer matches the displayed instrument settings This can happen for example when you change the measurement bandwidth but the displayed trace is still base...

Page 63: ...ling a green bullet appears in front of the field VBW Video bandwidth that has been set If the bandwidth does not correspond to the value for automatic coupling a green bullet is displayed in front of the field Compatible Compatible device mode FSL FSV default default not displayed Mode Indicates which sweep mode type is used Auto FFT automatically selected FFT sweep mode Auto sweep automatically ...

Page 64: ... in operation as independant CW source with specified level requires option R S FPL1 B9 NOR APX Trk Gen Internal generator in operation as tracking generator requires option R S FPL1 B9 NOR the measurements are normalized with the results of the internal generator calibra tion APX approximation the measurements are normalized with the results of the internal generator calibration however the measu...

Page 65: ...ion in Window Title Bar Information on the displayed traces is indicated in the window title bar 2 1 3 4 5 1 Trace color Color of trace display in diagram 2 Trace no Trace number 1 to 6 3 Detector Selected detector AP AUTOPEAK detector Pk MAX PEAK detector Mi MIN PEAK detector Sa SAMPLE detector Av AVERAGE detector Rm RMS detector 4 Trace Mode Sweep mode Clrw CLEAR WRITE Max MAX HOLD Min MIN HOLD ...

Page 66: ...T temporary internal PWR power sensor Ref Reference for delta markers Trc Trace to which the marker is assigned X value X value of the marker Y Value Y value of the marker Function Activated marker or measurement function Function Result Result of the active marker or measurement function The functions are indicated with the following abbreviations FXD Fixed reference marker Phase Noise Phase nois...

Page 67: ... the currently selected measurement The following information is displayed Instrument status The instrument is configured for operation with an external reference Battery loading status Date and time The date and time settings of the instrument are displayed in the status bar Error messages If errors or irregularities are detected a keyword and an error message if available are displayed in the st...

Page 68: ... the infor mation for the currently selected channel setup only Furthermore a status bit is set in the STATus QUEStionable EXTended INFO reg ister for the application concerned see STATus QUEStionable EXTended INFO Reg ister on page 568 Messages of a specific type can be queried using the SYST ERR EXT command see SYSTem ERRor EXTended on page 973 5 4 2 Accessing the Functionality All tasks necessa...

Page 69: ... 70 Gen Config 70 Help Select 70 Help 70 Windows 71 Print immediately Prints the current display screenshot as configured See Chapter 8 4 Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Set tings on page 470 Open Opens a file from the instrument Save Recall menu See Chapter 8 2 Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data on page 457 Save Stores data on the instrument Sav...

Page 70: ...om mode Multiple zoom areas can be defined for the same diagram See Chapter 7 12 Zoomed Displays on page 437 Zoom off Displays the diagram in its original size See Chapter 7 12 Zoomed Displays on page 437 SmartGrid Activates SmartGrid mode to configure the screen layout See Chapter 6 6 Configuring Result Displays on page 88 Sequencer Opens the Sequencer menu to perform consecutive measurements See...

Page 71: ...e dis played at once on the screen When pressed it displays the next set of softkeys Recognizing the softkey status by color Color Meaning Orange Associated dialog box is open Blue Associated function is active for toggle keys currently active state Gray Instrument function is temporarily not available due to a specific setting or missing option You can hide the softkey display e g when using remo...

Page 72: ...oard display can be switched on and off as desired using the On Screen Keyboard function key beneath the screen When you press this key the display switches between the following options Keyboard displayed at the top of the screen Keyboard displayed at the bottom of the screen No keyboard displayed You can use the TAB key on the on screen keyboard to move the focus from one field to another in dia...

Page 73: ... transparent and is not affected by the slider Particularities in Windows dialog boxes In some cases e g if you want to install a printer original Windows dialog boxes are used In these dialog boxes the rotary knob and function keys do not work Use the touchscreen instead Entering Numeric Parameters If a field requires numeric input the keypad provides only numbers 1 Enter the parameter value usin...

Page 74: ...s finger gestures on the screen The basic gestures supported by the software and most applications are described here Further actions using the same gestures may be possible Note Inappropriate tools or excessive force can damage the touchscreen For instructions on cleaning the screen see Cleaning the product on page 10 Tapping Touch the screen quickly usually on a specific element You can tap most...

Page 75: ...rs Move two fingers together on the display pinch or move two fingers apart on the dis play spread When you pinch two fingers in the display you decrease the size of the currently dis played area showing the surrounding areas previously out of view When you spread two fingers in the display you increase the size of the currently dis played area showing more details You can pinch or spread your fin...

Page 76: ...es the trigger offset value if available not in free run Spreading or pinching a spectrum display changes the center frequency and span horizontal or reference level and range vertical or a combination of these set tings diagonal Spreading or pinching a time domain display changes the sweep time and trigger offset horizontal or reference level position and range vertical or a combination of these ...

Page 77: ...ifically for the current opera tion or setting to be performed In addition general topics provide an overview on com plete tasks or function groups as well as background information The online help can be opened at any time by selecting one of the Help icons on the toolbar or by pressing the F1 key on an external or the on screen keyboard To call context sensitive help To display the Help dialog b...

Page 78: ...arted R S FPL1000 78 User Manual 1178 3370 02 09 2 Select the screen element to change the focus A topic containing information about the selected now focused screen element is displayed Operating the Instrument ...

Page 79: ...surement settings by creating several channel setups for the same application The number of channel setups that can be configured at the same time depends on the available memory on the instrument For more information on creating channel setups see Chapter 6 3 Defining Channel Setups on page 81 Available Applications 79 R S MultiView 81 Defining Channel Setups 81 Running a Sequence of Measurements...

Page 80: ...NSTrument SELect on page 622 Analog Demod The Analog Demodulation application provides measurement functions for demodulat ing AM FM or PM signals This application requires the optional firmware R S FPL1 K7 to be installed For details see the Analog Demodulation Mode User Manual Remote command INST SEL ADEM see INSTrument SELect on page 622 Noise Figure The Noise Figure application provides noise ...

Page 81: ...lication is active an additional tab MultiView provides an overview of all currently active channel set ups at a glance In the MultiView tab each individual window contains its own chan nel setup bar Select the channel setup bar to switch to an application quickly 6 3 Defining Channel Setups Access Mode The default channel setup uses the Spectrum application Defining Channel Setups ...

Page 82: ...etween measure ments quickly and easily Defining a channel setup 82 New Channel Setup 83 Replace Current Channel Setup 83 Duplicate Current Channel 83 Closing a channel setup 83 Defining a channel setup To start a new channel setup or replace an existing one select the corresponding application in the Mode dialog box Note The channel setups are labeled with the application name If that name alread...

Page 83: ...e currently active channel setup can be duplicated i e a new channel setup of the same type and with the identical measurement settings is started The name of the new channel setup is the same as the copied channel setup extended by a consecu tive number e g Spectrum Spectrum 2 Remote command INSTrument CREate DUPLicate on page 619 Closing a channel setup To close a channel setup simply close the ...

Page 84: ...dual channel setups are updated in the tabs as the measurements are performed Sequential operation itself is independent of the cur rently displayed tab Sequencer modes Three different Sequencer modes are available Single Sequence Similar to single sweep mode each measurement is performed once until all mea surements in all defined Channel s have been performed Continuous Sequence Similar to conti...

Page 85: ...Q Analyzer For Continuous Sequence the following sweeps will be performed 5x Spectrum 6x Spectrum 2 2 x Spectrum 3 7x IQ Analyzer 5x Spectrum 6x Spectrum 2 2 x Spectrum 3 7x IQ Analyzer For Channel defined Sequence the following sweeps will be performed 5x Spectrum 6x Spectrum 2 2 x Spectrum 3 7x IQ Analyzer 5x Spectrum 2 x Spectrum 3 5x Spectrum 2 x Spectrum 3 Run Single Run Cont and Single Sweep...

Page 86: ...Tem SEQuencer on page 623 INITiate SEQuencer IMMediate on page 622 INITiate SEQuencer ABORt on page 622 Sequencer Mode Defines how often which measurements are performed The currently selected mode softkey is highlighted blue During an active Sequencer process the selected mode softkey is highlighted orange Single Sequence Each measurement is performed once until all measurements in all active cha...

Page 87: ...y active channel setups are per formed one after the other in the order of the tabs until the Sequencer is stopped The result displays in the individual channel setups are updated as the measure ments are performed To stop the Sequencer To stop the Sequencer temporarily press the highlighted Run Single or Run Cont key not for a channel defined sequence To continue the Sequencer press the key again...

Page 88: ...display settings that are usually configured during initial instrument setup independently of the current measurement e g which items or colors are displayed on the screen are described in Chapter 9 2 1 Display Settings on page 502 Laying out the Result Display with the SmartGrid 88 Changing the Size of Windows 93 6 6 1 Laying out the Result Display with the SmartGrid Measurement results can be ev...

Page 89: ... The same evaluation method can be displayed in multiple windows simultaneously New windows are added by dragging an evaluation icon from the evaluation bar to the screen The position of each new window depends on where you drop the eval uation icon in relation to the existing windows All display configuration actions are only possible in SmartGrid mode When Smart Grid mode is activated the evalua...

Page 90: ...ow would be replaced the drop area is highlighted in a darker color shade Positioning the window The screen can be divided into up to four rows Each row can be split into up to four columns where each row can have a different number of columns However rows always span the entire width of the screen and may not be interrupted by a column A single row is available as the drop area for the window in ...

Page 91: ...verview Select the Display Config softkey from the Meas Config menu The SmartGrid functions and the evaluation bar are displayed To close the SmartGrid mode and restore the previous softkey menu select the Close icon in the right hand corner of the toolbar or press any key 6 6 1 3 How to Add a New Result Window Each type of evaluation is displayed in a separate window Up to 16 individual windows c...

Page 92: ...ote command LAYout REMove WINDow on page 752 LAYout WINDow n REMove on page 755 6 6 1 5 How to Arrange the Result Windows 1 Select an icon from the evaluation bar or the Move icon for an existing evaluation window 2 Drag the evaluation over the SmartGrid A blue area shows where the window will be placed 3 Move the window until a suitable area is indicated in blue 4 Drop the window in the target ar...

Page 93: ... Changing the Size of Windows Each channel setup tab may contain several windows to evaluate the measurement results using different methods A splitter allows you to change the size of neighbor ing windows The splitters are not available in SmartGrid mode To change the size of two neighboring windows drag the splitter between the win dows in either direction Configuring Result Displays ...

Page 94: ...xis Configuration 307 Bandwidth Filter and Sweep Configuration 316 Trigger and Gate Configuration 331 Adjusting Settings Automatically 343 Marker Usage 345 Trace Configuration 386 Display and Limit Lines 418 Zoomed Displays 437 Importing and Exporting Measurement Results for Evaluation 444 Optimizing Measurements 455 7 1 Configuration Overview Access all menus Each channel setup provides an overvi...

Page 95: ...pter 7 2 7 5 SEM Configuration on page 173 For Spurious measurements Spurious Setup see Chapter 7 2 8 4 Spurious Emissions Measurement Configuration on page 203 7 Optionally Outputs Requires option R S FPL1 B5 see Chapter 7 3 4 Output Settings on page 299 8 Analysis See Chapter 7 10 Trace Configuration on page 386 and Chapter 7 9 Marker Usage on page 345 9 Display See Chapter 6 6 Configuring Resul...

Page 96: ...ed at any time by press ing the MEAS CONFIG key The easiest way to configure measurements is using the configuration Overview see Chapter 7 1 Configuration Overview on page 94 In addition to the measurement specific parameters the general parameters can be configured as usual see Chapter 7 The Spectrum Application RF Measurements on page 94 Many measurement functions provide special result display...

Page 97: ...ero Span 97 Power Sweep 98 All Functions Off 98 Frequency Sweep A common frequency sweep of the input signal over a specified span Can be used for general purposes to obtain basic measurement results such as peak levels and spec trum traces The Frequency menu is displayed This is the default measurement if no other function is selected Use the general measurement settings to configure the measurem...

Page 98: ...5 Remote command SOURce si POWer MODE on page 805 All Functions Off Switches off all measurement functions and returns to a basic frequency sweep Selecting Frequency Sweep has the same effect 7 2 1 2 How to Perform a Basic Sweep Measurement The following step by step instructions demonstrate how to perform basic sweep mea surements For remote operation see Chapter 11 6 17 Programming Example Perfo...

Page 99: ...elect one of the following RUN CONT key Continuous Sweep softkey in the Sweep menu After each sweep is completed a new one is started automatically While the mea surement is running the RUN CONT key is highlighted To stop the measure ment press the RUN CONT key again The key is no longer highlighted The results are not deleted until a new measurement is started 7 2 1 3 Measurement Examples Measuri...

Page 100: ...y span is defined the resolution band width the video bandwidth and the sweep time are automatically adjusted because these functions are defined as coupled functions in the presettings 5 Select MKR to activate marker 1 and automatically set it to the maximum of the trace The level and frequency values measured by the marker are displayed in the marker information at the top of the display Note Pe...

Page 101: ...uced by 30 dB without causing the signal path to be overloaded Reducing the reference level by 30 dB Set the reference level to 30 dBm The maximum of the trace is near the maximum of the measurement diagram The increase in the displayed noise is not substantial Thus the distance between the signal maximum and the noise display dynamic range has increased Setting the reference level with the help o...

Page 102: ...nal counter In order to obtain a correct result when measuring the frequency with the internal sig nal counter an RF sinusoidal signal or a spectral line must be available The marker must be located more than 25 dB above the noise level to ensure that the specified measurement accuracy is adhered to 7 2 1 4 Measurement Example Measuring Levels at Low S N Ratios The minimum signal level a signal an...

Page 103: ...erence level to 30 dBm The signal is measured with the auto peak detector and is completely hidden in the intrinsic noise of the R S FPL1000 Figure 7 1 Sine wave signal with low S N ratio 5 To suppress noise spikes average the trace In the Traces configuration dialog set the Trace Mode to Average see Trace Mode on page 394 The traces of consecutive sweeps are averaged To perform averaging the R S ...

Page 104: ...narrower than the resolution bandwidth Set the trace mode back to Clear Write then set the VBW to 10 kHz manually in the Bandwidth configuration dialog The RF signal can be distinguished from noise more clearly Figure 7 3 RF sine wave signal with low S N ratio with a smaller video bandwidth 7 By reducing the resolution bandwidth by a factor of 10 the noise is reduced by 10 dB Set the RBW to 100 kH...

Page 105: ...electing the Resolution Bandwidth A basic feature of a Signal and Spectrum Analyzer is the ability to separate the spec tral components of a mixture of signals The resolution at which the individual compo nents can be separated is determined by the resolution bandwidth Selecting a resolu tion bandwidth that is too large may make it impossible to distinguish between spectral components i e they are...

Page 106: ...SET to reset the instrument 2 Set the center frequency to 128 015 MHz 3 Set the frequency span to 300 kHz 4 Set the resolution bandwidth to 30 kHz and the video bandwidth to 1 kHz Note Larger video bandwidths The video bandwidth is set to 1 kHz in order to make the level drop in the center of the two signals clearly visible At larger video bandwidths the video voltage that results from envelope de...

Page 107: ...s Matching generator and R S FPL1000 frequencies The level drop is located exactly in the center of the display only if the generator frequencies match the frequency display of the R S FPL1000 exactly To achieve exact matching the frequencies of the generators and the R S FPL1000 must be synchronized 5 Set the resolution bandwidth to 100 kHz It is no longer possible to clearly distinguish the two ...

Page 108: ...on bandwidth to 1 kHz The two generator signals are shown with high resolution However the sweep time becomes longer At smaller bandwidths the noise display decreases simulta neously 10 dB decrease in noise floor for a decrease in bandwidth by a factor of 10 Figure 7 8 Measurement of two equally leveled RF sinusoidal signals with a resolution band width 1 kHz which is significantly smaller than th...

Page 109: ...routines that output the modulation depth numerically in percent directly Figure 7 9 Test setup Table 7 4 Signal generator settings e g R S SMW Frequency 128 MHz Level 30 dBm Modulation 50 AM 10 kHz AF 1 Select PRESET to reset the instrument 2 Set the center frequency to 128 MHz 3 Set the frequency span to 50 kHz 4 Select MEAS AM Modulation Depth to activate the modulation depth mea surement The R...

Page 110: ...s the negative parts and displays it as a magnitude spectrum The rectification also demodulates AM modu lated signals The AF voltage can be displayed in zero span if the modulation side bands fall within the resolution bandwidth Displaying the AF of an AM modulated signal Zero Span Figure 7 11 Test setup Table 7 5 Signal generator settings e g R S SMW Frequency 128 MHz Level 30 dBm Modulation 50 A...

Page 111: ... signal of a carrier that is AM modulated with 1 kHz 7 Activate the internal AM demodulator to output the audio signal a Press the MKR FUNC key b Select Marker Demodulation The R S FPL1000 automatically switches on the AM audio demodulator A 1 kHz tone can be heard over headset via the headphones connector If nec essary use the volume control to turn up the volume 7 2 1 6 Measurement Examples in Z...

Page 112: ...et the instrument 2 Set the center frequency to 890 MHz FREQ 3 Set the frequency span to 0 Hz SPAN Zero Span 4 Set the reference level to 10 dBm level of the signal generator 10 dB AMPT 5 Set the attenuation to 20 dB AMPT RF Atten Manual 6 Set the resolution bandwidth to 1 MHz BW Res BW 7 Set the sweep time to 1 ms SWEEP Sweep Time Manual The R S FPL1000 shows the GSM burst continuously across the...

Page 113: ...urst The R S FPL1000 displays the average mean power during the activation phase of the burst Figure 7 14 Measurement of the average power during the burst of a GSM signal Measuring the Edges of a GSM Burst with High Time Resolution Due to the high time resolution of the R S FPL1000 at the 0 Hz display range the edges of TDMA bursts can be measured precisely The edges can be shifted to the display...

Page 114: ...to the center of the display by defining a trig ger offset a Press the TRIG key b Select Trigger Offset c By turning the rotary knob counterclockwise reduce the trigger offset until the burst edge is displayed in the center of the display or enter 50 µs The R S FPL1000 displays the rising edge of the GSM burst Figure 7 16 Rising edge of the GSM burst displayed with high time resolution 4 Move the ...

Page 115: ...ase of the transmission burst Therefore the R S FPL1000 provides a measurement for absolute and relative power in zero span In the following example the measurement is performed using a GSM burst Signal to Noise Ratio of a GSM Signal Figure 7 18 Test setup Table 7 8 Signal generator settings e g R S SMW Frequency 890 MHz Level 0 dBm Modulation GSM one time slot is switched on 1 Select PRESET to re...

Page 116: ... Set the Limits state to On e Select the Left Limit input field f By turning the rotary knob clockwise move the vertical line S1 to the start of the burst g Select the Right Limit input field h By turning the rotary knob clockwise move the vertical line S2 to the end of the burst i Note down the power result for the burst indicated by the TD Pow RMS result in the marker table 9 Measure the power d...

Page 117: ...ilable The evaluation methods described here are available for most measurements in the Spectrum application Diagram 117 Marker Table 117 Marker Peak List 118 Result Summary 118 Spectrogram 119 Diagram Displays a basic level vs frequency or level vs time diagram of the measured data to evaluate the results graphically This is the default evaluation method Which data is displayed in the diagram dep...

Page 118: ...s well as the sort order In addition the detected peaks can be indicated in the diagram The peak list can also be exported to a file for analysis in an external application You can define search and sort criteria to influence the results of the analysis Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH PEAK see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 750 Results CALCulate n MARKer m X on page 845 CALCulate n MARKer m Y on page 858...

Page 119: ...agram and the spectrogram result display lower diagram For details see Chapter 7 10 2 1 Working with Spectrograms on page 398 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH SGR see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 750 7 2 3 Power Sweep Measurements For a power sweep measurement the internal generator signal remains at a fixed fre quency but increases its power level within a specified range over time The default frequenc...

Page 120: ...at the RF input of the analyzer Ideally the result is a linear trace that is the output is directly proportional to the input power Any distortion to the linear trace indicates the effects of the DUT This result is useful for example to determine the compression point for amplifiers The settings for a power sweep measurement are described in Power Sweep Set tings on page 295 About the Power Sweep ...

Page 121: ...est In a power sweep compression point measurement you use the internal generator sig nal as a reference input signal for your power converting DUT Then you compare the DUT input to its output which is measured at the RF input of the analyzer Figure 7 20 Test setup for compression point measurement using an internal generator The compression point is defined as the power level at which the relatio...

Page 122: ...wer range However due to cable loss for instance a level offset can occur By defining a known level offset for the mea surement you can shift the x axis scale to compensate for the loss Nevertheless you define the correct power start level and stop level to be applied to the DUT and swept by the measurement Reference point By default the linear trace describing the relation between the output powe...

Page 123: ...linear trace on which the deviation or compression calculation is based is also shifted In the compression measurement results the used reference point is also indicated Compression point measurement is not available for normalized data If normalization is enabled the compression point measurement is not available If normalization is switched on the compression point measurement is switched off 7 ...

Page 124: ...n Generator Level Input level of the DUT at which the compression occurs Measured Level Output level of the DUT at which the compression occurs Remote commands FETCh CMEasurement P1DB RESult on page 637 FETCh CMEasurement P3DB RESult on page 637 FETCh CMEasurement PNDB RESult on page 637 7 2 3 3 Power Sweep Compression Point Settings Access Overview Select Measurement Power Sweep Compr Points Meas...

Page 125: ...lculation is based By default the reference point is automatically set to the start level of the power sweep see Level Start Level Stop on page 297 In manual mode define the reference point as required For details see Reference point on page 122 Remote command CONFigure CMEasurement REFerence MODE on page 635 CONFigure CMEasurement REFerence VALue on page 634 Compression Points Selects which compr...

Page 126: ...e internal generator 1 Press the MEAS key or select Select Measurement in the Overview 2 Select the Power Sweep measurement function 3 Select GEN Config 4 Set the State to On 5 Define the output power range to be provided to the DUT by the generator as the Level Start and Level Stop 6 Connect your DUT to the R S FPL1000 7 Perform a new measurement The input power vs the output power of the DUT are...

Page 127: ... as to display the power of a pure sine wave signal correctly irrespective of the selected detector This calibration cannot be applied for non sinusoidal signals Assuming that the digitally modulated signal has a Gaussian amplitude distribution the signal power within the selected resolution band width can be obtained using correction factors The internal power measurement rou tines in a signal an...

Page 128: ...you must specify the channel to which the relative adjacent channel power values refer By default it is the TX channel with the maximum power Table 7 9 Measurements performed depending on the number of adjacent channels Number of adj chan Measurement results 0 Channel powers 1 Channel powers Power of the upper and lower adjacent channel 2 Channel powers Power of the upper and lower adjacent channe...

Page 129: ...Hz or in dBc relative to the specified reference TX channel Retrieving Results via Remote Control All or specific channel power measurement results can be retrieved using the CALC MARK FUNC POW RES command from a remote computer see CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer sb RESult on page 630 Alternatively the results can be output as channel power density i e in reference to the measurement bandwidt...

Page 130: ...responds to the reciprocal of the measured band width The number of A D converter values N used to calculate the power is defined by the Sweep Time The time per trace pixel for power measurements is directly propor tional to the selected Sweep Time If the sample detector is used it is best to select the smallest Sweep Time possible for a given span and resolution bandwidth The minimum time is obta...

Page 131: ...ssion channel spacing 2 x transmission channel bandwidth measurement margin For adjacent channel power measurements the Adjust Settings function sets the fre quency span as a function of the following parameters Number of transmission channels Transmission channel spacing Adjacent channel spacing Bandwidth of one of adjacent channels ADJ ALT1 or ALT2 whichever is furthest away from the transmissio...

Page 132: ...ect the trace average mode Power to ensure correct power measurements see Average Mode on page 395 Note that in power measurements this setting affects the VBW regard less of whether or not a trace is actually averaged The video bandwidth for the defined channel settings can be optimized Use the Adjust Settings function in the Ch Power menu or the General Settings tab of the ACLR Setup dialog box ...

Page 133: ...n the number of averages and the signal characteristics in the channel to be mea sured The Adjust Settings function switches off trace averaging You can deactivate the trace averaging manually in the Traces configuration dialog box see Average Mode on page 395 Reference Level To achieve an optimum dynamic range set the reference level so that the signal is as close to the reference level as possib...

Page 134: ...urement Settings General measurement settings are defined in the ACLR Setup dialog in the General Settings tab Standard 135 Predefined Standards 135 User Standards 135 Number of channels Tx Adj 136 Reference Channel 136 Selected Trace 137 Absolute and Relative Values ACLR Mode 137 Channel power level and density Power Unit 137 Power Mode 137 Setting a fixed reference for Channel Power measurements...

Page 135: ...mote command CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer sb PRESet on page 639 User Standards Standard Access CP ACLR Config General Settings tab Manage User Standards In addition to the predefined standards you can save your own standards with your specific measurement settings in an XML file so you can use them again later User defined standards are stored on the instrument in the C ProgramData Rohde Sc...

Page 136: ...ep points is increased to ensure that adjacent channel powers are measured with adequate accuracy For more information on how the number of channels affects the measured powers see Chapter 7 2 4 2 Channel Power Results on page 128 Remote command Number of Tx channels SENSe POWer ACHannel TXCHannel COUNt on page 643 Number of Adjacent channels SENSe POWer ACHannel ACPairs on page 641 Reference Chan...

Page 137: ... addi tional functions Absolute and Relative Values ACLR Mode and Reference Channel to obtain the signal to noise ratio Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer sb RESult PHZ on page 653 Power Mode The measured power values can be displayed directly for each trace Clear Write or only the maximum values over a series of measurements can be displayed Max Hold In the latter case the power v...

Page 138: ...633 Sweep Time With the RMS detector a longer Sweep Time increases the stability of the measure ment results For recommendations on setting this parameter see Sweep Time on page 130 The Sweep Time can be set via the softkey in the Ch Power menu and is identical to the general setting in the Sweep configuration dialog box Remote command SENSe SWEep TIME on page 775 Channel Setup The Channel Setting...

Page 139: ...ed for any Tx channel is automatically also defined for all subsequent Tx channels Thus only enter one value if all Tx channels have the same bandwidth The value entered for any ADJ or ALT channel is automatically also defined for all alternate ALT channels Thus only enter one value if all adjacent channels have the same bandwidth Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth CHANnel ch on page 64...

Page 140: ...g value old spacing value Again only enter one value for equal channel spacing For different spacing configure the spacings from top to bottom For details see How to Set Up the Channels on page 142 Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing CHANnel ch on page 643 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ACHannel on page 642 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ALTernate ch on page 643 Limit Check During an ACLR meas...

Page 141: ...ng Deactivating SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe CHANnel ch on page 645 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe ACHannel on page 645 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe ALTernate ch on page 645 Alpha value SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa CHANnel ch on page 645 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa ACHannel on page 644 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa ALTernate ch on page 644 Channel Names In the R S FPL10...

Page 142: ...w to Set Up the Channels Channel definition is the basis for measuring power levels in certain frequency ranges Usually the power levels in one or more carrier Tx channels and possibly the adja cent channels are of interest Up to 18 carrier channels and up to 12 adjacent channels can be defined When a measurement standard is selected all settings including the channel band widths and channel spaci...

Page 143: ... the adjacent channels have the following spacing 20 kHz ADJ 40 kHz ALT1 60 kHz ALT2 80 kHz ALT3 100 kHz ALT4 Set the spacing of the first adjacent channel ADJ to 40 kHz For all other adjacent channels the spacing is multiplied by factor 2 80 kHz ALT1 120 kHz ALT2 160 kHz ALT3 Starting from the default setting set the spacing of the fifth adjacent channel ALT4 to 150 kHz For all higher adjacent ch...

Page 144: ...easurements For power measurements with only one Tx channel and no adjacent channels you can define a fixed reference power and compare subsequent measurement results to the stored reference power 1 Configure a measurement with only one Tx channel and no adjacent channels see also How to Set Up the Channels on page 142 2 In the ACLR Setup dialog box select the Set CP Reference button The channel p...

Page 145: ...he R S FPL1000 2 Set the center frequency to 1950 MHz 3 Select the Channel Power ACLR measurement function from the Select Mea surement dialog box 4 Set the W CDMA 3GPP REV standard for adjacent channel power measurement in the ACLR Setup dialog box The R S FPL1000 sets the channel configuration to the W CDMA standard for mobiles with two adjacent channels above and below the transmit channel The ...

Page 146: ...se of the R S FPL1000 with the Channel Power Function Noise in any bandwidth can be measured with the channel power measurement func tions Thus the noise power in a communication channel can be determined for exam ple If the noise spectrum within the channel bandwidth is flat the noise marker can be used to determine the noise power in the channel by considering the channel band width However in t...

Page 147: ...matically set to the optimum values required for the measure ment 7 Stabilize the measurement result by increasing the Sweep Time Set the Sweep Time to 1 s The trace becomes much smoother because of the RMS detector and the channel power measurement display is much more stable Figure 7 24 Measurement of the R S FPL1000 s intrinsic noise power in a 1 23 MHz channel bandwidth 7 2 4 7 Optimizing and ...

Page 148: ...than a Channel Power measurement The TDP measure ment is a zero span measurement where the sweep time determines the measure ment time Due to the FFT measurement duplicate averaging is performed provid ing very stable results very quickly Note however that for TDP measurements channel filters are not available and a fixed RBW is used Thus the measurement may not be according to standard for some t...

Page 149: ...S detector is activated The carrier to noise measurements are only available in the frequency domain span 0 Measurement process Depending on whether the carrier is inside or outside the analyzed channel the mea surement process for the carrier to noise ratio varies The carrier is outside the analyzed channel In this case it is sufficient to switch on the desired measurement function and to set the...

Page 150: ...di cated in the diagram Remote command You can also query the determined carrier to noise ratio via the remote command CALC MARK FUNC POW RES CN or CALC MARK FUNC POW RES CN0 see CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer sb RESult on page 630 7 2 5 3 Carrier to Noise Configuration Access Overview Select Measurement C N C N0 Carrier Noise Config Both a carrier to noise ratio C N and a carrier to noise ra...

Page 151: ...asure another trace use the Marker To Trace softkey in the Marker menu see Assigning the Marker to a Trace on page 263 Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer sb SELect on page 632 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer sb RESult on page 630 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer sb STATe on page 632 C N0 Switches the measurement of the carrier noise ratio with reference to a 1 Hz bandwidth o...

Page 152: ... page 656 1 Press the C N C N0 softkey to configure the carrier to noise ratio measure ment 2 To change the channel bandwidth to be analyzed press the Channel Bandwidth softkey 3 To optimize the settings for the selected channel configuration press the Adjust Settings softkey 4 To activate the measurements without reference to the bandwidth press the C N softkey To activate the measurements with r...

Page 153: ...0 and 99 9 can be set Measurement principle The bandwidth containing 99 of the signal power is to be determined for example The algorithm first calculates the total power of all displayed points of the trace In the next step the points from the right edge of the trace are summed up until 0 5 of the total power is reached Auxiliary marker 1 is positioned at the corresponding frequency Then the poin...

Page 154: ... step instructions see How to determine the OBW for a multicarrier signal using search limits on page 158 Prerequisites To ensure correct power measurement especially for noise signals and to obtain the correct occupied bandwidth the following prerequisites and settings are necessary Only the signal to be measured is displayed in the window or search limits are defined to include only one carrier ...

Page 155: ...ated as a function result Occ Bw Centroid in the marker table Frequency offset The offset of the calculated centroid frequency to the defined center frequency of the R S FPL1000 is indicated as a function result Occ Bw Freq Offset in the marker table Remote command The determined occupied bandwidth can also be queried using the remote command CALC MARK FUNC POW RES OBW or CALC MARK FUNC POW RES AO...

Page 156: ...ght limits are consid ered The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Chap ter 11 6 6 Measuring the Occupied Bandwidth on page 657 Power Bandwidth 156 Channel Bandwidth 157 Adjust Settings 157 Search Limits Left Right 157 Deactivating All Search Limits 157 Power Bandwidth Defines the percentage of total power in the displayed frequency range which defines the occupied ban...

Page 157: ... are optimized Frequency span 3 channel bandwidth RBW 1 40 of channel bandwidth VBW 3 RBW Detector RMS The reference level is not affected by Adjust Settings For an optimum dynamic range select the reference level such that the signal maximum is close to the reference level See Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level on page 312 The adjustment is carried out only once If necessary the...

Page 158: ...ransmission channel 6 To optimize the settings for the selected channel configuration select Adjust Set tings 7 Start a sweep The result is displayed as OBW in the marker results How to determine the OBW for a multicarrier signal using search limits 1 Press the MEAS key or select Select Measurement in the Overview 2 Select the OBW measurement function 3 Select the OBW Config softkey 4 Define the p...

Page 159: ...Set the Power Bandwidth to 99 8 Set the Channel Bandwidth to 21 kHz as specified by the PDC standard 9 Optimize the settings for the selected channel configuration by selecting Adjust Settings 10 Adjust the reference level to the measured total power by selecting Auto Level in the Auto set menu 11 The PDC standard requires the peak detector for OBW measurement In the Traces configuration dialog se...

Page 160: ...ments a Fast SEM mode is available A special limit check for SEM measurements allows for monitoring compliance of the spectrum 7 2 7 2 Typical Applications Spectrum Emission Mask measurements are typically performed to ensure that modu lated signals remain within the valid signal level ranges These ranges are defined by a particular transmission standard both in the transmission channel and neighb...

Page 161: ...see also Limit Lines in SEM Measurements on page 166 The following information is provided in the result summary Label Description General information Standard Loaded standard settings Tx Power Power of the reference range Tx Bandwidth Tx bandwidth used by the reference range RBW RBW used by the reference range Range results Range Low Start of the frequency range the peak value was found in Range ...

Page 162: ...ks are not only listed in the Result Summary they are also indicated by colored squares in the diagram optionally see Show Peaks in the List Evaluation settings Figure 7 26 Detected peak display in SEM measurement Furthermore you can export the results of the result summary to a file which can be exported to another application for further analysis Results for SEM with multiple sub blocks In the S...

Page 163: ...nce range can be queried using CALC MARK FUNC POW RES PPOW see CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer sb RESult on page 630 The measured power trace can be queried using TRAC DATA and TRAC DATA X see TRACe n DATA on page 832 and TRACe n DATA X on page 834 The measured peak power list can be queried using TRAC DATA LIST see TRACe n DATA on page 832 7 2 7 4 SEM Basics Some background knowledge on basic...

Page 164: ...arameter set by pressing PRESET or by loading an XML file If you want a parameter set to be avail able permanently create an XML file for this configuration for details refer to How to save a user defined SEM settings file on page 190 If you load one of the provided XML files the sweep list contains ranges and parame ters according to the selected standard Reference range The range containing the ...

Page 165: ... a minimum of one sweep point This allows you to increase the resolution within a specific range for detailed analysis You do not have to increase the overall number of sweep points and thus the measure ment time for the SEM measurement Symmetrical ranges You can easily define a sweep list with symmetrical range settings i e the ranges to the left and right of the reference range are defined symme...

Page 166: ...p List settings every time the settings change These limit lines are labeled _SEM_LINE_ xxx _ABS 0 3 and _SEM_LINE_ xxx _REL 0 3 where xxx is an index to distinguish limit lines between different channel setups The limit line defined for the currently used power class is indicated by a red line in the display The result of the limit check is indicated at the top of the diagram Note that only Pass ...

Page 167: ...the absolute limit or the higher of the absolute and relative function values the check fails Relative limit line functions A new function allows you to define limit lines whose start or end points or both are variable depending on the carrier power Thus the resulting limit line can change its slope within the range depending on the carrier power Common relative limit lines are calculated once for...

Page 168: ...rtheless be defined individually for each range Prerequisites Fast SEM mode is available if the following criteria apply The frequency ranges are consecutive without frequency gaps The following sweep settings are identical for details see Sweep List on page 174 Filter Type RBW VBW Sweep Time Mode Reference Level RF Attenuation Mode RF Attenuation Preamplifier Activating Fast SEM mode Fast SEM mod...

Page 169: ...SEM mode Example Figure 7 28 Sweep list using Fast SEM mode In Figure 7 28 a sweep list is shown for which Fast SEM is activated The formerly five separately defined ranges are combined to two sweep ranges internally SEM with Multiple Sub Blocks Multi SEM In the Spectrum application application only spectrum emissions can be measured for multiple sub blocks of channels also referred to as a Multi ...

Page 170: ... block is defined and a standard is loaded which contains an active fast SEM setting this setting is disabled Absolute vs relative frequencies In the default configuration with only one sub block frequencies are defined relative to the center frequency this is the familiar configuration For setups with more than one sub block frequencies are defined relative to the center frequency of the referenc...

Page 171: ...ollowing combinations for overlapping ranges MAX MAX maximum of the two limit lines is used MAX SUM maximum of the two limit lines is used SUM SUM sum of the two limit lines calculated for linear powers is used NONE MAX NONE SUM limit line and parameters of the NONE range are ignored NONE NONE depends on the position of the overlapping ranges in relation to the mid frequency between the two neighb...

Page 172: ...tuation overlapping ranges Range 4 None Range 5 None overlap and cross the mid frequency between sub blocks 1 and 2 Result Subranges 4a and 5a are created left and right of the mid frequency For subrange 4a limit line and parameters of range 4 apply For subrange 5a limit line and parameters of range 5 apply Global SEM limit check For the complete SEM measurement which can consist of multiple sub b...

Page 173: ...s on page 302 Only ranges within this global span are considered for the SEM measurement Multi SEM configuration In the Spectrum application application only spectrum emissions can be measured for multiple sub blocks of channels see SEM with Multiple Sub Blocks Multi SEM on page 169 Up to 3 sub blocks with 2 gaps can be defined For each sub block the familiar configuration settings concerning rang...

Page 174: ...SEM measurements the input signal is split into several frequency ranges which are swept individually and for which different limitations apply You configure the indi vidual frequency ranges and mask limits in the Sweep List If you edit the sweep list always follow the rules and consider the limitations described in Ranges and Range Settings on page 164 Range Start Range Stop 175 Fast SEM 175 Filt...

Page 175: ...equency values for each range relative to the center frequency Center the ref erence range on the center frequency The current Tx Bandwidth defines the mini mum span of the reference range see Channel Power Settings on page 181 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri FREQuency STARt on page 666 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri FREQuency STOP on page 666 Fast SEM Activates Fast SEM mode for all range...

Page 176: ...Data is Mea sured Sweep Time on page 320 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri SWEep TIME AUTO on page 675 Sweep Time Sets the sweep time value for the range For details on the sweep time see Chapter 7 6 1 7 How Long the Data is Measured Sweep Time on page 320 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri SWEep TIME on page 675 Ref Level Sets the reference level for the range For details on the ...

Page 177: ...range Up to four limits are possible For details on limit checks see Limit Lines in SEM Measurements on page 166 The limit state affects the availability of all limit settings Remote command SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri LIMit li STATe on page 673 CALCulate n LIMit li FAIL on page 914 Abs Limit Start Stop n Sets an absolute limit value for the n th power class at the start or stop frequency of the r...

Page 178: ... li RELative STOP ABS on page 672 Multi Limit Calc n Defines the function used to calculate the limit line for the n th power class for overlap ping ranges in Multi SEM measurements For details see Limit calculation for individ ual ranges on page 171 NONE reference ranges only the limit of the reference range is used SUM Sum of the two limit lines calculated for linear powers is used MAX Maximum o...

Page 179: ...ted on the other side of the reference range Deleting ranges the symmetrical range on the other side of the reference range is also deleted Editing range settings the settings in the symmetrical range are adapted accord ingly Note If Fast SEM mode is deactivated while Symmetrical Setup mode is on Sym Setup mode is automatically also deactivated If Fast SEM mode is activated while Symmetrical Setup...

Page 180: ...ing corresponds to the global set ting in the Frequency settings see Center Frequency Remote command SENSe ESPectrum sb SCENter on page 662 Standard Defines the use of a standard settings file for a particular sub block For details see Standard Files on page 183 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum sb PRESet STANdard on page 660 Edit Sweep List Switches to the Sweep List tab of the Spectrum Emission Mas...

Page 181: ... can be configured for this method Peak Power Determines the peak power within the reference range Remote command SENSe ESPectrum sb RTYPe on page 678 Channel Power Settings If the Power Reference Type Channel Power was selected additional parameters can be configured Tx Bandwidth Channel Power Settings Defines the bandwidth used for measuring the channel power with Minimum span Tx Bandwidth of re...

Page 182: ...anges For details see Power classes on page 165 Used Power Classes 182 PMin PMax 183 Sweep List 183 Adding or Removing a Power Class 183 Used Power Classes Defines which power classes are considered for the SEM measurement Limits can be defined only for used power classes It is only possible to select either one specific power class or all the defined power classes If All is selected the power cla...

Page 183: ...te command CALCulate n LIMit li ESPectrum sb PCLass pc MINimum on page 683 CALCulate n LIMit li ESPectrum sb PCLass pc MAXimum on page 682 Sweep List Switches to the Sweep List tab of the Spectrum Emission Mask dialog box and focuses the Limit Check setting for the corresponding power class 1 4 in the refer ence range see Limit Check n on page 177 Adding or Removing a Power Class Adds a new power ...

Page 184: ...4 File Name 184 Load Standard 185 File Explorer 185 Save Standard 185 Delete Standard 185 Restore Standard Files 185 Selecting Storage Location Drive Path Files Select the storage location of the file on the instrument or an external drive The default storage location for the SEM settings files is C ProgramData Rohde Schwarz ZNL FPL sem_std Remote command MMEMory CATalog on page 919 File Name Cont...

Page 185: ...Schwarz can also be deleted A confirmation query is displayed to avoid unintentional deletion of the stan dard Note Restoring predefined standard files The standards predefined by Rohde Schwarz available at the time of delivery can be restored using the Restore Standard Files function see Restore Standard Files on page 185 Restore Standard Files Restores the standards predefined by Rohde Schwarz a...

Page 186: ...n page 832 Show Peaks If activated all peaks that have been detected during an active SEM measurement are marked with blue squares in the Spectrum diagram Remote command CALCulate n ESPectrum PEAKsearch PSHow on page 684 Margin Although a margin functionality is not available for the limit check you can define a margin or threshold for the peak values to be displayed in the result summary Only pea...

Page 187: ... also in non contiguous ranges an SEM measure ment with multiple sub blocks can be configured The following tasks are described To select an SEM measurement on page 187 To perform an SEM measurement according to a standard on page 187 To configure a user defined SEM measurement on page 187 To perform a Multi SEM measurement on page 189 For remote operation see Chapter 11 6 7 10 Example SEM Measure...

Page 188: ...Range buttons which refer to the currently selected range the reference range by default If the signal trace is symmetric to the center frequency activate the Sym Setup option to make setup easier and quicker 6 Define the measurement parameters for each range as required If symmetrical setup is activated you only have to configure the ranges to one side of the center range In particular define the...

Page 189: ...be used Select the Edit button and configure the sweep list manually as defined in To configure a user defined SEM measurement on page 187 Be sure to select the correct vertical tab for the corresponding sub block within each subtab of the Spectrum Emission Mask configuration dialog Define a function to be used for overlapping ranges in the Multi Limit Calc field of the sweep list 6 Start a sweep ...

Page 190: ... settings file 3 Select the Save button The settings are stored to a file with the extension xml as specified How to delete an SEM settings file 1 In the Standard Files tab of the Spectrum Emission Mask dialog box select the file you want to delete 2 Select the Delete button 3 Confirm the message The settings file is removed from the R S FPL1000 How to restore default SEM settings files The R S FP...

Page 191: ... for the result file 6 Select the Save button The file with the specified name and the extension dat is stored in the defined storage location 7 2 7 7 Measurement Example Multi SEM Measurement The following measurement example demonstrates an SEM measurement for a signal with multiple sub blocks A programming example demonstrating a SEM measurement in a remote environment is provided in Chapter 11...

Page 192: ... define the settings for the 3GPP FDD signal Set the Center Frequency to 900 MHz Set the Base Station RF Bandwidth to 5 MHz Select Apply to SEM 8 For Sub Block B define the settings for the EUTRA LTE signal Set the Center Frequency to 906 5 MHz Set the Base Station RF Bandwidth to 5 MHz Select Apply to SEM 9 Select RUN SINGLE to perform a measurement with the new settings The results of the measur...

Page 193: ...mData Rohde Schwarz ZNL FPL sem_std directory of the R S FPL1000 To load a settings file use the Load function in the Standard Files tab of the Spec trum Emission Mask dialog box see How to load an SEM settings file on page 190 All XML files are stored under C ProgramData Rohde Schwarz ZNL FPL sem_std The files for importing range settings obey the rules of the XML standard The child nodes attribu...

Page 194: ...Note also that you must define two limit nodes one that defines the limit in absolute values and one in relative values Make sure units for the Start and Stop nodes are identical for each Limit node For details refer to Sweep List on page 174 The child nodes and attributes of this element are shown in Table 7 15 The following tables show the child nodes and attributes of each element and show if a...

Page 195: ...tLimitFailMode Range Index n For contents of the Range node see Table 7 15 Define up to twenty Range nodes Range PowerClass The Range element is structured as follows Range Index n Name Name ChannelType Channel Type Channel Type WeightingFilter Type FilterType Type RollOffFactor Factor RollOffFactor Bandwith Bandwidth Bandwidth WeightingFilter FrequencyRange Start RangeStart Start Stop RangeStop S...

Page 196: ...inkDirection Name Downlink Uplink None Yes ShortName DL UL No Reference Power Yes Method TX Channel Power TX Channel Peak Power Yes Reference Channel string No Table 7 14 Attributes and child nodes of the PowerClass element Child Node Attribute Value Parameter description Mand StartPower Value power in dBm The start power must be equal to the stop power of the previ ous power class The Start Power...

Page 197: ...l ter Only if the filter type is RRC Bandwidth bandwidth in Hz Filter bandwidth Only if the filter type is RRC FrequencyRange Yes Start frequency in Hz Start value of the range Yes Stop frequency in Hz Stop value of the range Yes Limit dBm Hz dBm dBc dBr dB A Range must contain exactly two limit nodes one of the limit nodes has to have a relative unit e g dBc the other one must have an absolute un...

Page 198: ... Auto RF Att Mode on page 176 Yes if the Refer enceLevel child node is used Preamplifier ON OFF 1 0 Preamp on page 177 Yes ASCII File Export Format Spectrum Emission Mask When trace data from an SEM measurement is exported the data is stored in ASCII format as described below The first part of the file lists information about the signal analyzer and the general setup File contents Explanation File...

Page 199: ...ted peaks File data section 0 12750000 2515000 30000 13242367500 43 844 722747802734 0 33028793334960938 49 6697120 66650391 FAIL Measured peak values range number start frequency stop frequency resolution bandwidth of range frequency of peak absolute power in dBm of peak relative power in dBc of peak related to the channel power distance to the limit line in dB positive value means above the limi...

Page 200: ...xible definition of all parameters A result table indicates the largest devia tions of the absolute power from the limit line for each range and the results can be checked against defined limits automatically 7 2 8 2 Spurious Emissions Measurement Results The measured signal including any spurious emissions and optionally the detected peaks are displayed in the Spurious Emissions measurement diagr...

Page 201: ...splay all peaks Display a certain number of peaks per range Display only peaks that exceed a threshold Margin Display detected peaks as blue squares in the diagram as well as in the peak list Furthermore you can save the evaluation list to a file Retrieving Results via Remote Control The measured spurious values of the displayed trace can be retrieved using the TRAC DATA SPUR command see TRACe n D...

Page 202: ...urement on page 699 Limit Lines in Spurious Measurements Limit lines allow you to check the measured data against specified limit values Gener ally it is possible to define limit lines for any measurement in the Spectrum application using the Lines key For Spurious measurements however a special limit line is available via the Sweep List and it is strongly recommended that you use only this limit ...

Page 203: ...splayed Values that exceed the limit are indicated in red and by an asterisk Although a margin functionality is not available for the limit check a margin threshold for the peak values to be displayed in the evaluation list can be defined Furthermore you can define how many peaks per range are listed For details see List Evaluation on page 208 7 2 8 4 Spurious Emissions Measurement Configuration A...

Page 204: ...wept individually and for which different limitations apply If you edit the sweep list always follow the rules and consider the limitations described in Ranges and Range Settings on page 202 Range Start Range Stop 205 Filter Type 205 RBW 205 VBW 205 Sweep Time Mode 205 Sweep Time 205 Detector 206 Reference Level 206 RF Attenuation Mode 206 RF Attenuation 206 Preamp 206 Sweep Points 206 Stop After ...

Page 205: ...emote command SENSe LIST RANGe ri FILTer TYPE on page 692 RBW Sets the RBW value for this range For details on the RBW see Chapter 7 6 1 1 Separating Signals by Selecting an Appropriate Resolution Bandwidth on page 317 Remote command SENSe LIST RANGe ri BANDwidth RESolution on page 689 VBW Sets the VBW value for this range For details on the VBW see Chapter 7 6 1 2 Smoothing the Trace Using the Vi...

Page 206: ...RF attenuation For details on attenuation see Chapter 7 5 1 2 RF Attenuation on page 309 Remote command SENSe LIST RANGe ri INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 693 RF Attenuation Sets the attenuation value for that range Remote command SENSe LIST RANGe ri INPut ATTenuation on page 693 Preamp Switches the preamplifier on or off For details on the preamplifier see Preamplifier on page 313 Remote command ...

Page 207: ...imit Stop Sets an absolute limit value at the start or stop frequency of the range dBm Remote command SENSe LIST RANGe ri LIMit STARt on page 694 SENSe LIST RANGe ri LIMit STOP on page 694 Insert before Range Insert after Range Inserts a new range to the left of the currently focused range before or to the right after The range numbers of the currently focused range and all higher ranges are incre...

Page 208: ...st Evaluation State 208 Show Peaks 208 Margin 209 Details 209 Peaks per Range 209 Save Evaluation List 209 List Evaluation State Activates or deactivates the list evaluation Remote command TRACe n DATA on page 832 Show Peaks If activated all peaks that have been detected during an active list evaluation are marked with blue squares in the diagram Remote command CALCulate n PEAKsearch PSHow on page...

Page 209: ... is 50 Remote command CALCulate n PEAKsearch SUBRanges on page 698 Save Evaluation List Exports the evaluation list of the Spurious Emissions measurement to an ASCII file for evaluation in an external application If necessary change the decimal separator for evaluation in other languages Define the file name and storage location in the file selection dialog box that is dis played when you select t...

Page 210: ...Show Peaks option To restrict peak detection define a Margin Only peaks that exceed this value are detected To allow for more peaks per range to be detected than the default 1 increase the Peaks per Range value and set Details to On 8 Start a sweep The determined powers and limit deviations for each range are indicated in the evaluation list If activated the peak power levels for each range are al...

Page 211: ...with the syntax Parameter name numeric value basic unit File contents Explanation File header Type FPL1003 Model Version 1 00 Firmware version Date 31 Mar 11 Storage date of data set Mode ANALYZER SPURIOUS Operating mode and measurement function Center Freq 13250000000 000000 Hz X axis settings Freq Offset 0 000000 Hz Span 26499982000 000000 Hz x Axis LIN Start 9000 000000 Hz Stop 8000000000 00000...

Page 212: ...ns can be switched on at a time About the Measurements 212 Typical Applications 213 APD and CCDF Results 213 APD and CCDF Basics Gated Triggering 215 APD and CCDF Configuration 216 How to Perform an APD or CCDF Measurement 222 Examples 223 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement 226 7 2 9 1 About the Measurements The probability of amplitude values can be measured with the Amplitude Probabi...

Page 213: ... provide large reserves for the peak power to prevent signal compression and thus an increase of the bit error rate at the receiver The peak power or the crest factor of a signal is therefore an important transmitter design criterion The crest factor is defined as the peak power to mean power ratio or logarithmically as the peak level minus the average level of the signal To reduce power consumpti...

Page 214: ... Function CCDF The Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function CCDF shows the probability that the mean signal power amplitude will be exceeded in percent The level above the mean power is plotted along the x axis of the graph The origin of the axis corresponds to the mean power level The probability that a level will be exceeded is plotted along the y axis A red line indicates the ideal Gaussi...

Page 215: ...sired position Diagram Scaling The scaling for both the x axis and y axis of the statistics diagram can be configured In particular you can restrict the range of amplitudes to be evaluated and the probabili ties to be displayed Remote commands CALCulate n STATistics CCDF X t on page 708 CALCulate n STATistics RESult res on page 709 7 2 9 4 APD and CCDF Basics Gated Triggering Statistic measurement...

Page 216: ... CCDF Configuration Configuration consists of the following settings Make sure the specified reference level is higher than the measured peak value see Reference Level on page 311 Basic Settings 217 Gate Range Definition for APD and CCDF 218 Scaling for Statistics Diagrams 220 Measurements and Results ...

Page 217: ... only Defines a probability value Thus the power which is exceeded with a given probability can be determined very easily If marker 1 is deactivated it is switched on automati cally Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m Y PERCent on page 702 Analysis Bandwidth Defines the analysis bandwidth For correct measurement of the signal statistics the analysis bandwidth has to be wider than the signal bandwi...

Page 218: ...e ranges are defined using the Edit Gate Ranges function Remote command SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe t STATe gr on page 704 Edit Gate Ranges Opens a dialog box to configure up to 3 gate ranges for each trace For details see Gate Range Definition for APD and CCDF on page 218 Adjust Settings Adjusts the level settings according to the measured difference between peak and min imum power for APD measuremen...

Page 219: ... all traces Make sure the defined period is not longer than the total measurement time of the cur rent measurement Keep in mind that the measurement time depends on the band width and the number of samples see Number of Samples on page 218 The cur rent measurement time is indicated as Meas Time in the channel bar Remote command SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe t PERiod on page 703 Range x Use Activates tra...

Page 220: ...Or AMPT Scale Config For statistics displays scale settings are available for both the y axis and the x axis The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Chap ter 11 6 9 4 Scaling the Diagram on page 705 Figure 7 32 Scale settings for CCDF diagram In statistical diagrams the x axis displays the signal level values y axis in standard display while the y axis displays the pro...

Page 221: ...to the measured level irrespec tive of the selected unit The scaling of the x axis is changed accordingly The setting range is 200 dB in 0 1 dB steps Remote command DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 777 Y Axis Defines the scaling settings for the probability distribution Y Unit Y Axis Defines the scaling type of the y axis as either percentage or absolute The default value is ...

Page 222: ...ions demonstrate how to perform basic statistic measurements For remote operation see Chapter 11 6 9 7 Programming Example Measuring Sta tistics on page 709 To start a basic statistic measurement 1 Press the MEAS key then select the APD or CCDF measurement 2 Start a sweep As soon as the defined number of samples have been measured the statistical evaluation is displayed To perform a statistic meas...

Page 223: ...e the stop time of range 2 as start time of range 2 duration of pulse 2 f Activate range 2 by setting Range 2 Use to On g Define the third range in the same way 5 Start a sweep As soon as the defined number of samples have been measured the statistical evaluation is displayed Only the signal levels within the pulse periods are consid ered 7 2 9 7 Examples Configuration Example Gated Statistics A s...

Page 224: ...dulated signal the amplitude distribution at the output of the IF filter becomes a Gaussian dis tribution according to the central limit theorem and thus corresponds to a white noise signal The true amplitude distribution of the signal therefore cannot be determined A programming example demonstrating a statistics measurement in a remote environ ment is provided in Chapter 11 6 9 7 Programming Exa...

Page 225: ... S FPL1000 225 User Manual 1178 3370 02 09 Figure 7 33 Amplitude probability distribution of white noise 4 Now select the CCDF measurement function from the Select Measurement dia log box Figure 7 34 CCDF of white noise Measurements and Results ...

Page 226: ... examined define a trigger source and a gate 7 2 10 Time Domain Power Measurement The Time Domain Power measurement determines the power of a signal in the time domain A time domain power measurement is only possible for zero span About the Measurement 226 Time Domain Power Results 226 Time Domain Power Basics Range Definition Using Limit Lines 227 Time Domain Power Configuration 228 How to Measur...

Page 227: ...S The measured values are updated after each sweep or aver aged over a user defined number of sweeps trace averaging The results can also be queried using the remote commands described in Chap ter 11 6 10 Measuring the Time Domain Power on page 711 7 2 10 3 Time Domain Power Basics Range Definition Using Limit Lines The range of the measured signal to be evaluated for the power measurement can be ...

Page 228: ...t range In order to get stable measurement results for a limited evaluation range usually a trig ger is required 7 2 10 4 Time Domain Power Configuration Access Overview Select Measurement Time Domain Power Time Dom Power Config The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Chap ter 11 6 10 Measuring the Time Domain Power on page 711 Results 229 Limit State 229 Left Limit Ri...

Page 229: ...tion SUMMary RMS RESult on page 717 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary MEAN STATe on page 713 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary MEAN RESult on page 715 Limit State Switches the limitation of the evaluation range on or off Default setting is off If deactivated the entire sweep time is evaluated If switched on the evaluation range is defined by the left and right limit If only one limit is se...

Page 230: ...n dialog box b Switch on the limits by setting the Limit State to On The limit lines S1 and S2 are displayed c Define the left limit limit line S1 the right limit S2 or both 5 Start a sweep The measured powers are displayed in the marker results 7 2 10 6 Measurement Example This measurement example demonstrates the time domain power calculation for a GSM burst Test setup Signal generator settings ...

Page 231: ...nics and their distortion including the total harmonic distortion About the Measurement 231 Harmonic Distortion Basics 232 Harmonic Distortion Results 234 Harmonic Distortion Configuration 235 How to Determine the Harmonic Distortion 237 7 2 11 1 About the Measurement With this measurement it is possible to measure the harmonics easily for example from a VCO In addition the total harmonic distorti...

Page 232: ...rious results If necessary the fundamental wave must be attenuated selectively with respect to the other harmonics with a high pass filter Harmonics are particularly critical regarding high power transmitters such as transceivers because large harmonics can interfere with other radio services Harmonic distortion can be determined as the level of the individual components or as the root mean square...

Page 233: ...et RF attenuation The formula for the internally generated level P1 at the 2nd harmonic in dBm is P1 2 PI S H I 2 The lower measurement limit for the harmonic is the noise floor of the signal analyzer The harmonic of the measured DUT should if sufficiently averaged by means of a video filter be at least 4 dB above the noise floor so that the measurement error due to the input noise is less than 1 ...

Page 234: ...nal analyzer contribute to the har monic the reduction in the harmonic level is correspondingly smaller High sensitivity harmonics measurements If harmonics have very small levels the resolution bandwidth required to measure them must be reduced considerably The sweep time is therefore also increased con siderably In this case the measurement of individual harmonics is carried out with the R S FPL...

Page 235: ...ower Remote commands The results can also be queried using remote commands The first harmonic frequency can be read out via the general center frequency com mand SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 760 THD CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion HARMonics DISTortion on page 722 List of harmonics CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion HARMonics LIST on page 723 7 2 11 4 Harmonic Distortion Configuration Access Overview Se...

Page 236: ...requency This setting is identical to the normal sweep time for zero span see also Sweep Time on page 324 Remote command SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO on page 775 Harmonic RBW Auto Enables disables the automatic adjustment of the resolution bandwidth for Normal 3dB Gaussian filter types The automatic adjustment is carried out according to RBWn RBW1 n If RBWn is not available the next higher value is used ...

Page 237: ...dialog box 2 Define the number of harmonics to be determined using the Number of Harmon ics softkey 3 Perform a sweep The trace for the determined harmonics are displayed in the diagram separated by red display lines The measured power for each harmonic in relation to the funda mental is indicated in the result table 4 If the signal changes significantly during or after the harmonics measurement u...

Page 238: ... to measure the third order intercept point TOI a two tone signal with equal carrier levels is expected at the R S FPL1000 input Marker 1 and marker 2 both nor mal markers are set to the maximum of the two signals Marker 3 and marker 4 are placed on the intermodulation products The R S FPL1000 calculates the third order intercept point from the level difference between the first 2 markers and the ...

Page 239: ...ed by mixing the 2nd harmonic of useful signal PU1 and signal PU2 fi1 2 fu1 fu2 1 fi2 2 fu2 fu1 2 Dependency on level of useful signals The level of the intermodulation products depends on the level of the useful signals If the two useful signals are increased by 1 dB the level of the intermodulation products increases by 3 dB which means that the spacing aD3 between intermodulation signals and us...

Page 240: ...intermodulation products of the third order increase three times as quickly as the useful signals The intercept point is the fictitious level where the two lines intersect It cannot be measured directly since the useful level is previously limited by the maximum two port output power Calculation method However the intercept point can be calculated from the known line slopes and the measured spacin...

Page 241: ...le to obtain the range that is required Since phase noise decreases as the carrier offset increases its influence decreases with increasing fre quency offset from the useful signals The following diagrams illustrate the intermodulation free dynamic range as a function of the selected bandwidth and of the level at the input mixer signal level set RF attenuation at different useful signal offsets Fi...

Page 242: ...ts sep arately using a small span The measurement time will be reduced in particular if the offset of the useful signals is large To find signals reliably when frequency span is small it is best to synchronize the signal sources and the R S FPL1000 7 2 12 3 TOI Results As a result of the TOI measurement the following values are displayed in the marker area of the diagram Label Description TOI Thir...

Page 243: ...er m FUNCtion TOI RESult MAXimum on page 725 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion TOI RESult MINimum on page 726 7 2 12 4 TOI Configuration Access Overview Select Measurement Third Order Intercept TOI Config The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Chap ter 11 6 12 Measuring the Third Order Intercept Point on page 724 Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 Marker 4 244 Search Signals 244 ...

Page 244: ...Intercept The precise TOI for the R S FPL1000 in relation to the input signals is provided in the data sheet For remote operation see Chapter 11 6 12 2 Programming Example Measuring the TOI on page 727 1 Apply a two tone signal with equal carrier levels to the R S FPL1000 input 2 On the R S FPL1000 press the MEAS key 3 Select the Third Order Intercept measurement function from the Select Measure m...

Page 245: ...ise is reduced the trace is smoothed further and the intermodulation prod ucts can be seen clearly 5 Set the VBW to 1 kHz Measuring intermodulation using the Third Order Intercept TOI measurement function 1 Press the MEAS key and select the Third Order Intercept measurement function from the Select Measurement dialog box The R S FPL1000 activates four markers to measure the intermodulation dis tan...

Page 246: ...gnals at the input mixer When the RF attenuation is added the mixer level is reduced and the intermodulation distance is increased With an additional RF attenuation of 10 dB the levels of the intermodulation products are reduced by 20 dB The noise level is however increased by 10 dB Increase the RF attenuation to 20 dB to reduce intermodulation products The R S FPL1000 s intrinsic intermodulation ...

Page 247: ...rement is activated marker 1 is set to the peak level which is consid ered to be the carrier level Delta markers 2 and 3 are automatically set symmetrically to the carrier on the adjacent peak values of the trace The markers can be adjusted manually if necessary The R S FPL1000 calculates the power at the marker positions from the measured levels The AM modulation depth is calculated as the ratio ...

Page 248: ...M Modulation Depth Configuration Access Overview Select Measurement AM Modulation Depth AM Mod Depth Config The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Chap ter 11 6 13 Measuring the AM Modulation Depth on page 727 Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 248 Search Signals 249 Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 Indicates the detected characteristic values as determined by the AM Modulation Dep...

Page 249: ...e n MARKer m X on page 845 CALCulate n DELTamarker m X on page 843 CALCulate n DELTamarker m X RELative on page 857 Search Signals Performs a new search on the input signal and recalculates the AM Modulation Depth according to the measured values Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion MDEPth SEARchsignal ONCE on page 728 7 2 13 4 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement If the results ...

Page 250: ...ati cally and restart the calculation of the AM Modulation Depth 7 2 14 Electromagnetic Interference EMI Measurement The optional electromagnetic interference EMI measurement R S FPL1 K54 is suit able for measurements according to commercial and military electromagnetic compati bility EMC standards The functionality of the measurement is particularly useful in research and development The EMI meas...

Page 251: ...ce over the required frequency range This stage uses a detector that allows for a fast sweep time e g the peak detector During the second stage or final test the R S FPL1000 performs the actual EMC test a refined measurement with detectors designed for and required by EMC standards To keep measurement times brief the R S FPL1000 performs a final measurement only on frequencies you have marked with...

Page 252: ...ovides the following information Label Description Type Marker name Ref Reference marker for delta markers Trace Assigned trace X value Marker x value frequency for final test Y value Marker y value level during inital measurement Final Test Detector used for final EMI test Line name Line activated for limit check Δ Limit Delta between measured level and limit line if active The value is colored t...

Page 253: ...information see Detectors and Dwell Time on page 253 Detectors and Dwell Time The EMI measurement adds new detectors to those already available with the base unit The additional detectors are especially designed for and required by EMI applica tions The additional detectors are available only if the EMI R S FPL1 K54 measurement option is installed and the filter type CISPR or MIL is selected see R...

Page 254: ...ll time for an EMI measurement The dwell time defines how long the R S FPL1000 measures the signal at the individual frequencies Each detector needs a different period of time to fully charge and discharge the indi vidual requirements on the dwell time are described for each detector For details on defining the dwell time for an R S FPL1 EMI measurement see Defining a Dwell Time for the Final Meas...

Page 255: ...Quasipeak detector CISPR filter only The quasipeak detector displays the maximum signal level weighted to CISPR 16 1 1 that was detected during the dwell time The quasipeak detector is only available for the CISPR filter and not for an RBW of 1 MHz The filter bandwidth and time parameters of the detector depend on the measured fre quency The time lag of the simulated pointer instrument reflects th...

Page 256: ... 9 kHz 120 kHz 1 MHz Time lag of the simulated pointer instrument 160 ms 160 ms 100 ms 100 ms Consider the following when defining the dwell time Unknown signals select a dwell time of at least 1 second to ensure that pulses down to a frequency of 5 Hz are weighted correctly Pulsed signals or signals that fluctuate slowly the dwell time must cover at least the time until the first signal peak is m...

Page 257: ...efines the number of measurement values collected dur ing one sweep Thus increasing the sweep points also increases the accuracy of the results regarding the frequency resolution Because EMI measurements often cover a large frequency range you should define an adequate number of sweep points especially when performing the measurement on a logarithmic axis As on a linear axis the distance from one ...

Page 258: ...For measurements on power lines the R S FPL1 EMI measurement adds functionality to control a line impedance stabilization network LISN directly Thus you can deter mine the interference caused by power supplies and cables This feature requires the optional additional interfaces R S FPL1 B5 You can connect the LISN to the user port of the R S FPL1000 Control cables for the various LISNs are availabl...

Page 259: ...523 Initial Measurement Peak Search The purpose of an initial peak search is to find signals with a high interference level quickly The peak search is performed with a fast detector like the peak or average detector The initial peak search is the basis for a possible refined measurement of interferences with the detectors specific to EMI measurements The results of the initial peak search are show...

Page 260: ...asurement determine the peak on another trace using the peak detector by assigning another marker to that trace For this marker frequency per form a refined measurement using the quasipeak detector Final Measurement at the Marker Position Finding peaks with the help of an initial marker peak search reduces data to be evalu ated and thus measurement time A final measurement with a special EMI detec...

Page 261: ...ation with EMI measurements the marker levels from the initial measurement are compared to the limit line values The result of the limit line check is displayed in the diagram as usual In the EMI Result Summary the limit check is based on the results of the final test Since the marker may be determined using a different detector than the final test results the two limit check results may differ Th...

Page 262: ...e marker which is currently selected for editing is highlighted orange Remote command Marker selected via suffix m in remote commands Marker State Activates or deactivates the marker in the diagram Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m STATe on page 844 CALCulate n DELTamarker m STATe on page 842 Marker Position X value Defines the position x value of the marker in the diagram For normal markers the...

Page 263: ... is configured see Defining a Fixed Reference on page 354 the reference point FXD can also be selected instead of another marker Remote command CALCulate n DELTamarker m MREFerence on page 842 Linking to Another Marker Links the current marker to the marker selected from the list of active markers If the x axis value of the initial marker is changed the linked marker follows to the same posi tion ...

Page 264: ...he dwell time The Quasi Peak detector is only available for the CISPR filter and not for an RBW of 1 MHz CISPR Aver age Determines a weighted average signal level according to CISPR 16 1 1 The average value according to CISPR 16 1 1 is the maximum value detected while calculating the linear average value during the speci fied dwell time The CISPR Average detector is only available for the CISPR fi...

Page 265: ...emote command CALCulate n MARKer m STATe on page 844 CALCulate n DELTamarker m STATe on page 842 EMI Final Measurement Configuration The final EMI measurement can be performed with different settings than the initial peak search These settings are described here Measurements and Results ...

Page 266: ...andwidth and Filter Types on page 253 The RBW filter configured in the bandwidth settings is identical to the filter configured in the EMI configuration Remote command SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE on page 770 RBW Defines the resolution bandwidth The available resolution bandwidths are specified in the data sheet Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible bandwidth If Auto is select...

Page 267: ...ce settings is used for the initial peak search only see Chapter 7 10 1 2 Trace Settings on page 393 Off No final test is performed PositivePeak Determines the maximum signal level that was detected during the specified dwell time Average Determines the average signal level of the samples that were collec ted during the specified dwell time Quasi Peak Determines the maximum signal level weighted t...

Page 268: ...he measurement bandwidth for commercial EMC standards according to CISPR For more information see Resolution Bandwidth and Filter Types on page 253 Remote command Filter type SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE on page 770 Filter bandwidth SENSe BANDwidth RESolution on page 769 Res BW MIL Defines the measurement bandwidth for military EMC standards For more information see Resolution Bandwidth and Fil...

Page 269: ...ISN control and output Remote command INPut ip LISN TYPE on page 733 Phase Selects the phase to be measured Phase N and L1 are included in all four LISN Phase L2 and L3 are only included in four line networks You can select one phase only for each measurement Remote command INPut ip LISN PHASe on page 733 150 kHz Highpass Enables or disables the use of an additional 150 kHz highpass filter to prot...

Page 270: ...s feature requires the optional additional interfaces R S FPL1 B5 For more information see Chapter 7 9 4 7 Demodulating Marker Values and Providing Audio Output Marker Demodulation on page 376 Limit Lines General limit line functionality is provided by the R S FPL1000 base unit The base unit also provides various predefined limit lines that you can use for various applica tions The R S FPL1 EMI me...

Page 271: ...igure a LISN control This feature requires the optional additional interfaces R S FPL1 B5 10 Configure the EMI measurement markers a Select the Marker Config softkey and activate the number of markers or delta markers you want to analyze b For each active marker select a detector to be used for the Final Test that is the subsequent EMI measurement at the marker position c If you already know which...

Page 272: ...nsducers for the current EMI measurement setup d Select a transducer line in the overview and select the Active setting for it 15 Press the RUN SINGLE key to start a new EMI measurement If activated a peak search is performed For each active marker a final measure ment is performed using the specified detector for the specified dwell time If acti vated the signal is demodulated at the active marke...

Page 273: ...measure ments usually require a filter with a 6R S FPL1000dB bandwidth 5 Define the dwell time for which each marker position is measured during the final measurement 6 To obtain an overview of exceptional values in the input signal during the initial measurement activate the Auto Peak Search 7 Select the measurement bandwidth a Select the Res BW CISPR softkey A CISPR 6 dB filter is configured b S...

Page 274: ... of the instrument that are compatible to the current EMI measurement settings are displayed in the overview c In the overview click the Check Traces setting for the EN55011A limit line and select trace 1 to be included in the limit check Trace 2 which is defined as the average will always be lower than trace 1 which contains peak values 3 Press the RUN SINGLE key to start a new EMI measurement If...

Page 275: ...ng the dwell time Unknown signals select a dwell time of at least 1 second to ensure that pulses down to a frequency of 5 Hz are weighted correctly Pulsed signals or signals that fluctuate slowly the dwell time must cover at least the time until the first signal peak is measured can require long dwell time unmodulated signals or signals with a high modulation frequency the dwell time must cover at...

Page 276: ...In this case you must decrease the level at the RF input connector and then close the message box Then measurement is possible again Reactivating the RF input is also possible via the remote command INPut ip ATTenuation PROTection RESet Radio Frequency State 276 Impedance 276 SAW filter 276 Radio Frequency State Activates input from the RF Input connector Remote command INPut ip SELect on page 790...

Page 277: ...rs For precise power measurement up to 4 power sensors can be connected to the instrument via the optional power sensor interface on the rear panel or the USB con nectors Both manual operation and remote control are supported For a detailed list of supported sensors see the data sheet Signal source Power sensor Signal analyzer Figure 7 41 Power sensor support standard test setup Using the power se...

Page 278: ...uency Coupling 279 Unit Scale 280 Meas Time Average 280 Setting the Reference Level from the Measurement Meas Ref 280 Reference Value 280 Use Ref Level Offset 280 Sensor Level Offset 281 Average Count Number of Readings 281 Duty Cycle 281 State Switches the power measurement for all power sensors on or off Note that in addition to this general setting each power sensor can be activated or deactiva...

Page 279: ...umbers not yet assigned are automatically assigned to the next free power sensor index for which Auto Assignment is selected Alternatively you can assign the sensors manually by deactivating the Auto option and selecting a serial number from the list Remote command SENSe PMETer p STATe on page 798 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer p DEFine on page 792 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer p CONFigure ...

Page 280: ...wer or modulated signals Long Signals at the lower end of the measurement range 50 dBm or Signals with lower power to minimize the influence of noise Manual Manual averaging mode The average count is set with the Average Count Number of Readings setting Remote command SENSe PMETer p MTIMe on page 796 SENSe PMETer p MTIMe AVERage STATe on page 797 Setting the Reference Level from the Measurement Me...

Page 281: ...y cycle to a percent value for the correction of pulse modulated signals and activates the duty cycle correction With the correction activated the sensor calculates the signal pulse power from this value and the mean power Remote command SENSe PMETer p DCYCle STATe on page 795 SENSe PMETer p DCYCle VALue on page 795 7 3 2 3 How to Work With a Power Sensor The following step by step instructions de...

Page 282: ...ken into account manually select Manual and enter the number in the Number of Read ings field 8 To activate the duty cycle correction select DutyCycle and enter a percentage as the correction value 9 If you selected dB or as units relative display define a reference value a To set the currently measured power as a reference value press the Meas Ref button b Alternatively enter a value manually in ...

Page 283: ...n R S FPL1 B9 is installed and active an internal gen erator emits a signal at a specified frequency The generated signal is sent to the GEN Output 50 Ω connector You can connect your DUT to the output connector thus allow ing the analyzer to control the input signal for the device directly Figure 7 42 Test setup using the internal generator You can enable or disable and configure the generator in...

Page 284: ...or the R S FPL1000 also allows you to set a frequency offset for frequency converting measurements Using the internal generator as a tracking generator is only available in the Spectrum application for frequency sweeps If you switch to another application a currently active tracking generator is disabled Power sweep For a power sweep measurement the internal generator signal remains at a fixed fre...

Page 285: ...ve and only in the Spectrum application Thus you can use the internal generator signal as a reference input signal for your power converting DUT Then you can compare the DUT input to its output at the RF input of the analyzer Ideally the result is a linear trace that is the output is directly proportional to the input power Any distortion to the linear trace indicates the effects of the DUT This r...

Page 286: ... measurement setup The inherent frequency and power level distortions can be determined by enabling the use of the internal generator as a tracking generator The analyzer sends a predefined list of frequencies to the internal generator The frequency list for the calibration sweep contains 201 values by default divided in equidistant frequencies between the analyz er s start and stop frequency The ...

Page 287: ...rement settings do not deviate too much the measurement results can still be normalized approximately using the stored reference trace Approximate normalization is indicated by the APX label in the channel bar instead of NOR Approximate normalization occurs if one or more of the following values deviate from the calibration settings Coupling RBW VBW SWT Reference level RF attenuation Start or stop...

Page 288: ... subsequent measure ment which includes this component For an example see How to Remove the Effects of a Particular Component from Measurement Results Using Calibration on page 298 Note that the normalized measurement data is stored not the original reference trace Thus if you store the normalized trace directly after calibration without changing any settings the transducer factor is 0 dB for the ...

Page 289: ...measurement trace change the Reference Value Displayed Information and Errors Channel bar If internal generator control is active some additional information is displayed in the channel bar Label Description CWSource source power Internal generator in operation as independent CW source with specified level Trk Gen source power Internal generator active signal sent with source power level NOR Norma...

Page 290: ...ng can be avoided as follows Reducing the output level of the internal generator Level on page 291 Increasing the reference level Reference Level in the Amplitude menu 7 3 3 2 Internal Generator Settings Access Toolbar Generator Config Or Freq Generator Config The internal generator signal is only available if the optional Internal Generator R S FPL1 B9 is installed The preview in the dialog box v...

Page 291: ...y COUPling STATe on page 802 SOURce si POWer MODE on page 805 State Enables or disables the internal generator The generator signal is output at the GEN Output 50 Ω connector on the front panel Remote command OUTPut up STATe on page 800 Level Defines the output power of the internal generator The default output power is 20 dBm The range is from 60 dBm to 10 dBm Remote command SOURce si POWer LEVel...

Page 292: ... signal from the internal tracking generator For details see Chapter 7 3 3 1 Basics on the Internal Generator on page 283 Usage 292 State 293 Level 293 Level Offset 293 Frequency 293 Frequency Offset 293 Calibrate Transmission 293 Calibrate Reflection Short 294 Calibrate Reflection Open 294 Normalization state 294 Reference Position 294 Reference Value 295 Recall Cal Settings 295 Save as Trd Facto...

Page 293: ...fset to the output power of the internal generator Used to adapt the level display for example to cable loss Remote command SOURce si POWer LEVel IMMediate OFFSet on page 801 Frequency Defines the frequency of the internal generator signal as an independent CW source The step size depends on the measurement mode If the internal generator is used as a tracking generator the frequency is coupled to ...

Page 294: ...04 Selects the reflection method SENSe CORRection COLLect ACQuire on page 803 Starts the sweep for open circuit calibration Normalization state Switches the normalization of measurement results on or off This function is only available if the memory contains a reference trace that is after a calibration has been performed Remote command SENSe CORRection STATe on page 802 Reference Position Defines...

Page 295: ... etc Remote command SENSe CORRection RECall on page 804 Save as Trd Factor Uses the normalized measurement data to generate a transducer factor The trace data is converted to a transducer with unit dB and stored in a file with the specified name and the suffix trd under C ProgramData Rohde Schwarz ZNL FPL trd The frequency points are allo cated in equidistant steps between start and stop frequency...

Page 296: ...frequency and power level Tracking generator on page 284 constant power level frequency follows ana lyzer frequency only available for frequency sweeps in the Spectrum application Power sweep on page 284 constant frequency linearly increasing power level only available in the Spectrum application Remote command SOURce si FREQuency COUPling STATe on page 802 SOURce si POWer MODE on page 805 State E...

Page 297: ... values are allowed that is the level start value must be lower than the level stop value The range is from 60 dBm to 10 dBm If a Level Offset is defined the Level Start Level Stop values are indicated with the offset applied Remote command SOURce si POWer STARt on page 806 SOURce si POWer STOP on page 806 Calibrate Transmission Starts a transmission type measurement to determine a reference trace...

Page 298: ... tracking generator define a Level Offset 7 Select the Source Calibration type Transmission to perform a calibration sweep and store a reference trace for the measurement setup Normalization is automatically set to On 8 Optionally shift the reference line further down in the result display by decreasing the Reference Position The measurement setup is now calibrated Subsequent measurement results a...

Page 299: ...ng a Tracking Generator on page 298 1 Insert the additional component in the calibrated measurement setup and perform a new measurement 2 Select the GEN Config tool on the toolbar 3 With active normalization set the Calibration Reference Value to the same value as the gain or attenuation the inserted component causes 4 Optionally shift the reference line further down in the result display by decre...

Page 300: ...able for frequency sweeps or I Q measure ments The video output is a signal of 1 V It can be used for example to control demodulated audio frequencies Remote command OUTPut up IF SOURce on page 808 OUTPut up IF IFFRequency on page 809 SYSTem SPEaker VOLume on page 811 SYSTem SPEaker STATe on page 810 SYSTem SPEaker MUTE on page 811 Noise Source Control The R S FPL1000 provides a connector NOISE SO...

Page 301: ...of the required configuration Defining the Scope of the Measurement Frequency Range 301 Stepping Through the Frequency Range Center Frequency Stepsize 301 7 4 1 1 Defining the Scope of the Measurement Frequency Range The frequency range defines the scope of the signal and spectrum to be analyzed It can either be defined as a span around a center frequency or as a range from a start to a stop frequ...

Page 302: ...ion to the selected span or resolution bandwidth for zero span measurements In some cases however it may be useful to set the step size to other values For example to analyze signal harmonics you can define the step size to be equal to the center frequency In this case each stroke of the arrow key selects the center fre quency of another harmonic Similarly you can define the step size to be equal ...

Page 303: ...ast Span 304 Center Frequency Stepsize 305 Frequency Offset 305 Center Frequency Defines the center frequency of the signal in Hertz The allowed range of values for the center frequency depends on the frequency span span 0 spanmin 2 fcenter fmax spanmin 2 zero span 0 Hz fcenter fmax fmax and spanmin depend on the instrument and are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer ...

Page 304: ...mon for measurements over large frequency ranges as it enhan ces the resolution of the lower frequencies On the other hand high frequencies get more crowded and become harder to distinguish Remote command DISPlay WINDow n SUBWindow w TRACe t X SPACing on page 760 Full Span Sets the span to the full frequency range of the R S FPL1000 specified in the data sheet This setting is useful for overview m...

Page 305: ...ution bandwidth The used value is indicated in the Value field Marker This setting is only available if a marker is active Sets the step size to the value of the current marker and removes the coupling of the step size to span or resolution bandwidth The used value is indicated in the Value field Manual Defines a fixed step size for the center frequency Enter the step size in the Value field Remot...

Page 306: ...dth and the threshold value are shown in the diagram by red lines which are labeled as TRK Signal Tracking Access Overview Frequency Signal Tracking tab Defines the settings for signal tracking These settings are only available for spans 0 For more details see Chapter 7 4 3 Keeping the Center Frequency Stable Signal Tracking on page 306 If activated after each sweep the center frequency is set to ...

Page 307: ...form a measurement in the time domain define the Center Frequency and select the Zero Span button To perform a measurement over the entire available frequency range select the Full Span button To return to the previously set frequency range select the Last Span button 7 4 5 How to Move the Center Frequency through the Frequency Range In some cases it may be useful to move the center frequency thro...

Page 308: ...o used to determine the optimum hardware settings for the R S FPL1000 The defined reference level should correspond with the maxi mum expected RF input level When determining the expected input level consider that the power from all input sig nals contribute to the total power The reference level must be higher than the total power from all signals The optimum reference level for the current measu...

Page 309: ...e 1 The initial reference level is 2 dBm with no offset Both the displayed reference level and the internal reference level are 2 dBm 2 An offset of 3 dB is defined The displayed reference level is adjusted to 5 dBm The internal reference level remains at 2 dBm 5 dBm displayed ref level 3 dB offset 2 dBm 3 Now the user decreases the reference level to 1 dBm The displayed reference level is adjuste...

Page 310: ...ds to 1 10 of the total range Linear scaling is use ful to determine precise levels for a small range of values However if large and small values appear in the same display it is difficult to determine individual values precisely or to distinguish values that are close together In a logarithmic display smaller values are distributed among a much larger area of the display while large values are co...

Page 311: ...tly This is indicated by an IF Overload status display The reference level can also be used to scale power diagrams the reference level is then used as the maximum on the y axis Since the hardware of the R S FPL1000 is adapted according to this value it is rec ommended that you set the reference level close above the expected maximum signal level Thus you ensure an optimum measurement no compressi...

Page 312: ...known input impedance 50 Ω or 75 Ω see Impedance on page 276 conversion to other units is possible The following units are available and directly convertible dBm dBmV dBμV dBm MHz power density dBμA dBpW Volt Ampere Watt Additional units available only for installed R S FPL1 K54 EMI measurements option dBmV MHz normalized to 1 MHz dBµV MHz normalized to 1 MHz dBµV mMHz normalized to 1 MHz only ava...

Page 313: ...high power levels When decreasing the attenuation manually ensure that the power level does not exceed the maximum level allowed at the RF input as an overload may lead to hardware damage For details see Chapter 7 5 1 2 RF Attenuation on page 309 Remote command INPut ip ATTenuation on page 778 INPut ip ATTenuation AUTO on page 778 Impedance For some measurements the reference impedance for the mea...

Page 314: ...in Chap ter 11 8 3 Configuring the Vertical Axis Amplitude Scaling on page 776 Range 314 Ref Level Position 314 Auto Scale Once 315 Scaling 315 Range Defines the displayed y axis range in dB The default value is 100 dB Remote command DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe on page 779 Ref Level Position Defines the reference level position i e the position of the maximum AD converter value on the level a...

Page 315: ...nd DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe AUTO ONCE on page 780 Scaling Defines the scaling method for the y axis For more information see Chapter 7 5 1 3 Scaling on page 310 Logarithmic Logarithmic scaling only available for logarithmic units dB and A V Watt Linear with Unit Linear scaling in the unit of the measured signal Linear Per cent Linear scaling in percentages from 0 to 100 Absolute The labeli...

Page 316: ...weep settings that apply to most measurements are described here These parameters define how the data is measured how much data is collected internally and which filters are used Impact of the Bandwidth Filter and Sweep Settings 316 Bandwidth Filter and Sweep Settings 321 Reference List of Available RRC and Channel Filters 330 7 6 1 Impact of the Bandwidth Filter and Sweep Settings The bandwidth f...

Page 317: ...ired Sweep Time Two signals with the same amplitude can be resolved if the resolution bandwidth is smaller than or equal to the frequency spacing of the signal If the resolution bandwidth is equal to the frequency spacing the spectrum display screen shows a level drop of 3 dB precisely in the center of the two signals Decreasing the resolution bandwidth makes the level drop larger which thus makes...

Page 318: ...or average detector no longer occurs However the VBW is still considered when calculating the Sweep Time This leads to a longer Sweep Time for small VBW values Thus you can reduce the VBW value to achieve more stable trace curves even when using an RMS or average detector Normally if the RMS or average detector is used the Sweep Time should be increased to get more stable traces 7 6 1 3 Coupling V...

Page 319: ...nt depends on the span RBW VBW and Sweep Time settings The R S FPL1000 automatically selects the appropriate sweep type For RBWs lower than 100 kHz and for gated measurements an FFT is performed otherwise a sweep is performed Optimization In FFT mode FFT analysis is performed to determine a spectrum of frequencies Sev eral analysis steps are required to cover the entire span The subspan which is c...

Page 320: ...mal 3 dB Gaussian filters Gaussian filters provide a good compromise between steep edges and a short settling time This filter is suitable for most measurement tasks and is used by default The available Gaussian 3 dB filters are listed in the R S FPL1000 data sheet Channel filters Channel filters are fairly steep but require a long settling time they are useful for pulse measurements in the time d...

Page 321: ...figurations Average Max Hold or Min Hold are set the Sweep Average Count also determines the number of averaging or maximum search proce dures see Analyzing Several Traces Trace Mode on page 389 For details on how the number of sweep points and the sweep count affect the trace results on the screen see Mapping Samples to sweep Points with the Trace Detector on page 386 7 6 1 9 How Often Data is Me...

Page 322: ...0 322 User Manual 1178 3370 02 09 How to perform a basic sweep measurement is described in Chapter 7 2 1 2 How to Perform a Basic Sweep Measurement on page 98 Figure 7 43 Bandwidth dialog box for RF measurements Bandwidth Filter and Sweep Configuration ...

Page 323: ...unt 326 Sweep Points 326 Optimization 327 Sweep Type 327 Single Sweep Run Single 327 Continuous Sweep Run Cont 328 Continue Single Sweep 328 Spectrogram Frames 329 Select Frame 329 Continue Frame 329 Frame Count 329 Clear Spectrogram 329 RBW Defines the resolution bandwidth The available resolution bandwidths are specified in the data sheet Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible b...

Page 324: ...ted Manual For manual mode define the bandwidth value The available video bandwidths are specified in the data sheet Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible bandwidth If the video bandwidth is defined manually a green bullet is displayed next to the VBW display in the channel bar Remote command SENSe BANDwidth VIDeo AUTO on page 771 SENSe BANDwidth VIDeo on page 771 Sweep Time Defi...

Page 325: ...h RESolution RATio on page 770 RBW VBW Sets the coupling ratio between the resolution bandwidth and the video bandwidth This setting is only effective if VBW is set to auto mode For more information see Chapter 7 6 1 3 Coupling VBW and RBW on page 318 Sine 1 1 Video Bandwidth Resolution Bandwidth This is the default setting for the coupling ratio RBW VBW and is rec ommended if sinusoidal signals a...

Page 326: ...ues from 0 to 200000 are allowed If the values 0 or 1 are set one sweep is performed The sweep count is applied to all the traces in all diagrams If the trace modes Average Max Hold or Min Hold are set this value also deter mines the number of averaging or maximum search procedures In continuous sweep mode if Sweep Count 0 default averaging is performed over 10 sweeps For Sweep Count 1 no averagin...

Page 327: ...for the A D converter It is recommended that you set the Sweep Time to Auto to optimize the sweep rate Auto Uses a medium sized subspan to obtain a compromise between a large dynamic range and a fast sweep rate The autorange function for the internal IF gain calculation is deactivated Note set the reference level accordingly to optimize the control range for the A D converter Zero span mode For ze...

Page 328: ...ter triggering starts the measurement and repeats it continuously until stopped While the measurement is running the Continuous Sweep softkey and the RUN CONT key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again The results are not deleted until a new measurement is started Note Sequencer If the Sequencer is active the Continuous Sweep softke...

Page 329: ...ram Frames Determines whether the results of the previous sweeps are included in the analysis of the next sweeps for trace modes Max Hold Min Hold and Average This function is available in single sweep mode only On When the average or peak values are determined for the new sweep the results of the previous sweeps in the spectrogram are also taken into account Off The average or peak values are det...

Page 330: ...ilter Bandwidth Filter Type Application 100 Hz CFILter 200 Hz CFILter 300 Hz CFILter 500 Hz CFILter 1 kHz CFILter 1 5 kHz CFILter 2 kHz CFILter 2 4 kHz CFILter SSB 2 7 kHz CFILter 3 kHz CFILter 3 4 kHz CFILter 4 kHz CFILter DAB Satellite 4 5 kHz CFILter 5 kHz CFILter 6 kHz CFILter 8 5 kHz CFILter ETS300 113 12 5 kHz channels 9 kHz CFILter AM Radio 10 kHz CFILter 12 5 kHz CFILter CDMAone 14 kHz CFI...

Page 331: ...n Triggering means to capture the interesting part of the signal Choosing the right trigger type and configuring all trigger settings correctly allows you to detect various incidents in your signals Gating allows you to restrict measurement analysis to the important part or parts of the signal for example bursts Triggering 331 Gating 340 7 7 1 Triggering 7 7 1 1 Triggered Measurements In a basic m...

Page 332: ...lar interval Power an input signal is checked for a defined power level The trigger signal can be any of the following The input signal at one of various stages in the signal analysis process before or after the input mixer after the video filter etc A signal from an external device via one of the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors on the instrument For details on the available trigger sources see Tr...

Page 333: ...level T T T Trigger hysteresis T Trigger on rising edge Trigger on falling edge Figure 7 45 Effects of the trigger hysteresis See Hysteresis on page 338 Trigger Drop Out Time If a modulated signal is instable and produces occasional drop outs during a burst you can define a minimum duration that the input signal must stay below the trigger level before triggering again This is called the drop out ...

Page 334: ...ast for the duration of the drop out time as defined above However if a drop out time is defined that is longer than the pulse width this condition cannot be met before the final pulse so a trigger event will not occur until the pulsed signal is over Drop Out T T T Figure 7 47 Trigger drop out time for falling edge trigger For gated measurements a combination of a falling edge trigger and a drop o...

Page 335: ...Preview 335 Frequency 336 RBW 336 Sweep Time 336 Trigger Source 336 Free Run 336 External Trigger 1 337 Video 337 IF Power 337 Time 337 Trigger Level 337 Repetition Interval 338 Drop Out Time 338 Trigger Offset 338 Hysteresis 338 Trigger Holdoff 339 Slope 339 Preview The preview mode allows you to try out trigger and gate settings before actually apply ing them to the current measurement The previ...

Page 336: ...rounded to the nearest possible bandwidth Remote command SENSe BANDwidth RESolution on page 769 Sweep Time Preview Defines the sweep time Allowed values depend on the ratio of span to RBW and RBW to VBW For details refer to the data sheet Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible sweep time Remote command SENSe SWEep TIME on page 775 Trigger Source Selects the trigger source If a tri...

Page 337: ...the time domain and not for I Q based data Remote command TRIG SOUR VID see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 785 IF Power Trigger Source The R S FPL1000 starts capturing data as soon as the trigger level is exceeded around the third intermediate frequency For frequency sweeps the third IF represents the start frequency The trigger band width at the third IF depends on the RBW and sweep type For mea...

Page 338: ...TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe on page 782 Trigger Offset Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the sweep For more information see Trigger Offset on page 332 Offset 0 Start of the sweep is delayed Offset 0 Sweep starts earlier pretrigger Only possible for zero span e g I Q Analyzer application and gated trigger switched off Maximum allowed range limited by the sweep time Pretr...

Page 339: ...nter frequency is displayed 2 Set the Frequency RBW and Sweep Time such that the relevant part of the signal is displayed for example a complete burst 3 Determine the parameters you want to use to define the trigger and gate conditions from the preview diagram for example the length of a burst or slot the upper or lower power level of a pulse the maximum noise level the power level or time at whic...

Page 340: ...old before the next level crossing triggers a new measure ment 6 To skip multiple triggers in a burst define a Holdoff time that must pass between two triggers The holdoff time should be slightly larger than the burst 7 7 2 Gating Gated Measurements 340 Gate Settings 341 How to Configure a Gated Measurement 342 7 7 2 1 Gated Measurements Like a gate provides an opening in a fence a gated measureme...

Page 341: ... define one or more extracts of the signal to be measured Gating is not available for measurements on I Q based data Gated Trigger 341 Gate Mode 341 Gate Delay 342 Gate Length 342 Gated Trigger Switches gated triggering on or off If the gate is switched on a gate signal applied to one of the TRIGGER INPUT connec tors or the internal IF power detector controls the sweep Remote command SENSe SWEep E...

Page 342: ...ed These step by step instructions demonstrate how to configure a gated measurement man ually To configure a common gated measurement 1 Determine the required parameters as described in Chapter 7 7 1 3 How to Deter mine the Required Trigger Gate Parameters on page 339 2 The gate is opened by a trigger event which must be based on a power source Define the trigger as described in Chapter 7 7 1 4 Ho...

Page 343: ...e measurement for adjustment waits for the next trigger The measurement for adjustment is performed without waiting for a trigger The trigger source is temporarily set to Free Run After the measurement is com pleted the original trigger source is restored The trigger level is adjusted as fol lows For IF Power and RF Power triggers Trigger Level Reference Level 15 dB For Video trigger Trigger Level...

Page 344: ...cally Auto Level on page 312 Remote command SENSe ADJust FREQuency on page 766 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level Automatically determines a reference level which ensures that no overload occurs at the R S FPL1000 for the current input data At the same time the internal attenuators are adjusted so the signal to noise ratio is optimized while signal compression and clipping are mi...

Page 345: ... UPPer on page 765 Lower Level Hysteresis When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the Auto Level function the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted To avoid frequent adapta tion due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines a lower threshold the signal must fall below compared to the last measure ment before the ref...

Page 346: ...es 16 markers per display win dow In the Spectrum application the same markers are displayed in all windows Alternatively change the position of the selected marker using the rotary knob By default the marker is moved from one pixel to the next If you need to position the marker more precisely change the step size to move from one sweep point to the next General Marker Setting You can also set an ...

Page 347: ... assigned to the individual markers The availability of special marker functions depends on whether the measurement is performed in the frequency or time domain and on the type of measurement Temporary markers are used in addition to the markers and delta markers to analyze the measurement results for special marker functions They disappear when the asso ciated function is deactivated 7 9 1 2 Acti...

Page 348: ...arkers or delta markers that were activated are displayed in the diagram area The following information is displayed there The marker type M for normal D for delta or special function name The marker number 1 to 16 The assigned trace number in square brackets The marker value on the y axis or the result of the marker function The marker position on the x axis For n dB down markers additional infor...

Page 349: ...s 352 7 9 2 1 Individual Marker Setup Up to 17 markers or delta markers can be activated for each window simultaneously Initial marker setup is performed using the Marker dialog box The markers are distributed among 3 tabs for a better overview By default the first marker is defined as a normal marker whereas all others are defined as delta markers with reference to the first marker All markers ar...

Page 350: ...ly Spectrogram frame the marker is assigned to Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram FRAMe on page 860 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram FRAMe on page 864 Marker Type Toggles the marker type The type for marker 1 is always Normal the type for delta marker 1 is always Delta These types cannot be changed Note If normal marker 1 is the active marker switching the Mkr Type activates an a...

Page 351: ...traces to measure the differ ence e g between a max hold trace and a min hold trace or between a measurement and a reference trace Remote command CALCulate n MARKer ms LINK TO MARKer md on page 844 CALCulate n DELTamarker ms LINK TO MARKer md on page 841 CALCulate n DELTamarker m LINK on page 840 Assigning the Marker to a Trace The Trace setting assigns the selected marker to an active trace The t...

Page 352: ...n MARKer m STATe on page 844 CALCulate n DELTamarker m STATe on page 842 All Markers Off Deactivates all markers in one step Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m AOFF on page 843 7 9 2 2 General Marker Settings Some general marker settings allow you to influence the marker behavior for all mark ers Marker Usage ...

Page 353: ...agram Off No separate marker table is displayed If Marker Info is active the marker information is displayed within the diagram area Auto Default If more than two markers are active the marker table is dis played automatically If Marker Info is active the marker information for up to two markers is displayed in the diagram area Remote command DISPlay WINDow n MTABle on page 846 Marker Info Turns t...

Page 354: ...marker 1 and a delta marker to the next peak The fixed reference marker is set to the position of marker 1 at the peak value The delta marker refers to the fixed reference marker The Level and Frequency or Time settings define the position and value of the ref erence marker To move the fixed reference move the red display lines marked FXD in the diagram or change the position settings in the Marke...

Page 355: ... MKR TO Search Config Markers are commonly used to determine peak values i e maximum or minimum val ues in the measured signal Configuration settings allow you to influence the peak search results For Spectrograms special marker settings are available see Chapter 7 9 3 2 Marker Search Settings for Spectrograms on page 357 Search Mode for Next Peak 355 Exclude LO 356 Peak Excursion 356 Auto Max Pea...

Page 356: ...quency 0 Hz is included in the marker search functions Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m LOEXclude on page 847 Peak Excursion Defines the minimum level value by which a signal must rise or fall so that it is identi fied as a maximum or a minimum by the search functions Entries from 0 dB to 80 dB are allowed the resolution is 0 1 dB The default setting for the peak excursion is 6 dB For Analog Mo...

Page 357: ...ted Remote command CALCulate n THReshold on page 850 Use Zoom Limits Search Limits If activated the peak search is restricted to the active zoom area defined for a single zoom Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m X SLIMits ZOOM STATe on page 850 Deactivating All Search Limits Search Limits Deactivates the search range limits Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m X SLIMits STATe on page 848 CALCulate ...

Page 358: ...ting All Search Limits 361 Search Mode for Next Peak in X Direction Selects the search mode for the next peak search within the currently selected frame Left Determines the next maximum minimum to the left of the current peak Absolute Determines the next maximum minimum to either side of the current peak Right Determines the next maximum minimum to the right of the current peak Remote command Chap...

Page 359: ...INimum ABOVe on page 867 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MINimum BELow on page 862 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MINimum BELow on page 867 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MINimum NEXT on page 863 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MINimum NEXT on page 867 Marker Search Type Defines the type of search to be performed in the spectrogram X Search Searches only within the currentl...

Page 360: ...lt display type For more information see Chapter 7 9 4 8 Marker Peak List on page 379 Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m PEXCursion on page 847 Auto Max Peak Search Auto Min Peak Search If activated a maximum or minimum peak search is performed automatically for marker 1 after each sweep For spectrogram displays define which frame the peak is to be searched in Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m ...

Page 361: ... 362 Search Next Minimum 362 Center Frequency Marker Frequency 362 Reference Level Marker Level 362 Peak Search Sets the selected marker delta marker to the maximum of the trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated For spectrogram displays define which frame the peak is to be searched in Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum PEAK on page 852 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum PEAK on ...

Page 362: ...ate n MARKer m MINimum NEXT on page 853 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum LEFT on page 853 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum RIGHt on page 854 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum NEXT on page 856 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum LEFT on page 856 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum RIGHt on page 856 Center Frequency Marker Frequency Sets the center frequency to the selected marker or delta marker frequency A pe...

Page 363: ...l Marker Functions 382 7 9 4 1 Precise Frequency Signal Count Marker Access Overview Analysis Marker Functions Select Marker Function Signal Count Signal Count Config Or MKR Select Marker Function Signal Count Signal Count Config The frequency count marker is not available if the tracking generator is active see Tracking Generator Settings on page 292 A normal marker determines the position of the...

Page 364: ...e fre quency is determined with the desired resolution and then the sweep is allowed to con tinue A measurement example is described in Measuring the Signal Frequency Using the Signal Counter on page 101 Signal counters are not available for measurements on I Q based data Remote commands Example Performing a Highly Accurate Frequency Measurement Using the Signal Count Marker on page 897 CALCulate ...

Page 365: ...following settings are required to obtain correct values Detector Sample or RMS Video bandwidth 0 1 resolution bandwidth with sample detector 3 x resolution bandwidth with RMS detector Trace averaging In the default setting the R S FPL1000 uses the sample detector for the noise function With the sample detector you can set the trace to Average mode to sta bilize the measured values When the RMS de...

Page 366: ... can be calculated from the measured power density level It is calculated by deducting the set RF attenuation RF Att from the displayed noise level and adding 174 to the result The individual marker settings correspond to those defined in the Marker dialog box see Chapter 7 9 2 1 Individual Marker Setup on page 349 Any settings to the marker state or type changed in the Marker Function dialog box ...

Page 367: ...alue at the defined position in the diagram Delta A delta marker defines the value of the marker relative to the speci fied reference marker marker 1 by default Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m STATe on page 844 CALCulate n DELTamarker m STATe on page 842 Noise Measurement State Activates or deactivates noise measurement for the marker in the diagram This function is only available for normal m...

Page 368: ...er each sweep This function can be used to track a drifting source during a phase noise measurement The delta marker 2 which shows the phase noise measurement result keeps the delta frequency value Therefore the phase noise measurement leads to reliable results in a certain offset although the source is drifting Only if the marker 2 reaches the border of the span the delta marker value is adjusted...

Page 369: ... 877 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion PNOise RESult on page 877 Phase Noise Measurement State 369 Defining Reference Point 370 Switching All Phase Noise Measurements Off 370 Phase Noise Measurement State Activates or deactivates phase noise measurement for the reference point in the dia gram This function is only available for delta markers Marker Usage ...

Page 370: ...oise Measurements Off Deactivates phase noise measurement for all markers Remote command CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion PNOise STATe on page 876 7 9 4 4 Measuring Characteristic Bandwidths n dB Down Marker Access Overview Analysis Marker Functions n dB down n dB Down Config Or MKR Select Marker Function n dB down n dB Down Config When characterizing the shape of a signal the bandwidth at a spe...

Page 371: ... n dB down ndB down Bw PWid Determined bandwidth or pulse width zero span at the offset Q factor Center frequency n dB down bandwidth Quality factor of the determined bandwidth characteristic of damping or resonance T1 T2 Current position and level of the temporary markers If the required position for the temporary markers cannot be determined uniquely for example due to noise dashes are displayed...

Page 372: ...Ker m FUNCtion NDBDown TIME on page 884 7 9 4 5 Fixed Reference Marker Access Overview Analysis Marker Functions Reference Fixed Or MKR Select Marker Function Reference Fixed Instead of using a reference marker that may vary its position depending on the mea surement results a fixed reference marker can be defined for trace analysis Once positioned the reference marker does not move during subsequ...

Page 373: ...r Config or MKR Select Marker Function Band Power To determine the noise power in a transmission channel you can use a noise marker and multiply the result with the channel bandwidth However the results are only accu rate for flat noise Band power markers allow you to measure the integrated power for a defined span band around a marker similar to ACP measurements By default 5 of the current span i...

Page 374: ...in a band if the reference marker is a band power marker itself If the reference marker for the band power marker is also a delta marker the absolute power level for the reference marker is used for calculation Band power markers are only available for standard frequency measurements not zero span in the Spectrum application For the I Q Analyzer application band power markers are only available fo...

Page 375: ...FUNCtion BPOWer STATe on page 879 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion BPOWer RESult on page 878 Band Power Measurement State 375 Span 376 Power Mode 376 Switching All Band Power Measurements Off 376 Band Power Measurement State Activates or deactivates band power measurement for the marker in the diagram Band power markers are only available for standard frequency measurements not zero span in the Spect...

Page 376: ...ute power in the band around the delta marker and the absolute power for the reference marker see Reference Marker on page 263 The powers are sub tracted logarithmically so the result is a dB value Relative band power Delta2 in dB absolute band power Delta2 in dBm absolute band power of reference marker in dBm For details see Relative band power markers on page 374 Density The result is a power le...

Page 377: ...W Alterna tively demodulation can be activated continuously i e audio output occurs regardless of the marker position and the marker stop time For measurements in the time domain zero span demodulation is always continuous Optionally a minimum level Squelch Level can be defined so that the signal is only demodulated when it exceeds the set level This is useful during continuous demodula tion to av...

Page 378: ...ous on page 887 Marker Stop Time Defines how long the sweep is stopped at the marker position to output the demodula ted signal For zero span measurements demodulation is always active continuously regardless of the marker stop time Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DEModulation HOLDoff on page 887 Modulation Defines the demodulation mode for output AM FM The default setting is AM Remot...

Page 379: ...sweep Auto Peak Search Peak search limits The peak search can be restricted to a search area The search area is defined by limit lines which are also indicated in the diagram In addition a minimum value threshold can be defined as a further search condition When is a peak a peak Peak excursion During a peak search for example when a marker peak table is displayed noise val ues may be detected as a...

Page 380: ...o eliminate the smaller peaks M3 M4 and M5 in the example above a peak excursion of at least 60 dB is required In this case the amplitude must rise at least 60 dB before falling again before a peak is detected Marker peak list The marker peak list determines the frequencies and levels of peaks in the spectrum It is updated automatically after each sweep How many peaks are displayed can be defined ...

Page 381: ...ursion 382 Display Marker Numbers 382 Export Peak List 382 Peak List State Activates deactivates the marker peak list If activated the peak list is displayed and the peaks are indicated in the trace display For each listed peak the frequency time X value and level Y Value values are given Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks STATe on page 872 Sort Mode Defines whether the peak list ...

Page 382: ...lt display type For more information see Chapter 7 9 4 8 Marker Peak List on page 379 Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m PEXCursion on page 847 Display Marker Numbers By default the marker numbers are indicated in the diagram so you can find the peaks from the list However for large numbers of peaks the marker numbers may decrease readability in this case deactivate the marker number display Remo...

Page 383: ...ak or Next Min key c If necessary change the search settings by selecting the Search Config soft key 3 Center the display around the determined signal point by setting the marker value to the center frequency Select the Center Mkr Freq softkey 4 Determine the precise frequency of the signal point a Select the Select Marker Function softkey b Select the Signal Count button c Select the Signal Count...

Page 384: ...creen How to Assign a Fixed Reference Marker to Delta Markers 1 In the Marker dialog box select the horizontal Markers tab 2 For the active delta marker that is to refer to the fixed reference marker select FXD from the Reference Marker list The delta marker indicates the offset of the current trace value at the marker posi tion from the fixed reference value 7 9 6 Measurement Example Measuring Ha...

Page 385: ...gnal frequency in the Frequency configuration dialog box select Center Frequency Stepsize Marker The step size for the center frequency is now equal to the marker frequency 8 Move the center frequency to the 2nd harmonic of the signal by pressing the UP key The center frequency is set to the 2nd harmonic 9 Select Auto Level to ensure the R S FPL1000 measures the harmonics with a high sensitivity 1...

Page 386: ...d at the sweep points The number of samples taken during a sweep can be much larger than the number of sweep points that are displayed in the measurement trace Example Assume the following measurement parameters Sample rate 32 MSamples s sweep points 1000 sweep time 100 ms Span 5 GHz During a single sweep 3 2 106 samples are collected and distributed to 1000 sweep points i e 3200 samples are colle...

Page 387: ...n factors as needed for other detectors to measure the power of the different signal classes are not required Average Av Calculates the linear average of all samples contained in a sweep point To this effect R S FPL1000 uses the linear voltage after envelope detection The sampled linear values are summed up and the sum is divided by the num ber of samples linear average value For logarithmic displ...

Page 388: ...L1000 using CISPR detectors on page 254 The result obtained from the selected detector for a sweep point is displayed as the value at this frequency point in the trace video signal s1 s2 s3 s4 s5 s6 s8 s1 video signal s1 s2 s3 s4 s5 s6 s8 s1 Measurement point n Video Signal Meas point n 1 MAX PEAK AUTO PEAK MIN PEAK SAMPLE RMS AVG You can define the trace detector to be used for the individual tra...

Page 389: ...h time the trace mode is changed the selected trace memory is cleared The trace mode also determines the detector type if the detector is set automatically see Mapping Samples to sweep Points with the Trace Detector on page 386 The R S FPL1000 supports the following trace modes Table 7 26 Overview of available trace modes Trace Mode Description Blank Hides the selected trace Clear Write Overwrite ...

Page 390: ...hange any parameters that affect the scaling of the diagram axes the R S FPL1000 automatically adapts the trace data to the changed display range This allows you to zoom into the diagram after the measurement to show details of the trace How Many Traces are Averaged Sweep Count Sweep Mode In Average trace mode the sweep count and sweep mode determine how many traces are averaged The more traces ar...

Page 391: ... averaging length defined by the Sweep Count is attained averaging is continued in continuous sweep mode or for Continue Single Sweep according to the following formula N MeasValue Trace N Trace old 1 Where N is the sweep count How Trace Data is Averaged the Averaging Mode When the trace is averaged over several sweeps Trace mode Average different methods are available to determine the trace avera...

Page 392: ...nals a VBW may not be freely selectable to obtain the required smoothing effect Therefore a software based trace smoothing function is also availa ble Software based smoothing is a way to remove anomalies visually in the trace that can distort the results The smoothing process is based on a moving average over the complete measurement range The number of samples included in the averaging proc ess ...

Page 393: ... 10 2 2 Spectrogram Settings on page 407 Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 393 Trace Mode 394 Detector 394 Hold 395 Smoothing 395 Average Mode 395 Average Count 396 Predefined Trace Settings Quick Config 396 Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Softkeys 397 Copy Trace 397 Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 Selects the corresponding trace for configuration The currently select...

Page 394: ... not available for statistics measurements Average The average is formed over several sweeps The Sweep Average Count determines the number of averaging pro cedures The Detector is automatically set to Sample This mode is not available for statistics measurements View The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and displayed Blank Removes the selected trace from the display Remote command D...

Page 395: ...ects of smoothing on post processing functions Note that in Spectrum mode all functions performed after the sweep such as limit checks markers or channel power measurements are based on the smoothed trace data Thus the results will dif fer from results based on the original trace For more information see Trace Smoothing on page 392 Remote command DISPlay WINDow n SUBWindow w TRACe t SMOothing STAT...

Page 396: ...if sweep count 0 default averaging is performed over 10 sweeps For sweep count 1 no averaging Max Hold or Min Hold operations are performed This value is identical to the Sweep Average Count setting in the Sweep settings Remote command SENSe AVERage n COUNt on page 818 Predefined Trace Settings Quick Config Commonly required trace settings have been predefined and can be applied very quickly by se...

Page 397: ... 1 3 How to Configure a Standard Trace Step by step instructions on configuring the trace settings are provided here For details on individual functions and settings see Chapter 7 10 1 2 Trace Settings on page 393 The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Chap ter 11 8 7 Configuring the Trace Display and Retrieving Trace Data on page 815 Trace settings are configured in ...

Page 398: ...e trace to which the settings are to be applied The settings from the source trace are applied to the destination trace The newly configured trace if not set to Blank is displayed after the next sweep 7 10 2 Spectrograms 7 10 2 1 Working with Spectrograms In addition to the standard level versus frequency or level versus time traces the R S FPL1000 also provides a spectrogram display of the measur...

Page 399: ...rd spectrum display Since the signal does not change over time the color of the frequency levels does not change over time i e ver tically The legend above the spectrogram display describes the power levels the col ors represent Result display The spectrogram result can consist of the following elements 2 1 3 4 6 8 7 5 8 Figure 7 55 Screen layout of the spectrogram result display Trace Configurati...

Page 400: ...ame or simply frame As with standard spectrum traces several measured values are combined in one sweep point using the selected detector See Mapping Samples to sweep Points with the Trace Detector on page 386 Frames are sorted in chronological order beginning with the most recently recorded frame at the top of the diagram frame number 0 With the next sweep the previous frame is moved further down ...

Page 401: ...unt is irrelevant one frame is plotted per sweep until the measurement is stopped If you combine the two settings 20 sweeps will be performed for each single sweep measurement The first 10 will be averaged to create the first frame the next 10 will be averaged to create the second frame As you can see increasing the sweep count increases the accuracy of the individual traces while increasing the f...

Page 402: ...al spectrograms are slightly different and are described in Markers in three dimensional spectrograms on page 404 In the spectrum result display the markers and their frequency and level values 1 are displayed as usual Additionally the frame number is displayed to indicate the position of the marker in time 2 In the spectrogram result display you can activate up to 16 markers or delta markers at t...

Page 403: ...and 2 dimensional spectrograms When the measurement is stopped or completed the currently selected frame is indi cated by a gray vertical plane As opposed to the small white arrows at the borders of the 2 dimensional display The spectrum diagram always displays the spectrum for the currently selected frame By default the most recently recorded frame frame 0 is selected and added at the front of th...

Page 404: ...ou select a marker on the screen three dimensional cross hairs indi cate the position on all axes Sometimes a marker can be hidden by other frames If necessary rotate the spectro gram or select a different frame as the current frame Color Maps Spectrograms assign power levels to different colors to visualize them The legend above the spectrogram display describes the power levels the colors repres...

Page 405: ...and Focus of the Color Curve The color mapping function assigns a specified color to a specified power level in the spectrogram display By default colors on the color map are distributed evenly How ever to visualize a certain area of the value range in greater detail than the rest you can set the focus of the color mapping to that area Changing the focus is performed by changing the shape of the c...

Page 406: ... covered by red yellow and a few shades of green Figure 7 57 Spectrogram with default linear color curve shape 0 The sample spectrogram is dominated by blue and green colors After shifting the color curve to the left negative value more colors cover the range from 100 dBm to 60 dBm blue green and yellow This range occurs more often in the example The range from 60 dBm to 20 dBm on the other hand i...

Page 407: ...n page 410 Settings concerning the frames and how they are handled during a sweep are provided as additional sweep settings for spectrogram display See Chapter 7 6 Bandwidth Filter and Sweep Configuration on page 316 Search functions for spectrogram markers are described in Chapter 7 9 3 2 Marker Search Settings for Spectrograms on page 357 General Spectrogram Settings 407 Color Map Settings 410 G...

Page 408: ... and deactivates a Spectrogram subwindow On Displays the Spectrogram as a subwindow in the original result dis play Off Closes the Spectrogram subwindow Remote command CALCulate n SPECtrogram LAYout on page 824 3D Spectrogram State Activates and deactivates a 3 dimensional spectrogram As opposed to the common 2 dimensional spectrogram the power is not only indicated by a color mapping but also in ...

Page 409: ...ts If the memory is full the R S FPL1000 deletes the oldest frames stored in the memory and replaces them with the new data Remote command CALCulate n SPECtrogram HDEPth on page 824 3 D Display Depth Defines the number of frames displayed in a 3 dimensional spectrogram For details see Three Dimensional Spectrograms on page 402 Time Stamp Activates and deactivates the timestamp The timestamp shows ...

Page 410: ...erformed While the measurement is running the Single Sweep softkey and the RUN SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the high lighted softkey or key again Note Sequencer If the Sequencer is active the Single Sweep softkey only controls the sweep mode for the currently selected channel setup However the sweep mode only takes effect the next time the Sequence...

Page 411: ...raphical representation of all settings available to customize the color scheme 4 5 Color range start and stop sliders define the range of the color map or amplitudes for the spectrogram 6 Color curve slider adjusts the focus of the color curve 7 Histogram shows the distribution of measured values 8 Scale of the horizontal axis value range Start Stop 411 Shape 411 Hot Cold Radar Grayscale 412 Auto...

Page 412: ...play and Configure a Spectrogram The following tasks are described here To display a spectrogram on page 412 To remove the spectrogram display on page 413 To set a marker in the spectrogram on page 413 To configure a spectrogram on page 413 To select a color scheme on page 414 To set the value range graphically using the color range sliders on page 414 To set the value range of the color map numer...

Page 413: ...le 0 for the cur rent frame or 2 for the second to last frame Note that the frame number is always 0 or a negative value The marker is only visible in the spectrum diagram if it is defined for the currently selected frame In the spectrogram result display all markers are visible that are positioned on a visible frame To configure a spectrogram 1 Configure the spectrogram frames a Select the SWEEP ...

Page 414: ...dialog box To cover the entire measurement value range make sure the first and last bar of the histogram are included To ignore noise in a spectrogram for example exclude the lower power levels from the histogram The value range of the color map must cover at least 10 of the value range on the horizontal axis of the diagram that means the difference between the start and stop values must be at lea...

Page 415: ...centages of the total value range changing the reference level and level range of the measurement and thus the power value range also affects the color mapping in the spectrogram Editing the shape of the color curve The color curve is a tool to shift the focus of the color distribution on the color map By default the color curve is linear i e the colors on the color map are distributed evenly If y...

Page 416: ...e curve A negative value 1 to 0 focuses the lower values 0 defines a linear distribution A positive value 0 to 1 focuses the higher values 7 10 3 Trace Math Access TRACE Trace Math If you have several traces with different modes for example an average trace and a maximum trace it may be of interest to compare the results of both traces In this example you could analyze the maximum difference betwe...

Page 417: ...s trace 4 from trace 1 T1 T5 T1 Subtracts trace 5 from trace 1 T1 T6 T1 Subtracts trace 6 from trace 1 To switch off the trace math use the Trace Math Off button Remote command CALCulate n MATH t EXPRession DEFine on page 829 CALCulate n MATH t STATe on page 830 Trace Math Off Deactivates any previously selected trace math functions Remote command CALC MATH STAT OFF see CALCulate n MATH t STATe on...

Page 418: ... grid is set to a loga rithmic scale i e the unit of the data is dBm In this case the values are subtracted in dBm Otherwise i e with linear scaling the behav ior is the same as with linear subtraction Power Activates linear power subtraction The power level values are converted into unit Watt prior to subtrac tion After the subtraction the data is converted back into its original unit Unlike the ...

Page 419: ... see Chapter 7 11 2 1 Basics on Limit Lines on page 421 Two different types of display lines are provided Two horizontal lines Horizontal Line 1 and Horizontal Line 2 These lines are continuous horizontal lines across the entire width of a diagram and can be shifted up and down Two vertical lines Vertical Line 1 and Vertical Line 2 These lines are continuous vertical lines across the entire height...

Page 420: ...2 Activates a horizontal display line H1 or H2 in the diagram at the specified point of the y axis Remote command CALCulate n DLINe dl on page 898 CALCulate n DLINe dl on page 898 7 11 1 3 Defining Display Lines 1 Display lines are configured in the Lines Config dialog box To display this dialog box press the Lines key and then Lines Config 2 Select the Display Lines tab 3 To define a vertical lin...

Page 421: ...t lines stored in the instrument is only limited by the capacity of the storage device used Limit line data can also be exported to a file in ASCII CSV format for further evalua tion in other applications Limit lines stored in the specified ASCII CSV format can also be imported to the R S FPL1000 for other measurements Compatibility Limit lines are compatible with the current measurement settings ...

Page 422: ...isplayed Margins are defined as lines with a fixed distance to the limit line To check the signal for maximum levels you must define an upper limit whereas to check the signal for minimum levels you must define a lower limit Limits can be defined relative to the reference level the beginning of the time scale or the center frequency or as absolute values Relative scaling is suitable for example if...

Page 423: ...an existing limit line which has been shifted horizontally or vertically Defining a shift width for the values or position of the individual data points changes the line configuration thus changing the position of the line in the dia gram Limit Check Results A limit check is automatically performed as soon as any of the limit lines is activated Visibility setting Only the specified Traces to be Ch...

Page 424: ...The Spectrum Application RF Measurements R S FPL1000 424 User Manual 1178 3370 02 09 Figure 7 61 Margin violation for limit check Figure 7 62 Limit violation for limit check Display and Limit Lines ...

Page 425: ... line values After recalling measurement settings the limit line values applied to the measurement may be different to those displayed in the Limit Lines dialog box see Saving and recalling transducer and limit line settings on page 458 7 11 2 2 Limit Line Settings and Functions Access Overview Analysis Lines or LINES Line Config Up to 8 limit lines can be displayed simultaneously in the R S FPL10...

Page 426: ...or the current measurement For details on settings for individual lines see Limit Line Details on page 428 For more basic information on limit lines see Chapter 7 11 2 1 Basics on Limit Lines on page 421 Name 426 Unit 427 Compatibility 427 Visibility 427 Traces to be Checked 427 Comment 427 Included Lines in Overview View Filter 427 Show Lines for all Modes 427 X Offset 427 Y Offset 428 Create New...

Page 427: ... Traces to be Checked violate any of the active limit lines a message is indicated in the diagram Remote command CALCulate n LIMit li TRACe t CHECk on page 913 Comment An optional description of the limit line Included Lines in Overview View Filter Defines which of the stored lines are included in the overview Show Com patible Only compatible lines Whether a line is compatible or not is indicated ...

Page 428: ...d CALCulate n LIMit li LOWer OFFSet on page 905 CALCulate n LIMit li UPPer OFFSet on page 909 Create New Line Creates a new limit line Edit Line Edit an existing limit line configuration Copy Line Copy the selected limit line configuration to create a new line Remote command CALCulate n LIMit li COPY on page 911 Delete Line Delete the selected limit line configuration Remote command CALCulate n LI...

Page 429: ...port 431 File Explorer 432 Name Defines the limit line name All names must be compatible with Windows conventions for file names The limit line data is stored under this name with a LIN extension Remote command CALCulate n LIMit li NAME on page 907 Comment Defines an optional comment for the limit line Remote command CALCulate n LIMit li COMMent on page 902 Threshold Defines an absolute threshold ...

Page 430: ... the diagram is used as the refer ence Scaling linear or logarithmic Remote command CALCulate n LIMit li LOWer MODE on page 905 CALCulate n LIMit li UPPer MODE on page 909 CALCulate n LIMit li CONTrol DOMain on page 902 CALCulate n LIMit li CONTrol SPACing on page 904 Y Axis Describes the vertical axis on which the data points of the limit line are defined Includes the following settings Level uni...

Page 431: ...oint vertically by the defined shift width as opposed to an additive offset defined for the entire limit line see Y Offset on page 428 Remote command CALCulate n LIMit li LOWer SHIFt on page 906 CALCulate n LIMit li UPPer SHIFt on page 909 Save Saves the currently edited limit line under the name defined in the Name field Import Opens a file selection dialog box and loads the limit line from the s...

Page 432: ...It is strongly recommended that you define limits only via the Sweep List dialog for these measurements not using the Lines key Any changes to the special limit lines are automatically overwritten when the sweep list settings are changed The following tasks are described here How to find compatible limit lines on page 432 How to activate and deactivate a limit check on page 433 How to edit existin...

Page 433: ...isting limit lines Existing limit line configurations can be edited 1 In the Line Config dialog box select the limit line 2 Select the Edit button 3 Edit the line configuration as described in How to configure a new limit line on page 434 4 Save the new configuration by selecting the Save button If the limit line is active the edited limit line is displayed in the diagram How to copy an existing l...

Page 434: ...point d Repeat this to insert all other data points To insert a data point before an existing one select the data point and then Insert Value To insert a new data point at the end of the list move the focus to the line after the last entry and then select Insert Value To delete a data point select the entry and then Delete Value 6 Check the current line configuration in the preview area of the dia...

Page 435: ...e diagram How to export a limit line Limit line configurations can be stored to an ASCII file for evaluation in other programs or to be imported later for other measurements 1 In the Line Config dialog box select the limit line 2 Select the New or Edit button 3 Define the limit line as described in How to configure a new limit line on page 434 4 Select Export to save the configuration to a file Yo...

Page 436: ...it line on page 435 This reference describes in detail the format of the export import files for limit lines Note that the bold data is mandatory all other data is optional Different language versions of evaluation programs may require a different handling of the decimal point Thus you can define the decimal separator to be used see Deci mal Separator on page 448 Table 7 29 ASCII file format for l...

Page 437: ...hanges the resolution of the displayed trace points tempora rily You must explicitly activate the graphical zoom function see Chapter 7 12 2 Zoom Functions on page 439 Graphical zoom and the number of sweep points Note that graphical zooming is merely a visual tool it does not change any measure ment settings such as the number of sweep points You should increase the number of sweep points before ...

Page 438: ...r Single Zoom Versus Multiple Zoom 438 Zoom Functions 439 How to Zoom Into a Diagram 441 7 12 1 Single Zoom Versus Multiple Zoom Two different graphical zoom modes are available single zoom and multiple zoom A single zoom replaces the current diagram by a new diagram which displays an enlarged extract of the trace This function can be used repetitively until the required details are visible In mul...

Page 439: ...ccess Zoom icons in toolbar Single Zoom 439 Multi Zoom 440 Measurement Zoom 440 Level Lock 440 X Lock 441 Y Lock 441 Adapt Measurement to Zoom selected diagram 441 Restore Original Display 441 Single Zoom A single zoom replaces the current diagram by a new diagram which displays an enlarged extract of the trace This function can be used repetitively until the required details are visible Remote co...

Page 440: ... gestures see Operating Basics in the R S FPL1000 Getting Started manual Note The measurement settings are adapted to practical values based on a suitable grid for the current settings rather than to unwieldy values that reflect precisely the pixel you happen to tap If the measurement zoom leads to undesirable results you can easily return to the original measurement settings using the UNDO functi...

Page 441: ...y restores graphically zoomed displays Measurement zooms for which measurement settings were adapted are recalculated based on the adapted measurement settings In this case the zoomed display is maintained Remote command Single zoom DISPlay WINDow n SUBWindow w ZOOM STATe on page 813 Multiple zoom DISPlay WINDow n SUBWindow w ZOOM MULTiple zn STATe on page 814 for each multiple zoom window 7 12 3 ...

Page 442: ...he diagram is replaced by the zoomed trace area 3 Repeat these steps if necessary to enlarge the diagram further Scrolling in the zoomed display You can scroll the diagram area to display the entire diagram using the scrollbars at the right and at the bottom of the diagram To return to original display Click on the Zoom Off icon in the toolbar The original trace display is restored Zoom mode remai...

Page 443: ... size or position of the individual zoom areas easily at any time To resize a zoom area tap directly on the corresponding frame in the overview window and drag the line to change the size of the frame To move a zoom area tap inside the corresponding frame in the overview window and drag the frame to the new position The contents of the zoom windows are adapted accordingly To maintain a zoomed disp...

Page 444: ...aluate the data with further exter nal applications In this case you can export the measurement data to a standard for mat file ASCII or XML Some of the data stored in these formats can also be re imported to the R S FPL1000 for further evaluation later for example in other applica tions The following data types can be exported depending on the application Trace data Table results such as result s...

Page 445: ...s more sweep points than the active trace requires the superfluous points are ignored If the file does not contain enough sweep points the missing points are inserted as 200 dBm Units If the unit of the y axis values in the file does not correspond to the active result dis play the imported values are converted If no unit is defined in the file it is assumed to be dBm Importing multiple traces in ...

Page 446: ...play if available However they do not change the spectrogram dis play which always refers to trace 1 A single spectrum is inserted as a new frame number 0 The trace mode is not changed to View as for Spectrum trace imports 7 13 2 Trace Data Ex Import Access TRACE Trace Config Trace Data Export The R S FPL1000 provides various evaluation methods for the results of the per formed measurements Howeve...

Page 447: ...to an ASCII file Alternatively you can select one specific trace only for export see Trace to Export The results are output in the same order as they are displayed on the screen window by window trace by trace and table row by table row Remote command FORMat DEXPort TRACes on page 835 Include Instrument Measurement Settings Includes additional instrument and measurement settings in the header of t...

Page 448: ...d file and directory in the selected ASCII format If the spectrogram display is selected when you perform this function the entire histo gram buffer with all frames is exported to a file The data for a particular frame begins with information about the frame number and the time that frame was recorded For large history buffers the export operation can take some time For details on the file format ...

Page 449: ...races Import to Trace Importing Traces If the import file contains more than one trace you can import several traces at once overwriting the existing trace data for any active trace in the result display with the same trace number Data from the import file for currently not active traces is not imported Alternatively you can import a single trace only which is displayed for the trace num ber speci...

Page 450: ...ut The file is stored with a DAT extension For details on the storage format see Chap ter 7 13 6 Reference ASCII File Export Format on page 451 For the results of a Spectrum Emission Mask SEM or Spurious Emissions measure ment special file export functions are available see How to Save SEM Result Files on page 190 SEM and Save Evaluation List on page 209 Spurious To export trace data and table res...

Page 451: ...les for result data For details see Chapter 7 13 4 How to Export Trace Data and Numerical Results on page 450 For a description of the file formats for spectrum emission mask SEM measurement settings and results see Chapter 7 2 7 8 Reference SEM File Descriptions on page 193 The file format for Spurious Emissions measurement results is described in Chap ter 7 2 8 6 Reference ASCII Export File Form...

Page 452: ...1 00 Firmware version Date 01 Oct 2006 Date of data set storage Mode ANALYZER Operating mode Preamplifier OFF Preamplifier status Transducer OFF Transducer status Center Freq 55000 Hz Center frequency Freq Offset 0 Hz Frequency offset Start 10000 Hz Stop 100000 Hz Start stop of the display range Unit Hz for span 0 s for span 0 dBm dB for statistics mea surements Span 90000 Hz Frequency range 0 Hz ...

Page 453: ...e y1 y2 y2 being available only with detector AUTOPEAK and containing in this case the smallest of the two measured values for a measurement point Data section for individual trace Trace 2 Next trace in same window Data section for individual window Window 2 Name of next window Data section for individual trace Trace 1 First trace Table 7 31 ASCII file format for spectrogram trace export File cont...

Page 454: ... trace CLR WRITE AVER AGE MAXHOLD MINHOLD Detector AUTOPEAK Selected detector Sweep Count 20 Number of sweeps set Data section Trace 1 Selected trace x Unit Hz Unit of x values Hz with span 0 s with span 0 dBm dB with statistics measurements y Unit dBm Unit of y values dB V A W depending on the selected unit with y axis LOG or with y axis LIN Values 1001 Number of measurement points Frames 2 Numbe...

Page 455: ...rforming multiple measurements use multiple channel setups to switch between measurements rather than changing the settings within one channel repeatedly Additional information An application note discussing measurement speed optimization is available from the Rohde Schwarz website 1EF90 Speeding up Spectrum Analyzer Measurements 7 14 2 Improving Averaging Results Instead of trace averaging use an...

Page 456: ...iguration Pre set When delivered the R S FPL1000 has a default configuration You can restore this defined initial state at any time as a known starting point for measurements This is often recommendable as a first step in troubleshooting when unusual measurement results arise Factory default configuration The factory default configuration is selected such that the RF input is always protected agai...

Page 457: ...t settings applied during measurement In these cases you can store and recall instrument and measurement settings and possibly other related measurement data Two different methods are available for managing instrument settings Quick Save Quick Recall a defined set of instrument settings or channel setups are stored or recalled quickly in just one step Configurable Save Recall a user defined set of...

Page 458: ... to apply the changed limit values after recalling the save set you must force the application to reload the limit file To do so simply open the Edit Limit Line dialog box see Chapter 7 11 2 2 Limit Line Settings and Functions on page 425 and toggle the Y Axis unit Due to that change the limit line file is auto matically reloaded and the changed limit values are applied to the current measure ment...

Page 459: ...milar and closely related QuickSave 1 QuickSave 10 459 Rename 460 Write Protection 460 Storage Type Save only 460 Recall 460 QuickSave 1 QuickSave 10 Selects one of the save sets to store the current settings in or to be recalled At the time of storage the QuickSave 1 QuickSave 10 placeholder is replaced by a label indicating the storage date and time and the storage type Right click on one of the...

Page 460: ... Only the instrument settings for the currently selected measurement Channel s are stored Recall Restores the instrument settings as saved in the selected settings file If the settings file contains settings for a specific Channel only a new channel setup with the stored settings is activated otherwise all Channel s and instrument settings are overwritten with the stored settings Note After you us...

Page 461: ... Location and Filename The data is stored on the internal flash disk or if selected on a memory stick or net work drive The operating system firmware and stored instrument settings are located on drive C The storage location and filename are selected in a file selection dialog box which is displayed when you perform a storage function By default the name of a settings file consists of a base name ...

Page 462: ...ion of the file on the instrument or an external drive The default storage location for the SEM settings files is C ProgramData Rohde Schwarz ZNL FPL sem_std Remote command MMEMory CATalog on page 919 File Name Contains the name of the data file without the path or extension By default the name of a user file consists of a base name followed by an underscore Multiple files with the same base name ...

Page 463: ...items are available also depends on the installed options see also Chapter 8 2 2 1 Stored Data Types on page 461 Remote command MMEMory SELect ITEM ALL on page 924 MMEMory SELect ITEM DEFault on page 924 MMEMory SELect ITEM NONE on page 925 MMEMory SELect ITEM HWSettings on page 925 MMEMory SELect ITEM LINes ALL on page 925 MMEMory SELect ITEM SGRam on page 926 MMEMory SELect ITEM TRACe 1 3 ACTive...

Page 464: ...icon in the toolbar Startup Recall Startup Recall 464 Selecting Storage Location Drive Path Files 465 File Name 465 Comment 465 Startup Recall Activates or deactivates the startup recall function If activated the settings stored in the selected file are loaded each time the instrument is started or preset If deactivated the default settings are loaded Note that only instrument settings files can b...

Page 465: ...ta file A maximum of 60 characters can be displayed Remote command MMEMory COMMent on page 920 8 2 3 How to Save and Load Instrument Settings Instrument settings can be saved to a file and loaded again later so that you can repeat the measurement with the same settings Optionally user defined measurement settings can automatically be restored each time you start or preset the instrument To save an...

Page 466: ...c can be stored as well see Chap ter 8 2 2 1 Stored Data Types on page 461 7 Select Save A file with the defined name and path and the extension dfl is created If you make any changes to the settings after storing the configuration file remember to save the settings again Otherwise those settings cannot be restored and will be overwritten by the stored values when the configuration file is recalle...

Page 467: ...ess the PRESET key or reboot the instrument the defined set tings will be restored 6 To restore the factory preset settings set Startup Recall to Off 8 3 Import Export Functions Access Save Open icon in the toolbar Import Export The R S FPL1000 provides various evaluation methods for the results of the per formed measurements However you may want to evaluate the data with further exter nal applica...

Page 468: ...port Access Save Recall Import Provides functions to import data Importing trace data is only available via the Trace Config dialog box see Chap ter 7 13 2 Trace Data Ex Import on page 446 I Q data can only be imported by applications that process I Q data See the R S FPL1000 I Q Analyzer user manual for more information Export Access Save Recall Export Opens a submenu to configure data export Exp...

Page 469: ...ke some time For details on the file format in the Spectrum application see Chapter 7 13 6 Refer ence ASCII File Export Format on page 451 Remote command MMEMory STORe n TRACe on page 836 MMEMory STORe n SPECtrogram on page 942 File Type Export Trace to ASCII File Export Determines the format of the ASCII file to be imported or exported Depending on the external program in which the data file was ...

Page 470: ... Q data such as the I Q Analyzer or optional applications For details see the description in the R S FPL1000 I Q Analyzer User Manual Importing and Exporting I Q Data Note Storing large amounts of I Q data several Gigabytes can exceed the available internal storage space on the R S FPL1000 In this case it can be necessary to use an external storage medium File Explorer I Q Export Export Opens the ...

Page 471: ... print a screenshot of the current display with the current settings immediately with out switching to the Print menu use the Print immediately icon in the toolbar Print Content Settings 471 Print Preview Functions 474 Printer Settings 476 Page Setup 479 Print Color Settings 480 8 4 1 1 Print Content Settings Access Print Print Config Content tab The content settings determine which data is includ...

Page 472: ...2 User Manual 1178 3370 02 09 Print Screenshot 473 Print Multiple Windows 473 Comment 473 Print Logo 473 Print Page Count 473 Print Dialog 473 Print Date and Time 474 Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings ...

Page 473: ...or the clipboard it is automatically changed to be a PDF file Remote command HCOPy CONTent on page 933 HCOPy PAGE WINDow 1 2 STATe on page 940 HCOPy PAGE WINDow 1 2 CHANnel STATe on page 938 Comment Defines an optional comment to be included in the printout of the display Maximum 120 characters are allowed Up to 60 characters fit in one line In the first line a man ual line feed can be forced at a...

Page 474: ...es or removes the current date and time at the bottom of the printout Remote command HCOPy TDSTamp STATe 1 2 on page 940 8 4 1 2 Print Preview Functions Access Print The Print Preview of the printout according to the current configuration is available in all Print Settings dialog tabs Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings ...

Page 475: ...Fit Page 476 Zoom 1 1 476 Page Up Page Down 476 Print 476 Zoom In Zoom Out Zooms into enlarges or zooms out of decreases the preview display Note that the zoom functions affect only the preview not the printout itself Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings ...

Page 476: ...ithin the preview to see the individual pages Print Starts to print or store the selected screen contents to a file see Chapter 8 4 1 1 Print Content Settings on page 471 Whether the output is sent to the printer or stored in a file or the clipboard depends on the selected print settings see Chapter 8 4 1 3 Printer Settings on page 476 If the output is stored to a file a file selection dialog box ...

Page 477: ... 1178 3370 02 09 Destination 477 Suppress File Name Dialog 478 Printer Name 478 Print to file 478 Install Printer 478 Destination Defines the medium to which the printout is output Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings ...

Page 478: ...e Printer Name list Remote command HCOPy DESTination 1 2 on page 934 HCOPy DEVice LANGuage 1 2 on page 935 Suppress File Name Dialog If the Destination is a file the file selection dialog box is not displayed Instead the default storage location and filename are used C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Analyzer user FPL_ScreenShot_ date and time Printer Name Defines the printer to print to if a...

Page 479: ...ws Per Page 479 Scaling 480 Margins 480 Orientation Selects the page orientation of the printout portrait or landscape Remote command HCOPy PAGE ORIentation 1 2 on page 938 Windows Per Page Defines how many windows are displayed on a single page of the printout This setting is only available if Print Multiple Windows is active see Chapter 8 4 1 1 Print Content Settings on page 471 Creating Screens...

Page 480: ...ossible while maintaining the aspect ratio of the original display Size to fit Each window is scaled to fit the page size optimally not regarding the aspect ratio of the original display Remote command HCOPy PAGE WINDow 1 2 SCALe on page 939 Margins Defines margins for the printout page on which no elements are printed The margins are defined according to the selected unit Remote command HCOPy PAG...

Page 481: ...ng results to a file If the R S FPL1000 has already been set up according to your current require ments simply press the Print immediate icon at the far right end of the toolbar The current measurement display is printed or stored to a file as configured To print a screenshot This configuration assumes a printer has already been installed To install a new printer use the Install Printer function c...

Page 482: ...e the page margins c Check the Print Preview to make sure all relevant elements of the display are visible 6 In the Color tab define the colors to be used for the printout a By default Optimized Colors are used to improve the visibility of the colors The background is always printed in white and the grid in black For a printout that reflects exactly what you see on the screen select Screen Colors ...

Page 483: ...og In this case the previously used or default storage location and filename are used C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Analyzer user FPL_ScreenShot_ date and time 7 In the Page Setup tab configure the layout of the printout page a Select the page orientation b Define the page margins c Check the Print Preview to make sure all relevant elements of the display are visible 8 In the Color tab de...

Page 484: ...ltiView tab to display an overview of the result displays in all active channel setups 3 Select the Printer tool in the toolbar The Print Settings dialog box is displayed 4 In the Content tab select Print Selected Windows 5 Select the result displays listed in step 1 6 Enter the comment Measurement Test Report to be inserted at the top of each page 7 Select Print Page Count and Print Date and Time...

Page 485: ...n the screen but with a white background 16 Check the Print Preview to make sure all required result displays are included and all relevant data elements are visible a Scroll through the individual pages of the printout using Page Up and Page Down b Use the zoom functions to make sure all relevant parts of the result display are visible 17 Select Print to execute the print function The selected da...

Page 486: ...tion and only if the option R S FPL1 K54 is installed Designing a Test Report Template 486 Managing Templates 495 Creating Datasets 496 Creating a Test Report 497 How to Create a Test Report 499 8 5 1 Designing a Test Report Template Access Report menu Templates The R S FPL1000 allows you to create multiple test report templates Thus you can document measurement tasks that require different inform...

Page 487: ...cific information per subreport 4 General instrument settings per subreport 5 Measurement specific settings per subreport 6 Measurement results per subreport 7 Date and page count each page To see the result of your template configuration use the Show Preview function General Contents 488 Title Page 489 Measurement Information 492 Application Specific Contents 494 Working with Test Reports ...

Page 488: ...Report Path 489 Suppress Dialog 489 Raw Data Storage 489 Page format Selects the format of the document A4 or Letter format Remote command HCOPy TREPort PAGesize on page 950 File type Selects the file type pdf or doc Remote command HCOPy DEVice LANGuage 1 2 on page 935 Use Screen Colors Enables or disables the use of printer friendly color schemes as opposed to the colors used on the screen Remote...

Page 489: ...es are stored in a different location see Save on page 496 Remote command MMEMory NAME on page 922 Suppress Dialog Report Path By default when you store a report a dialog is displayed to define the storage path If the dialog is suppressed reports are saved to the default directory C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Analyzer user with a generic name without further inter action Raw Data Storage...

Page 490: ...Data Management R S FPL1000 490 User Manual 1178 3370 02 09 Working with Test Reports ...

Page 491: ...1 User Manual 1178 3370 02 09 Figure 8 3 Example of a test report title page State HCOPy TREPort TITLe STATe on page 953 Title HCOPy TREPort TITLe on page 952 Abstract HCOPy TREPort DESCription on page 944 Working with Test Reports ...

Page 492: ... lines to the report plus one picture for example a company logo The first line is a heading Each of the following five lines consists of a title and a value which is displayed next to the title The information can be global that is valid for the entire report or specific to an individual measurement In this case you define the actual value when you store the measurement data Figure 8 4 Dialog box...

Page 493: ...nt this title is used in the dialog box asking you to provide the information when you append the measurement results to the report Remote command HCOPy TREPort ITEM HEADer LINE line TITLe on page 946 Value Defines the actual text for the content defined by the title A maximum of 25 characters are available For data that is specific to an individual measurement you are asked to provide this inform...

Page 494: ...lename in the input field or select the directory using the button The following formats are supported bmp jpg png gif emf wmf Remote command HCOPy TREPort ITEM LOGO on page 947 8 5 1 4 Application Specific Contents For each application you can select which graphical results numerical results or infor mation on the measurement setup to include in the report Information that is to be included in th...

Page 495: ...o the report The rest is dismissed If you have more measurement points export the data to an ASCII file see Export Trace to ASCII File on page 448 Settings basic instrument and measurement specific settings as indicated in the channel setup bar Select All Select None Selects or deselects all items in the corresponding area Diagrams Tables All items Remote command HCOPy TREPort ITEM SELect on page ...

Page 496: ...guration Remote command HCOPy TREPort ITEM DEFault on page 945 8 5 3 Creating Datasets Access Toolbar Before you can print a test report you have to create report data Test report data is organized in datasets Each dataset contains the information for one measurement A dataset can contain several subsets for different kinds of data for a single measurement for example settings and a result summary...

Page 497: ...n page 944 8 5 4 Creating a Test Report Access Report menu Preview Once you have created datasets for a report you can create and save the actual test report Optionally you can select which of the saved datasets to include Before you save the test report to a file you can check a preview of the current configuration and contents File type 497 Save 498 Selecting items to include in the report 498 R...

Page 498: ...922 Print report HCOPy IMMediate 1 2 on page 935 Selecting items to include in the report By default all datasets and subsets stored for the test report are included see Chap ter 8 5 3 Creating Datasets on page 496 However you can remove individual data sets or subsets before creating the report Each dataset is indicated by the date and time it was stored A dataset can contain subsets for individu...

Page 499: ... data 3 Optionally in the Title Page area configure a separate title page with a title and description of the report 4 Optionally in the Measurement Information area configure further information on the measurement to be included in the report a Define a label Title b Enter the text for the label Value c Select whether the text is to appear on each page Global or only once per measurement Subrepor...

Page 500: ...ile selection dialog box is displayed unless you enabled the Suppress dialog option in the general template settings 11 Select the file name and path for the report 12 Select OK The test report is saved to the selected location To create subsequent test reports 1 Configure and perform your measurement as usual 2 When the measurement is finished save the results for your report From the toolbar sel...

Page 501: ...ference Frequency Access Setup Reference Int Ext The R S FPL1000 can use the internal reference source or an external reference source as the frequency standard for all internal oscillators A 10 MHz crystal oscillator is used as the internal reference source In the external reference setting all internal oscillators of the R S FPL1000 are synchronized to the external reference frequency External r...

Page 502: ...nt application or operating mode For information on optimizing your display for measurement results see the application specific result configuration descriptions General Display Settings 502 Displayed Items 503 Display Theme and Colors 507 External Monitor Settings 509 Touch screen Settings 509 9 2 1 1 General Display Settings Access Setup Display General This section includes general screen disp...

Page 503: ...ding softkeys toolbars and menus Remote command DISPlay TOUChscreen STATe on page 964 Display Update Rate By default a fast update rate ensures the most recent measurement results on the dis play However when performance is poor due to slow data transfer for example during remote control it can be helpful to decrease the frequency with which the screen dis play is updated Set Date and Time The cur...

Page 504: ...us Bar 505 Softkey Bar 505 Channel Bar 505 Diagram Footer Annotation 505 Date and Time 505 Front Panel 506 Mini Front Panel 506 Toolbar The toolbar provides access to frequently used functions via icons at the top of the screen Some functions such as zooming finding help printing screenshots or storing and loading files are not accessible at all without the toolbar Remote command DISPlay TBAR STAT...

Page 505: ... at all without the softkey bar Note The softkey bar is hidden while the SmartGrid is displayed and restored auto matically when the SmartGrid is closed Remote command DISPlay SKEYs STATe on page 964 Channel Bar The channel setup bar provides information on firmware and measurement settings for a specific channel setup Remote command DISPlay ANNotation CBAR on page 963 Diagram Footer Annotation Th...

Page 506: ...g via remote control from a com puter To activate or deactivate the front panel temporarily press the F6 key on the external keyboard if available or the remote computer For more information see Chapter 9 2 2 How to Work with the Soft Front Panels on page 510 Remote command SYSTem DISPlay FPANel STATe on page 965 Mini Front Panel If you require a front panel display but do not want to lose too muc...

Page 507: ...e keyboard language defined in the operating system That is useful when you are working from a remote PC and the front panel function is not active Remote command SYSTem DISPlay FPANel STATe on page 965 9 2 1 3 Display Theme and Colors Access Setup Display Theme Color You can configure the used colors and styles of display elements on the screen Display Settings ...

Page 508: ...review for your selection Gui setting Description Remote command Optimized Colors Selects an optimized color setting for the printout to improve the visibility of the colors default setting Trace 1 is blue trace 2 black trace 3 green and the markers are turquoise The background is always printed in white and the grid in black HCOP CMAP DEF2 Screen Colors Print Selects the current screen colors for...

Page 509: ... using a different format e g 4 3 the calibration is not correct and the screen does not react to your touch actions properly The touchscreen has a screen resolution of 1280x800 pixels Most external monitors have a higher screen resolution If the screen resolution of the monitor is set higher than the instrument s resolution the application window uses an area of 1280x800 pix els on the monitor di...

Page 510: ...am is not changed during subsequent touch ges tures Adapt Measurement to Zoom selected diagram If you already performed a graphical zoom using the Single Zoom on page 439 or Multi Zoom on page 440 functions this function automatically adapts the measure ment settings to maintain the currently zoomed display 9 2 2 How to Work with the Soft Front Panels Basic operation with the soft front panels is ...

Page 511: ... or mini front panel 1 Press the Setup key and select the Display softkey 2 Select the Displayed Items tab 3 Select Front Panel On or Mini Front Panel On To activate or deactivate the front panel temporarily press the F6 key on the external keyboard if available or on the remote computer If the softkey menu is visible you can display the Mini Front Panel quickly and easily by double clicking the t...

Page 512: ...y its serial number order number model infor mation hardware code and hardware revision This information can be useful when problems occur with the instrument and you require support from Rohde Schwarz Remote command DIAGnostic SERVice HWINfo on page 972 DIAGnostic SERVice BATTery LEVel on page 972 9 4 2 Information on Versions and Options Access Setup System Configuration Versions Options Informa...

Page 513: ...expired a message box appears for you to confirm In this case all instrument functions are unavailable including remote control until the R S FPL1000 is rebooted You must then use the Install Option function to enter the new license key Remote commands SYSTem FORMat IDENt on page 975 DIAGnostic SERVice BIOSinfo on page 972 DIAGnostic SERVice VERSinfo on page 973 Open Source Acknowledgment Open Dis...

Page 514: ... the option key and select Select 9 4 3 System Messages Access Setup System Configuration System Messages The system messages generated by the R S FPL1000 are displayed The messages are displayed in the order of their occurrence the most recent mes sages are placed at the top of the list Messages that have occurred since you last vis ited the system messages tab are marked with an asterisk If the ...

Page 515: ...ware Version and you are asked to update the firmware Until the firm ware version is updated self alignment fails To see which components are not suppor ted see the System Messages The firmware on your R S FPL1000 may also need to be updated in order to enable additional new features or if reasons for improvement come up Ask your sales repre sentative or check the Rohde Schwarz website for availab...

Page 516: ...re you can also use the Microsoft Windows File Explorer to manage files 7 Select Install to start the update 8 After the firmware update the R S FPL1000 reboots automatically 9 Depending on the previous firmware version a reconfiguration of the hardware might be required during the first startup of the firmware The reconfiguration starts automatically and a message box informs you about the proces...

Page 517: ...al Interfaces The following settings are only available if the Additional interfaces option R S FPL1 B5 is installed Wait for Trigger Polarity The optional AUX PORT connector of the R S FPL1000 can provide a signal that indi cates the instrument is ready to receive a trigger signal For details on the connector see the R S FPL1000 Getting Started manual The signal polarity that indicates the trigge...

Page 518: ...9 Calibration Signal Display 520 Service Functions 521 9 5 1 R S Support Information Access Setup Service R S Support In case of errors you can store useful information for troubleshooting and send it to your Rohde Schwarz support center Create R S Support Information 518 Save Device Footprint 519 Create R S Support Information Creates a zip file with important support information The zip file con...

Page 519: ... the instru ment It is also included in the service ZIP file see Create R S Support Information on page 518 9 5 2 Self test Settings and Results Access Setup Service Selftest If the R S FPL1000 fails you can perform a self test of the instrument to identify any defective modules Once the self test is started all modules are checked consecutively and the test result is displayed You can abort a run...

Page 520: ...ervice func tions on NONE 520 Calibration Frequency RF 520 Frequency 520 NONE Uses the current RF signal at the input i e no calibration signal default Remote command DIAGnostic SERVice INPut SELect on page 957 Calibration Frequency RF Uses the internal calibration signal as the RF input signal Remote command DIAGnostic SERVice INPut SELect on page 957 DIAGnostic SERVice INPut PULSed CFRequency on...

Page 521: ...used after entering a password These functions are described in the instrument service manual Service Function 521 Send 521 Clear History 522 Password 522 Clear Results 522 Save Results 522 Result List 522 Service Function Selects the service function by its numeric code or textual name The selection list includes all functions previously selected since the last Clear His tory action Remote comman...

Page 522: ...alog box to save the results of all previously performed service functions to a file Remote command DIAGnostic SERVice SFUNction RESults SAVE on page 976 Result List The Results List indicates the status and results of the executed service functions 9 6 Toolbar Configuration If the list of available icons becomes longer than the height of the screen an arrow at the bottom of the toolbar indicates ...

Page 523: ... 5 To insert additional spaces between icons for example to create groups of icons a Select More icons Drag Spacer b Drag and drop the Drag Spacer at the required position in the toolbar Multiple spaces can be inserted 6 To restore the default R S FPL1000 toolbar select More icons Set to Default 7 To exit the toolbar edit mode select More icons Stop Editing The red highlighting is removed Selectin...

Page 524: ...alues or relative dB values However all factors for one transducer line use the same unit As soon as a transducer is activated the unit of the transducer is automatically used for all the level settings and outputs The unit cannot be changed in the amplitude settings since the R S FPL1000 and the active transducer are regarded as one measuring instrument Only for relative transducer factors unit d...

Page 525: ...s See Chapter 8 2 Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data on page 457 Recalling transducer factors stored with measurement settings After recalling measurement settings the transducer factors applied to the measure ment may be different to those displayed in the Transducer dialog box see Saving and recalling transducer and limit line settings on page 458 9 7 2 Transducer Set...

Page 526: ...ils on settings for individual lines see Chapter 9 7 2 2 Transducer Factors on page 528 For instructions on configuring and working with transducers see Chapter 9 7 4 How to Configure the Transducer on page 531 Name 526 Unit 526 Compatibility 527 Activating Deactivating 527 Comment 527 Included Transducer Lines in Overview View Filter 527 Adjust Ref Level 527 Create New Line 527 Edit Line 528 Copy...

Page 527: ... transducer line Included Transducer Lines in Overview View Filter Defines which of the stored transducer lines are included in the overview The view can be restricted to compatible transducer lines only or include all transducer lines found Whether a line is compatible or not is indicated in the Compatibility setting Adjust Ref Level Activates or deactivates the automatic adjustment of the refere...

Page 528: ...ection TRANsducer DELete on page 960 9 7 2 2 Transducer Factors Access Setup Transducer Edit Line Copy Line New Line The settings and functions available for individual transducer lines are described here For instructions on creating and editing transducer lines see Chapter 9 7 4 How to Configure the Transducer on page 531 Name 529 Comment 529 Unit 529 X Axis Scaling 529 Data Points 529 Insert Val...

Page 529: ...n TRANsducer UNIT on page 961 X Axis Scaling Describes the scaling of the horizontal axis on which the data points of the transducer line are defined Scaling can be linear or logarithmic Remote command SENSe CORRection TRANsducer SCALing on page 960 Data Points Each transducer line is defined by a minimum of 2 and a maximum of 50 data points Each data point is defined by its position x axis and va...

Page 530: ...ransducer factor from the selected file in CSV format Note that a valid import file must contain a minimum of required information for the R S FPL1000 For details on the file format see Chapter 9 7 3 Reference Trans ducer Factor File Format on page 531 Remote command MMEMory LOAD n TFACtor on page 962 File Explorer Import Opens the Microsoft Windows File Explorer Remote command not supported Expor...

Page 531: ...r data sep Separator for individual values required by Microsoft Excel for example Type RS_TransducerFactor Type of data FileFormatVersion 1 00 File format version Date 01 Oct 2006 Date of data set storage OptionID SpectrumAnalyzer Application the transducer factor was created for Name TestTDF1 Transducer factor name Comment Transducer for device A Description of transducer factor XAxisScaling LIN...

Page 532: ...on Show Compatible All transducer lines stored on the instrument that are compatible to the current measurement settings are displayed in the overview How to activate and deactivate a transducer 1 To activate a transducer select a transducer line in the overview and select the Active setting for it The trace is automatically recalculated for the next sweep after a transducer line is activated 2 To...

Page 533: ...utton The new transducer line is displayed in the overview and can be activated How to delete an existing transducer line 1 In the Transducer dialog box select the transducer line 2 Select the Delete button 3 Confirm the message The transducer line is deleted After the next sweep the originally measured val ues are displayed How to configure a new transducer line 1 In the Transducer dialog box sel...

Page 534: ...tally Thus a new transducer line can be easily generated based upon an existing transducer line which has been shifted 1 In the Line Config dialog box select the transducer line 2 Select the Edit button 3 In the Edit Transducer Line dialog box select the Shift x or Shift y button and define the shift width 4 Save the shifted data points by selecting the Save button If activated the trace is recalc...

Page 535: ...The results are available until the next self alignment process is started or the instru ment is switched off Temperature check During self alignment the instrument s frontend temperature is measured as soon as the instrument has warmed up completely This temperature is used as a reference for a continuous temperature check during operation If the current temperature deviates from the stored self ...

Page 536: ... after Self Alignment 537 Starting Touch Screen Alignment 537 Alignment Results 537 Start Self Alignment Starts recording correction data for the instrument If the correction data acquisition fails or if the correction values are deactivated a corresponding message is displayed in the status field For details see Chapter 9 8 1 Basics on Alignment on page 534 Note A running Sequencer operation is a...

Page 537: ...he instrument cannot be restarted via remote control Starting Touch Screen Alignment Starts the touchscreen alignment Tap the 4 markers on the screen as you are asked to do The touchscreen is aligned according to the executed pointing operations Alignment Results Information on whether the alignment was performed successfully and on the applied correction data is displayed The results are availabl...

Page 538: ...UP key 2 Select the Alignment softkey 3 Select the Start Self Alignment button 4 To abort the self alignment process select the Abort Self Alignment button Once the system correction values have been calculated successfully a message is displayed To display the alignment results again later Press the SETUP key Press the Alignment softkey 9 8 5 How to Align the Touchscreen To align the touchscreen ...

Page 539: ...10 1 Remote Control Basics Basic information on operating an instrument via remote control is provided here This information applies to all applications and operating modes on the R S FPL1000 For additional information on remote control of spectrum analyzers see the following application notes available from the Rohde Schwarz website 1EF62 Hints and Tricks for Remote Control of Spectrum and Networ...

Page 540: ...on the controller is a prerequisite for remote control using the indicated interfaces See also Chapter 10 1 3 VISA Libraries on page 548 Within this interface description the term GPIB is used as a synonym for the IEC IEEE bus interface 10 1 1 1 LAN Interface To be integrated in a LAN the instrument is equipped with a LAN interface consisting of a connector a network interface card and protocols T...

Page 541: ...lects the newer HiSLIP protocol INSTR indicates the instrument resource class optional port determines the used port number SOCKET indicates the raw network socket resource class Example Instrument has the IP address 192 1 2 3 the valid resource string using VXI 11 protocol is TCPIP 192 1 2 3 INSTR The DNS host name is FPL1004 123456 the valid resource string using HiSLIP is TCPIP FPL1004 123456 h...

Page 542: ...iding versatile locking mechanisms Usable for IPv6 or IPv4 networks Using VXI 11 each operation is blocked until a VXI 11 device handshake returns How ever using HiSLIP data is sent to the device using the fire and forget method with immediate return Thus a successful return of a VISA operation such as viWrite does not guarantee that the instrument has finished or started the requested com mand bu...

Page 543: ...s Via the LXI browser interface to the R S FPL1000 you can control the instrument remotely from another PC Manual instrument controls are available via the front panel simulation File upload and download between the instrument and the remote PC is also available Using this feature several users can access and operate the R S FPL1000 simultaneously This is useful for troubleshooting or training pur...

Page 544: ...age belongs to To identify the instrument activate the Device Indicator Then check the LAN Status indicator of the instruments LAN Configuration allows you to configure LAN parameters and to initiate a ping See Ping Client on page 597 See Status Bar displays information about the LXI status of the instrument Utilities provides access to the LXI event log functionality required by the LXI standard ...

Page 545: ...on page 598 You can set the GPIB address and the ID response string The GPIB language is set as SCPI by default and cannot be changed for the R S FPL1000 Notes and Conditions In connection with the GPIB interface note the following Up to 15 instruments can be connected The total cable length is restricted to a maximum of 15 m or 2 m times the number of devices whichever is less the cable length be...

Page 546: ...Network and Remote Operation R S FPL1000 546 User Manual 1178 3370 02 09 Figure 10 1 Communication lines used by the GPIB interface Remote Control Basics ...

Page 547: ...truments addressed as listeners Command Effect on the instrument GET Group Execute Trigger Triggers a previously active instrument function e g a sweep The effect of the command is the same as with that of a pulse at the external trigger signal input GTL Go to Local Transition to the local state manual control GTR Go to Remote Transition to the remote state remote control PPC Parallel Poll Configu...

Page 548: ...erface messages are transmitted to the instrument on the data lines with the attention line being active LOW They are used to communicate between the con troller and the instrument Interface messages can only be sent by instruments that have GPIB bus functionality For details see the sections for the required interface Instrument messages Instrument messages are employed in the same way for all in...

Page 549: ...t responses Instrument responses response messages and service requests are messages the instrument sends to the controller after a query They can contain measurement results instrument settings and information on the instrument status 10 1 5 SCPI Command Structure SCPI commands consist of a header and in most cases one or more parameters The header and the parameters are separated by a white spac...

Page 550: ...ncy numeric_value numeric_value Long and short form 550 Numeric Suffixes 550 Optional Mnemonics 551 Long and short form The mnemonics feature a long form and a short form The short form is marked by upper case letters the long form corresponds to the complete word Either the short form or the long form can be entered other abbreviations are not permitted Example HCOPy DEVice COLor ON is equivalent...

Page 551: ...ion The instrument must recognize the long command to comply with the SCPI standard Some commands are considerably shortened by these optional mnemonics Example Definition HCOPy IMMediate Command HCOP IMM is equivalent to HCOP Optional mnemonics with numeric suffixes Do not omit an optional mnemonic if it includes a numeric suffix that is relevant for the effect of the command Example Definition D...

Page 552: ...be entered If the unit is missing the basic unit is used Allowed unit prefixes are G giga MA mega MOHM MHZ K kilo M milli U micro N nano Example SENSe FREQ STOP 1 5GHz SENSe FREQ STOP 1 5E9 Some settings allow relative values to be stated in percent According to SCPI this unit is represented by the PCT string Example HCOP PAGE SCAL 90PCT Special Numeric Values The following mnemonics are special n...

Page 553: ... mnemonic after the quotation mark Example SENSe LIST FREQ MAXimum Returns the maximum numeric value as a result Boolean Parameters Boolean parameters represent two states The ON state logically true is represen ted by ON or a numeric value 1 The OFF state logically untrue is represented by OFF or the numeric value 0 The numeric values are provided as the response for a query Example Setting comma...

Page 554: ...ormat requires a NL END message to terminate the data block This format is useful when the length of the transmission is not known or if speed or other considerations prevent segmentation of the data into blocks of definite length 10 1 5 4 Overview of Syntax Elements The following tables provide an overview of the syntax elements and special charac ters Table 10 3 Syntax elements The colon separat...

Page 555: ... The two following commands with identical meaning can be created SENS BAND RES 1 SENS BWID RES 1 Mnemonics in square brackets are optional and may be inserted into the header or omitted Example HCOPy IMMediate HCOP IMM is equivalent to HCOP Parameters in curly brackets are optional and can be inserted once or several times or omitted Example SENSe LIST FREQuency numeric_value numeric_value The fo...

Page 556: ...According to SCPI the responses to queries are partly subject to stricter rules than in standard IEEE 488 2 The requested parameter is transmitted without a header Example HCOP PAGE ORI Response LAND Maximum values minimum values and all other quantities that are requested via a special text parameter are returned as numeric values Example SENSe FREQuency STOP MAX Response 3 5E9 Numeric values are...

Page 557: ... within one command line even though they may be implemented as sequential commands are not necessarily serviced in the order in which they have been received In order to make sure that commands are actually carried out in a cer tain order each command must be sent in a separate command line Example Commands and queries in one message The response to a query combined in a program message with comm...

Page 558: ... the controller OPC Sets the Operation Complete bit in the ESR after all previous commands have been exe cuted Setting bit 0 in the ESE Setting bit 5 in the SRE Waiting for service request SRQ OPC Stops command processing until 1 is returned This occurs when all pending opera tions are completed Send OPC directly after the command whose processing must be terminated before other commands can be ex...

Page 559: ...equence OPC ESR A return value LSB of 1 indicates that the overlapped command has finished 10 1 7 Status Reporting System The status reporting system stores all information on the current operating state of the instrument and on errors which have occurred This information is stored in the status registers and in the error queue Both can be queried via GPIB bus or LAN interface STATus commands See ...

Page 560: ...me too low 15 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 0 1 2 STAT QUES FREQuency not used OVEN COLD LO UNLocked External REFerence STAT QUES LIMit n LIMit 1 FAIL LIMit 2 FAIL LIMit 3 FAIL LIMit 4 FAIL LIMit 5 FAIL LIMit 6 FAIL LIMit 7 FAIL LIMit 8 FAIL logic AND logic OR of all bits TEMPerature 15 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 0 1 2 not used STAT QUES TEMPerature Frontend temp error INPut_overload SWEeping MEASuring Waiting for TRIGger one...

Page 561: ...g to SCPI By analogy the ESE can be used as the ENABle part of the ESR 10 1 7 2 Structure of a SCPI Status Register Each standard SCPI register consists of 5 parts Each part has a width of 16 bits and has different functions The individual bits are independent of each other i e each hardware status is assigned a bit number which is valid for all five parts Bit 15 the most significant bit is set to...

Page 562: ...eading it is the memory of the condition part It only indicates events passed on by the transition filters It is permanently updated by the instrument This part can only be read by the user Reading the register clears it This part is often equated with the entire register ENABle The ENABle part determines whether the associated EVENt bit contributes to the sum bit see below Each bit of the EVENt p...

Page 563: ...bits of the status byte The STB can thus be compared with the CONDition part of an SCPI register and assumes the highest level within the SCPI hierarchy The STB is read using the command STB or a serial poll The STatus Byte STB is linked to the Service Request Enable SRE register Each bit of the STB is assigned a bit in the SRE Bit 6 of the SRE is ignored If a bit is set in the SRE and the associa...

Page 564: ...ion in a single bit It can be read by means of a parallel poll see Parallel Poll on page 574 or using the command IST The parallel poll enable register PPE determines which bits of the STB contribute to the IST flag The bits of the STB are ANDed with the corresponding bits of the PPE with bit 6 being used as well in contrast to the SRE The IST flag results from the ORing of all results The PPE can...

Page 565: ...manual control 7 Power On supply voltage on This bit is set on switching on the instrument STATus OPERation Register The STATus OPERation register contains information on current activities of the R S FPL1000 It also contains information on activities that have been executed since the last read out You can read out the register with STATus OPERation CONDition or STATus OPERation EVENt Table 10 8 M...

Page 566: ...r By default querying the status of a subregister always returns the result for the currently selected channel Table 10 9 Meaning of the bits used in the STATus QUEStionable register Bit No Meaning 0 EXTended This bit indicates further status information not covered by the other status registers in any of the active channels 1 Battery LOW This bit is set if the battery needs to be charged or a fix...

Page 567: ...emeasurements 12 ACPLimit device specific This bit is set if a limit during ACLR measurements is violated in any of the active channels The STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit Register provides more information on the error type 13 14 Unused 15 This bit is always 0 STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit Register Available for the Spectrum application The STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit register contains information a...

Page 568: ...ch active channel You can read out the register with STATus QUEStionable EXTended CONDition or STATus QUEStionable EXTended EVENt Table 10 11 Meaning of the bits used in the STATus QUEStionable EXTended register Bit No Meaning 0 not used 1 INFO This bit is set if a status message is available for the application Which type of message occurred is indicated in the STATus QUEStionable EXTended INFO R...

Page 569: ...o longer possi ble 5 to 14 Unused 15 This bit is always 0 STATus QUEStionable FREQuency Register The STATus QUEStionable FREQuency register contains information about the condi tion of the local oscillator and the reference frequency A separate frequency register exists for each active channel You can read out the register with STATus QUEStionable FREQuency CONDition or STATus QUEStionable FREQuen...

Page 570: ...ated 1 LIMit 2 FAIL This bit is set if limit line 2 is violated 2 LIMit 3 FAIL This bit is set if limit line 3 is violated 3 LIMit 4 FAIL This bit is set if limit line 4 is violated 4 LIMit 5 FAIL This bit is set if limit line 5 is violated 5 LIMit 6 FAIL This bit is set if limit line 6 is violated 6 LIMit 7 FAIL This bit is set if limit line 7 is violated 7 LIMit 8 FAIL This bit is set if limit l...

Page 571: ... is set if limit margin 8 is violated 8 to 14 Not used 15 This bit is always 0 STATus QUEStionable POWer Register The STATus QUEStionable POWer register contains information about possible overload situations that may occur during operation of the R S FPL1000 A separate power register exists for each active channel You can read out the register with STATus QUEStionable POWer CONDition or STATus QU...

Page 572: ...r each active channel You can read out the register with STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature CONDition or STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature EVENt Table 10 17 Meaning of the bits used in the STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature register Bit No Meaning 0 This bit is set if the frontend temperature sensor deviates by a certain degree from the self alignment temperature During warmup this bit is always 1 For det...

Page 573: ...tus byte are set and enabled in the SRE Each of these bits combines the information of a further register the error queue or the output buffer The ENABle parts of the status registers can be set such that arbitrary bits in an arbitrary status register initiate an SRQ In order to make use of the possibilities of the service request effectively all bits should be set to 1 in enable registers SRE and...

Page 574: ...e instrument first has to be set for the parallel poll using the command PPC This command allocates a data line to the instrument and determines whether the response is to be inverted The parallel poll itself is executed using PPE The parallel poll method is mainly used to find out quickly which one of the instruments connected to the controller has sent a service request To this effect SRE and PP...

Page 575: ...program as the entries describe the cause of an error more precisely than the status registers Espe cially in the test phase of a controller program the error queue should be queried regu larly since faulty commands from the controller to the instrument are recorded there as well 10 1 7 5 Reset Values of the Status Reporting System The following table contains the different commands and events cau...

Page 576: ...perating convenience In con trast the priority of remote control is the predictability of the instrument status Thus when a command attempts to define incompatible settings the command is ignored and the instrument status remains unchanged i e other settings are not automatically adapted Therefore control programs should always define an initial instrument status e g using the RST command and then...

Page 577: ...l programs Supported languages Language Comment SCPI 71100C Compatible to 8566A B 71200C Compatible to 8566A B 71209A Compatible to 8566A B 8560E 8561E 8562E 8563E 8564E 8565E 8566A Command sets A and B are available Command sets A and B differ in the rules regarding the command structure 8566B 8568A Command sets A and B are available Command sets A and B differ in the rules regarding the command ...

Page 578: ...or emulation of 8566A B 8568A B 8594E FSEA FSEB FSEM FSEK instruments Model of Trace Points Start Freq Stop Freq Ref Level Input Coupling 8566A B 1001 2 GHz 22 GHz 0 dBm AC 8568A B 1001 0 Hz 1 5 GHz 0 dBm AC 8560E 601 0 Hz 2 9 GHz 0 dBm AC 8561E 601 0 Hz 6 5 GHz 0 dBm AC 8562E 601 0 Hz 13 2 GHz 0 dBm AC 8563E 601 0 Hz 26 5 GHz 0 dBm AC 8564E 601 0 Hz 40 GHz 0 dBm AC 8565E 601 0 Hz 50 GHz 0 dBm AC ...

Page 579: ...rning to Manual Mode Local 590 10 3 1 General Network Settings Access SETUP Network Remote Network tab The R S FPL1000 can be operated in a local area network LAN for example to con trol the instrument from a remote PC or use a network printer Risk of network problems All parameters can be edited here however beware that changing the computer name has major effects in a network For details see Cha...

Page 580: ...anged The naming conventions of Windows apply If too many characters and or numbers are entered an error message is displayed in the status line The default instrument name is a non case sensitive string with the following syntax Type variant serial_number For example FPL1003 123456 The serial number can be found on the rear panel of the instrument It is the third part of the device ID printed on ...

Page 581: ...r is available DHCP On this setting is read only The subnet mask consists of four number blocks separated by dots Each block con tains 3 numbers in maximum e g 100 100 100 100 but also one or two numbers are allowed in a block as an example see the preinstalled address DHCP Switches between DHCP server available On or not available Off If a DHCP server is available in the network the IP address an...

Page 582: ...he default address is 20 Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF ADDRess on page 968 Identification String Defines the identification string for the R S FPL1000 which is provided as a response to the IDN query Maximum 36 characters are allowed Remote command SYSTem IDENtify STRing on page 969 Reset to Factory String Restores the default identification string Each R S FPL1000 has a unique ID ac...

Page 583: ...included in the binary data block and therefore should not be interpreted as a terminator in this particular case This can be avoided by using only the receive terminator EOI Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF RTERminator on page 968 I O Logging Activates or deactivates the SCPI error log function All remote control commands received by the R S FPL1000 are recorded in a log file The files...

Page 584: ...S FPL1000 can emulate the GPIB interface of other signal and spectrum ana lyzers e g in order to use existing control applications Compatibility with former R S signal and spectrum analyzers As a rule the R S FPL1000 supports most commands from previous R S signal and spectrum analyzers such as the FSQ FSP FSU or FSV However the default values in particular the number of sweep points or particular...

Page 585: ...lications as in legacy systems Remote command SYSTem LANGuage on page 978 IF Gain Configures the internal IF gain settings in HP emulation mode due to the application needs This setting is only taken into account for resolution bandwidth 300 kHz NORM Optimized for high dynamic range overload limit is close to reference level PULS Optimized for pulsed signals overload limit up to 10 dB above refere...

Page 586: ...nse to the REV query for the revision number to the factory default HP emulation only see Language on page 585 Remote command SYSTem REVision FACTory on page 971 10 3 4 LXI Settings Access SETUP Network Remote LXI tab On the R S FPL1000 the LXI Class C functionality is already installed and enabled thus the instrument can be accessed via any web browser e g the Microsoft Internet Explorer to perfo...

Page 587: ...fined in the operating system see also Computer Name on page 580 MAC address Media Access Control address MAC address a unique identifier for the network card in the R S FPL1000 IP address IP address of the R S FPL1000 as defined in the operating system see also IP Address on page 581 ICMP Indicates whether the ping responder is active or not VXI 11 Dis covery If enabled connected devices are dete...

Page 588: ...ter Value TCP IP Mode DHCP Auto IP Address Dynamic DNS Enabled ICMP Ping Enabled Password for LAN configuration LxiWebIfc The LAN settings are configured in the Network tab of the Network Remote dialog box or using the instrument s LXI Browser interface Remote command SYSTem LXI LANReset on page 971 10 3 5 Remote Errors Access SETUP Network Remote Remote Errors tab The error messages generated by ...

Page 589: ...est one is inserted To clear the message buffer use the Clear Error List button It is automatically cleared when the R S FPL1000 is shut down The following information is available No Device specific error code Error Brief description of the error Date Time Time the message occurred Remote command SYSTem ERRor LIST on page 974 Clear Error List Deletes the error message buffer for remote operation ...

Page 590: ...at the time of pressing the LOCAL softkey the synchronization mechanism via OPC OPC or WAI is active the currently running measurement procedure is aborted and synchronization is achieved by setting the corresponding bits in the registers of the status reporting system Bit 6 User Request of the Event Status Register is set If the status reporting system is configured accordingly this bit immediate...

Page 591: ... and measurement a common requirement is central monitoring of the T M instruments for remote maintenance and remote diagnostics Equipped with the Remote Desktop software of Windows the R S FPL1000 ideally meets require ments for use in production The computer that is used for remote operation is called controller here The following tasks can be performed using Remote Desktop Access to the control...

Page 592: ...ipped with a network adapter and is directly connected to the instrument The use of hubs switches or gateways is not required however data transfer is still performed using the TCP IP protocol An IP address has to be assigned to the instrument and the computer see Chapter 10 4 1 2 How to Assign the IP Address on page 592 Note As the R S FPL1000 uses a 1 GBit LAN a crossover cable is not necessary ...

Page 593: ...tkey 3 Select the Network tab 4 In the Network Remote dialog toggle the DHCP On Off setting to the required mode If DHCP is Off you must enter the IP address manually as described in the fol lowing steps Note When DHCP is changed from On to Off the previously set IP address and subnet mask are retrieved If DHCP is On the IP address of the DHCP server is obtained automatically The configuration is ...

Page 594: ...1 Obtain the name of your DNS domain and the IP addresses of the DNS and WINS servers on your network see Chapter 10 4 1 3 How to Change the Instrument Name on page 595 2 Press the Setup key and then the Network Remote softkey 3 In the Network tab select the Open Dialog Network Connections button 4 Double tap the Local Area Network entry 5 In the Local Area Connection Status dialog box select the ...

Page 595: ... change the instrument s computer name 1 Press the Setup key and then the Network Remote softkey The current Computer Name is displayed in the Network tab 2 Enter the new computer name and close the dialog box The configuration is saved and you are prompted to restart the instrument 3 Confirm the displayed message Yes button to restart the instrument 10 4 1 4 How to Configure the LAN Using the LXI...

Page 596: ...LXI status LED blinks The Device Indicator setting is not password protected The most important control elements in the navigation pane of the browser interface are the following LAN Configuration opens the menu with configuration pages Status displays information about the LXI status of the instrument Help Glossary opens a document with a glossary of terms related to the LXI standard LAN Configur...

Page 597: ... speed and duplex mode settings In general the Auto Detect mode is sufficient ICMP Ping must be enabled to use the ping utility VXI 11 is the protocol that is used to detect the instrument in the LAN According to the standard LXI devices must use VXI 11 to provide a detection mechanism other additional detection mechanisms are permitted mDNS and DNS SD are two additional protocols Multicast DNS an...

Page 598: ...t set up the connection when the instru ment is switched on If you are not prompted to enter the user name and password proceed as described in Chapter 10 4 3 3 How to Activate or Deactivate the Automatic Login Mechanism on page 600 10 4 3 How to Log on to the Network Windows requires that users identify themselves by entering a user name and pass word in a login window You can set up two types of...

Page 599: ...nism must then be deacti vated The network administrator is responsible for creating new users in the network 1 Select the Windows icon in the toolbar to access the operating system 2 Select Start Settings Accounts Other users 3 Select Add someone else to this PC 4 In the Microsoft account dialog box enter the new user name and password 5 Select OK 6 Select Finish The new user is created 10 4 3 2 ...

Page 600: ... select Run The Run dialog box is displayed 2 Enter the command C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Analyzer user AUTOLOGIN REG 3 Press the ENTER key to confirm The automatic login mechanism is reactivated It will be applied the next time the instrument is switched on 10 4 4 How to Share Directories only with Microsoft Networks Sharing directories makes data available for other users This is on...

Page 601: ...00 in the browser s address bar The R S FPL1000 s Welcome page is displayed 3 In the navigation pane select Instrument Control Web Control The instrument s display is shown in a new browser window with a software front panel displayed beside or below it 4 Use the mouse cursor to access the functionality in the software front panel or in the display as you would directly on the instrument s front p...

Page 602: ...ection dialog box and select the required file on the PC c Select Upload to copy the file from the PC to the defined folder on the R S FPL1000 10 4 6 How to Deactivate the Web Browser Interface If you want to prevent other users in the LAN from accessing or operating the R S FPL1000 via its LXI web browser interface you must deactivate this function Note that after a firmware update the function i...

Page 603: ... and Remote Desktop provides access to all of the applications files and net work resources of the instrument Thus remote operation of the R S FPL1000 is pos sible With Windows Remote Desktop Client is part of the operating system For other ver sions of Windows Microsoft offers the Remote Desktop Client as an add on For details refer to the Windows operating system documentation With the factory s...

Page 604: ...This address must first be determined on the instrument itself Thus using a DHCP server is not suitable for remote operation of the R S FPL1000 via Remote Desktop 2 Select the Windows icon in the toolbar to access the operating system 3 In the Windows Start menu select Settings System 4 Search for remote access 5 Select Allow remote access to your computer 6 Define which users are to be given acce...

Page 605: ...op Client With Windows Remote Desktop Client is part of the operating system and can be accessed via Start Programs Accessories Remote Desktop Connection For other versions of Windows Microsoft offers the Remote Desktop Client as an add on 1 Select the Windows icon in the toolbar to access the operating system 2 From the Start menu select All Programs Accessories Remote Desktop Connection The Remo...

Page 606: ...the options are activated or deactivated 6 To improve the performance you can deactivate the Desktop background Show contents of window while dragging and Menu and window animation options 7 Open the Local Resources tab for enabling printers local drives and serial inter faces 8 If you will need to access drives of the controller from the R S FPL1000 e g in order to store settings or to copy files...

Page 607: ...FPL1000 activate the Printers option Do not change the remaining set tings 10 Open the Display tab The options for configuring the R S FPL1000 screen display are displayed 11 Under Remote desktop size you can set the size of the R S FPL1000 window on the desktop of the controller 12 Under Colors do not change the settings 13 Set the Display the connection bar when I use the full screen option How ...

Page 608: ...user In the Password field enter 894129 3 To save the connection configuration for later use a Select the Save As button The Save As dialog box is displayed b Enter the name for the connection information RDP 4 To load an existing connection configuration a Select the Open button The Open dialog box is displayed b Select the RDP file 5 Select the Connect button The connection is set up 6 If the Di...

Page 609: ...plication window The Windows Start menu can be made available by expanding the Remote Desktop window to full size During the connection with the controller the login entry is displayed on the R S FPL1000 screen To terminate Remote Desktop control The connection can be terminated by the controller or by a user at the R S FPL1000 1 On the controller close the Remote Desktop window at any time The co...

Page 610: ... operated via the front panel To start remote control 1 Send an addressed command GTR Go to Remote from a controller to the instru ment The instrument is switched to remote control remote state Operation via the front panel is disabled Only the Local softkey is displayed to return to manual operation The instrument remains in the remote state until it is reset to the manual state via the instrumen...

Page 611: ...switch off the display For details see Remote Display Update on page 583 10 4 9 How to Return to Manual Operation Before you switch back to manual operation all remote command processing must be completed Otherwise the instrument will switch back to remote control immediately Select the Local softkey or use the following GPIB command status viGpibControlREN vi VI_GPIB_REN_ADDRESS_GTL If you select...

Page 612: ...ult Displays 749 Setting Basic Spectrum RF Measurement Parameters 758 Managing Settings and Results 917 Configuring the R S FPL1000 955 Emulating Other Instruments Commands 977 Using the Status Register 1010 Deprecated Commands 1022 11 1 Conventions Used in SCPI Command Descriptions Note the following conventions used in the remote command descriptions Command usage If not specified otherwise comm...

Page 613: ... link to the description is inserted 11 2 Common Suffixes In the Spectrum application the following common suffixes are used in remote com mands Table 11 1 Common suffixes used in remote commands in the Spectrum application Suffix Value range Description m 1 to 16 Marker n 1 to 16 Window in the currently selected channel setup t 1 to 6 Trace li 1 to 8 Limit line 11 3 Common Commands Common command...

Page 614: ...rt Self Alignment on page 536 CLS Clear status Sets the status byte STB the standard event register ESR and the EVENt part of the QUEStionable and the OPERation registers to zero The command does not alter the mask and transition parts of the registers It clears the output buffer Usage Setting only ESE Value Event status enable Sets the event status enable register to the specified value The query...

Page 615: ...xecu ted This bit can be used to initiate a service request The query writes a 1 into the output buffer when all preceding commands have been executed which is useful for command synchronization OPT Option identification query Queries the options included in the instrument For a list of all available options and their description refer to the data sheet Usage Query only PCB Address Pass control ba...

Page 616: ...ents of the power on status clear flag Parameters Action 0 1 0 The contents of the status registers are preserved 1 Resets the status registers RST Reset Sets the instrument to a defined default status The default settings are indicated in the description of commands The command is equivalent to SYSTem PRESet Usage Setting only SRE Contents Service request enable Sets the service request enable re...

Page 617: ...le the test is still running the instrument only returns to the manual operation state after the test is completed In this case the self test cannot be aborted Return values ErrorCode integer 0 in decimal format An error occurred 0 No errors occurred Usage Query only WAI Wait to continue Prevents servicing of the subsequent commands until all preceding commands have been executed and all signals h...

Page 618: ...ots the instrument including the operating system SYSTem SHUTdown This command shuts down the instrument 11 5 Selecting the Operating Mode and Application The following commands are required to select the operating mode or the application and to configure a Sequencer in a remote environment Selecting the Mode and Applications 618 Performing a Sequence of Measurements 622 Programming Example Perfor...

Page 619: ...and Example INST SEL IQAnalyzer INST CRE DUPL Duplicates the channel setup named IQAnalyzer and creates a new channel setup named IQAnalyzer2 Usage Event Manual operation See Duplicate Current Channel on page 83 INSTrument CREate NEW ChannelType ChannelName This command adds an additional measurement channel You can configure up to 10 measurement channels at the same time depending on available me...

Page 620: ...haracters such as Example INST CRE REPL IQAnalyzer2 IQ IQAnalyzer Replaces the channel setup named IQAnalyzer2 by a new channel setup of type IQ Analyzer named IQAnalyzer Usage Setting only Manual operation See Replace Current Channel Setup on page 83 INSTrument DELete ChannelName This command deletes a channel setup Setting parameters ChannelName String containing the name of the channel setup yo...

Page 621: ...ecified name for a new channel setup already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel setup INSTrument REName ChannelName1 ChannelName2 This command renames a channel setup Setting parameters ChannelName1 String containing the name of the channel setup you want to rename ChannelName2 String containing the new channel setup name Note that you cannot assign...

Page 622: ...0 See I Q Analyzer on page 80 See Analog Demod on page 80 See Noise Figure on page 80 See Vector Signal Analysis VSA on page 80 See Defining a channel setup on page 82 See New Channel Setup on page 83 11 5 2 Performing a Sequence of Measurements The following commands control the sequencer For details on the Sequencer see Chapter 6 4 Running a Sequence of Measure ments on page 83 INITiate SEQuence...

Page 623: ... in a group are started simultaneously and performed once After all measure ments are completed the next group is started After the last group the measurement sequence is finished CONTinuous Each measurement group is started one after the other in the order of definition All measurement channels in a group are started simultaneously and performed once After all measure ments are completed the next...

Page 624: ...quence of Measurements This example demonstrates how to perform several measurements in a sequence in a remote environment 2xSpectrumanalyzer 2xIQ start Sequencer at the end test OPC Preparing the instrument and first channel RST Activate new IQ channel INSTrument CREate NEW IQ IQ 1 Set sweep count for new IQ channel SENS SWEEP COUNT 6 Change trace modes for IQ channel DISP TRAC1 MODE BLANK DISP T...

Page 625: ...sweep and retrieving results Change sweep count SENS SWEep COUNt 7 Single Sweep mode INIT CONT OFF Switch back to first IQ channel INST SEL IQ 1 WAI Perform a measurement INIT IMM OPC Retrieve results CALC MARK Y Activate Multiview DISPlay ATAB ON Performing a sequence of measurements with the Sequencer Activate Sequencer SYSTem SEQuencer ON Start sweep in Sequencer INITiate SEQuencer IMMediate OP...

Page 626: ... in Chapter 7 2 Measurements and Results on page 96 Performing Measurements 626 Configuring Power Measurements 630 Measuring Compression Points 634 Measuring the Channel Power and ACLR 638 Measuring the Carrier to Noise Ratio 656 Measuring the Occupied Bandwidth 657 Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask 659 Measuring Spurious Emissions 688 Analyzing Statistics APD CCDF 701 Measuring the Time Domain...

Page 627: ...e remote channel to the R S FPL1000 is blocked for further commands In this case you must interrupt processing on the remote channel first in order to abort the measurement To do so send a Device Clear command from the control instrument to the R S FPL1000 on a parallel channel to clear all currently active remote channels Depending on the used interface and protocol send the following commands Vi...

Page 628: ...t in single sweep mode you can synchronize to the end of the measurement with OPC OPC or WAI In continuous sweep mode synchronization to the end of the measurement is not possible Thus it is not recommended that you use continuous sweep mode in remote control as results like trace data or markers are only valid after a single sweep end synchronization For details on synchronization see Chapter 10 ...

Page 629: ...relevant Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode DISP WIND TRAC MODE AVER Switches on trace averaging SWE COUN 20 Sets the sweep counter to 20 sweeps INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 20 sweeps Manual operation See Frequency Sweep on page 97 See Zero Span on page 97 See Single Sweep Run Single on page 327 SENSe SWEep COUNt CURRent This query returns the curre...

Page 630: ...mode for power measurements Suffix n Window m Marker sb irrelevant Parameters Mode WRITe MAXHold WRITe The power is calculated from the current trace MAXHold The power is calculated from the current trace and compared with the previous power value using a maximum algorithm Manual operation See Power Mode on page 137 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer sb RESult Measurement This command queries the...

Page 631: ...width in dBm Hz CPOWer Channel power measurements Returns the channel power The unit of the return values depends on the scaling of the y axis logarithmic scaling returns the power in the current unit linear scaling returns the power in W For SEM measurements the return value is the channel power of the reference range PPOWer Peak power measurements Returns the peak power The unit of the return va...

Page 632: ...measurement with a single carrier The R S FPL1000 performs the measurement on the trace selected with SENSe POWer TRACe OBANdwidth OBWidth Occupied bandwidth measurement The R S FPL1000 performs the measurement on the trace that marker 1 is positioned on CN Carrier to noise ratio measurement CN0 Carrier to noise ratio measurement referenced to 1 Hz band width Manual operation See C N on page 151 S...

Page 633: ... bandwidth Manual operation See Optimized Settings Adjust Settings on page 138 See Adjust Settings on page 152 See Adjust Settings on page 157 SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet RLEVel This command determines the ideal reference level for the current measurement This automatic routine makes sure that the that the signal power level does not over load the R S FPL1000 or limit the dynamic range by too smal...

Page 634: ... 6 3 2 Pro gramming Example Measuring Compression Points on page 638 Useful commands for compression point measurements described elsewhere Power Sweep Commands on page 805 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RPOSition on page 780 Remote commands exclusive to compression point measurements CONFigure CMEasurement REFerence VALue 634 CONFigure CMEasurement REFerence MODE 635 CONFigure CMEasurement RESu...

Page 635: ...e Reference on page 125 CONFigure CMEasurement RESult CVALue UserCompression Defines the compression value for the n dB compression point see CONFigure CMEasurement RESult PNDB STAT on page 636 To query the results of the n dB compression point measurement use FETCh CMEasurement PNDB RESult on page 637 Parameters UserCompression Distance from the linear trace to the reference trace Default unit DB...

Page 636: ...To query the results of the 3 dB compression point measurement use FETCh CMEasurement P3DB RESult on page 637 Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on RST 1 Example Enable calculation CONF CME REF P3DB ON Query results FETC CME P3DB Manual operation See Compression Points on page 125 CONFigure CMEasurement RESult PNDB STAT State Enables or disables ...

Page 637: ...asurements on page 119 Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on RST 0 Example CONF CME ON Manual operation See Compression Measurement State on page 125 FETCh CMEasurement P1DB RESult FETCh CMEasurement P3DB RESult FETCh CMEasurement PNDB RESult Queries the results of the n dB compression point measurement see CONFigure CMEasurement RESult PNDB STAT...

Page 638: ...ME ON CONF CME RES P3DB ON CONF CME RES CVAL 5 CONF CME RES PNDB ON Performing the Measurement Select single sweep mode INIT CONT OFF Initiate a new measurement and wait until the sweep has finished INIT WAI Retrieving Results Query the results for the 3 dB and 5 dB compression points FETC CME P3DB Result 25 22 FETC CME PNDB Result 22 20 11 6 4 Measuring the Channel Power and ACLR All remote contr...

Page 639: ...nd loads a measurement configuration The measurement configuration for power measurements consists of weighting filter channel bandwidth and spacing resolution and video bandwidth detector and sweep time Suffix n Window m Marker sb irrelevant Parameters Standard For more information see Chapter 7 2 4 8 Reference Prede fined CP ACLR Standards on page 148 If you want to load a customized configurati...

Page 640: ...l bandwidth and spacing resolution and video bandwidth detector and sweep time Suffix n Window m Marker sb irrelevant Parameters Standard String containing the file name The file format is xml Manual operation See User Standards on page 135 11 6 4 2 Configuring the Channels The following commands configure channels for channel power and ACLR measure ments SENSe POWer ACHannel ACPairs 641 SENSe POW...

Page 641: ...ration See Channel Bandwidth on page 139 SENSe POWer ACHannel BWIDth ALTernate ch Bandwidth SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth ALTernate ch Bandwidth This command defines the channel bandwidth of the alternate channels If you set the channel bandwidth for the first alternate channel the R S FPL1000 sets the bandwidth of the other alternate channels to the same value but not the other way round The com...

Page 642: ... on page 141 SENSe POWer ACHannel NAME ALTernate ch Name This command defines a name for an alternate channel Suffix ch 1 n Alternate channel number Parameters Name String containing the name of the channel RST ALT 1 11 Manual operation See Channel Names on page 141 SENSe POWer ACHannel NAME CHANnel ch Name This command defines a name for a transmission channel Suffix ch 1 n Tx channel number Para...

Page 643: ...100 Hz to 2000 MHz RST 40 kHz ALT1 60 kHz ALT2 80 kHz ALT3 Default unit Hz Manual operation See Channel Spacings on page 139 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing CHANnel ch Spacing This command defines the distance between transmission channels If you set the channel spacing for a transmission channel the R S FPL1000 sets the spacing of the lower transmission channels to the same value but not the other w...

Page 644: ... SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe CHANnel ch 645 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa ACHannel Alpha This command defines the roll off factor for the adjacent channel weighting filter Parameters Alpha Roll off factor Range 0 to 1 RST 0 22 Manual operation See Weighting Filters on page 141 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa ALL Value This command defines the alpha value for the weighting filter for al...

Page 645: ...State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Manual operation See Weighting Filters on page 141 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe ALL State This command turns the weighting filters for all channels on and off Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe ALTernate ch State This command turns the weighting filter for an alternate channel on and off Suffix ch 1 n Alternate channel number Parameters ...

Page 646: ...nts Set CP Reference on page 137 SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence TXCHannel AUTO RefChannel This command selects the reference channel for relative measurements You need at least one channel for the command to work Parameters RefChannel MINimum MAXimum LHIGhest MINimum Transmission channel with the lowest power MAXimum Transmission channel with the highest power LHIGhest Lowest transmission channel ...

Page 647: ...IMit li ACPower ALTernate ch ABSolute 649 CALCulate n LIMit li ACPower ALTernate ch ABSolute STATe 650 CALCulate n LIMit li ACPower ALTernate ch RELative 650 CALCulate n LIMit li ACPower ALTernate ch RESult 651 CALCulate n LIMit li ACPower ALTernate ch RELative STATe 652 CALCulate n LIMit li ACPower STATe 652 CALCulate n LIMit li ACPower ACHannel ABSolute LowerLimit UpperLimit This command defines...

Page 648: ...u have defined an absolute limit as well as a relative limit the R S FPL1000 uses the lower value for the limit check Suffix n irrelevant li irrelevant Parameters LowerLimit The limit of the lower adjacent channel Range 0 dB to 100 dB RST 0 dB Default unit dB UpperLimit The limit of the upper adjacent channel Range 0 dB to 100 dB RST 0 dB Default unit dB Manual operation See Limit Check on page 14...

Page 649: ...uery only Manual operation See Limit Check on page 140 CALCulate n LIMit li ACPower ACHannel RELative STATe This command turns the relative limit check for the adjacent channels on and off You have to activate the general ACLR limit check before using this command with CALCulate n LIMit li ACPower STATe Suffix n irrelevant li irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 Relative limit check for lower ad...

Page 650: ...LTernate ch ABSolute STATe This command turns the absolute limit check for the alternate channels on and off You have to activate the general ACLR limit check before using this command with CALCulate n LIMit li ACPower STATe Suffix n irrelevant li irrelevant ch 1 n Alternate channel number Parameters State Manual operation See Limit Check on page 140 CALCulate n LIMit li ACPower ALTernate ch RELat...

Page 651: ...chan nels in an ACLR measurement To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweep mode See also INITiate n CONTinuous on page 628 Suffix n irrelevant li irrelevant ch Alternate channel number Return values LowerChan text value The state of the limit check for the...

Page 652: ...ternate channel number Parameters State Manual operation See Limit Check on page 140 CALCulate n LIMit li ACPower STATe State This command turns the limit check for ACLR measurements on and off Suffix n irrelevant li irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Manual operation See Limit Check on page 140 11 6 4 6 Performing an ACLR Measurement The following commands are required to perform an ACL...

Page 653: ...Ker m FUNCtion POWer sb RESult PHZ 653 SENSe POWer ACHannel MODE 653 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer sb RESult PHZ State This command selects the way the R S FPL1000 returns results for power measure ments You can query results with CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer sb RESult Suffix n Window m Marker sb irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 ON 1 Channel power density in dBm Hz OFF 0 Channel...

Page 654: ...ower measure ment Note that this example is primarily meant to demonstrate the remote control commands it does not necessarily reflect a useful measurement task For most com mon measurement standards the R S FPL1000 performs the measurement optimally with the predefined settings without further configuration Preparing the measurement Reset the instrument RST Preparing the measurement Activate adja...

Page 655: ...C POW STAN SAVE my_aclr_standard Defining Weighting Filters Define a roll off factor of 0 35 for the weighting filter of the first transmission channel POW ACH FILT ALPH CHAN1 0 35 Turn the weighting filter for the first transmission channel on POW ACH FILT CHAN1 ON Define a roll off factor of 0 35 for the weighting filter of the adjacent channel POW ACH FILT ALPH ACH 0 35 Turn the weighting filte...

Page 656: ...eck for the first alternate channels CALC LIM ACP ALT1 RES Retrieving Results Query the results for the ACLR measurement CALC MARK FUNC POW RES ACP 11 6 5 Measuring the Carrier to Noise Ratio The following commands are necessary to perform carrier to noise measurements CALC MARK FUNC POW SEL CN CN0 see CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer sb SELect CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer sb STATe CALCu...

Page 657: ...l remote control commands specific to occupied bandwidth measurements are described here Configuring the Measurement 657 Programming Example OBW Measurement 658 11 6 6 1 Configuring the Measurement The following commands configure measurements of the occupied bandwidth Useful commands for occupied bandwidth measurements described elsewhere Configuring the channel SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth CHA...

Page 658: ...ming example demonstrates the measurement example described in Chapter 7 2 6 5 Measurement Example on page 159 in a remote environment Preparing the measurement Reset the instrument RST Configuring the Measurement Set the center frequency to 800 MHz FREQ CENT 800MHz Set the reference level to 10 dBm DISP TRAC Y RLEV 10dBm Activate occupied bandwidth measurement CALC MARK FUNC POW SEL OBW Set the p...

Page 659: ... a Sweep List 662 Configuring the Reference Range 676 Configuring the Power Classes 678 Configuring the List Evaluation 683 Performing an SEM Measurement 685 Retrieving Results 685 Example SEM Measurement 685 11 6 7 1 Managing Measurement Configurations The following commands control measurement configurations for SEM measurements CALCulate n LIMit li ESPectrum sb RESTore 659 SENSe ESPectrum sb PR...

Page 660: ...on page 180 See Load Standard on page 185 SENSe ESPectrum sb PRESet RESTore This command restores the default configurations of predefined SEM standards Note that the command will overwrite customized standards that have the same name as predefined standards Suffix sb 1 to 3 Sub block in a Multi SEM measurement Manual operation See Restore Standard Files on page 185 SENSe ESPectrum sb PRESet STORe...

Page 661: ...surements ESPectrum Turns on spectrum emission mask measurements LIST Turns on spurious emission measurements RST AUTO Example SWE MODE ESP 11 6 7 3 Configuring a Multi SEM Measurement In the Spectrum application only spectrum emissions can be measured for multiple sub blocks of channels see SEM with Multiple Sub Blocks Multi SEM on page 169 Up to 8 sub blocks with 7 gaps can be defined For each s...

Page 662: ... 762 and SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 760 Range 1 to 3 RST 1 Default unit Hz Example ESP1 SCEN 1GHZ Manual operation See Sub Block Center Freq on page 180 SENSe ESPectrum sb SCOunt Subblocks This command defines the number of sub blocks in the SEM measurement Suffix sb irrelevant Parameters Subblocks Number of sub blocks in the SEM measurement Range 1 to 3 RST 1 Example ESP SCO 2 Manual operatio...

Page 663: ...e ESPectrum sb RANGe ri LIMit li RELative STARt 669 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri LIMit li RELative STARt ABS 670 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri LIMit li RELative STARt FUNCtion 670 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri LIMit li RELative STOP 671 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri LIMit li RELative STOP ABS 672 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri LIMit li RELative STOP FUNCtion 672 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri LIMit li STATe 67...

Page 664: ... Default unit Hz Manual operation See RBW on page 175 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri BANDwidth VIDeo VBW This command defines the video bandwidth for a SEM range In case of high speed measurements the video bandwidth has to be identical for all ranges Suffix sb 1 to 3 ri 1 n Selects the measurement range Parameters VBW Video bandwidth Refer to the data sheet for available video bandwidths RST 10 0 MH...

Page 665: ...er has to be identical for all ranges The EMI specific filter types are available if the EMI R S FPL1 K54 measurement option is installed even if EMI measurement is not active For details see Resolution Bandwidth and Filter Types on page 253 Suffix sb 1 to 3 ri 1 30 Selects the measurement range Parameters FilterType NORMal Gaussian filters CFILter channel filters RRC RRC filters CISPr PULSe CISPR...

Page 666: ...ange is 20 Hz RST 12 75 MHz range 1 2 515 MHz range 2 2 515 MHz range 3 Default unit Hz Manual operation See Range Start Range Stop on page 175 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri FREQuency STOP Frequency This command defines the stop frequency of a SEM range Make sure to set an appropriate span If you set a span that is smaller than the span the SEM sweep list covers the R S FPL1000 will not mea sure the...

Page 667: ... ATTenuation AUTO State This command turns automatic selection of the input attenuation for a SEM range on and off In case of high speed measurements the input attenuation has to be identical for all ranges Suffix sb 1 to 3 ri 1 n Selects the measurement range Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example ESP RANG2 INP ATT AUTO OFF Deactivates the RF attenuation auto mode for range 2 Manual operation ...

Page 668: ...s a new SEM range and updates the range numbers accordingly Suffix sb 1 to 3 ri 1 n Selects the SEM range Parameters Mode AFTer BEFore AFTer Inserts a range after the selected range BEFore Inserts a range before the selected range Manual operation See Insert before Range Insert after Range on page 179 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri LIMit li ABSolute STARt Level This command defines an absolute limit ...

Page 669: ...e limit check mode Suffix sb 1 to 3 ri 1 n Selects the measurement range li 1 n Power class for which the limit is defined Parameters Level Absolute limit at the stop frequency of a SEM range Range 400 to 400 RST 13 Default unit dBm Example SENSe ESPectrum RANGe LIMit ABSolute STOP 15 For a detailed example see Chapter 11 6 7 10 Example SEM Measurement on page 685 Manual operation See Abs Limit St...

Page 670: ... to 3 ri 1 n Selects the SEM range li 1 n Power class for which the limit is defined Parameters Level Absolute limit at the start frequency of a SEM range to be used in addition to the relative limit if the MAX function is enabled see SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri LIMit li RELative STARt FUNCtion on page 670 Range 400 to 400 RST 13 Default unit dBm Example SENSe ESPectrum RANGe LIMit RELative STARt ...

Page 671: ... define this value RST OFF Example SENSe ESPectrum RANGe LIMit RELative STARt FUNCtion MAX For a detailed example see Chapter 11 6 7 10 Example SEM Measurement on page 685 Manual operation See Rel Limit Start Stop n on page 177 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri LIMit li RELative STOP Level This command defines a relative limit for a SEM range Unlike manual operation you can define a relative limit anyti...

Page 672: ... if the MAX function is enabled see SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri LIMit li RELative STOP FUNCtion on page 672 Range 400 to 400 RST 13 Default unit dBm Example SENSe ESPectrum RANGe LIMit RELative STOP ABSolute 15 For a detailed example see Chapter 11 6 7 10 Example SEM Measurement on page 685 Manual operation See Rel Limit Start Stop n on page 177 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri LIMit li RELative STOP F...

Page 673: ...ent on page 685 Manual operation See Rel Limit Start Stop n on page 177 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri LIMit li STATe State This command selects the limit check mode for all SEM ranges range is irrelevant Suffix sb 1 to 3 ri 1 n Selects the SEM range li 1 n Power class for which the limit is defined Parameters State ABSolute RELative AND OR ABSolute Checks only the absolute limits defined RELative Ch...

Page 674: ...nts For details see Limit calculation for individ ual ranges on page 171 Suffix sb 1 to 3 Sub block in a Multi SEM measurement ri 1 n Selects the measurement range Parameters Function NONE MAX SUM NONE reference ranges only the limit of the reference range is used Reference ranges always use the function NONE SUM sum of the two limit lines calculated for linear powers is used MAX maximum of the tw...

Page 675: ...e measurement range Parameters SweepTime Sweep time The range depends on the ratios of the span to the RBW and the RBW to the VBW Refer to the data sheet for more informa tion Default unit s Manual operation See Sweep Time on page 176 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri SWEep TIME AUTO State This command turns automatic selection of the sweep time for a SEM range on and off In case of high speed measureme...

Page 676: ...nual operation See Transducer Factor on page 177 SENSe ESPectrum sb SSETup State Enables or disables symmetrical configuration of the range settings See Ranges and Range Settings on page 164 Suffix sb 1 to 3 Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on RST 0 Manual operation See Symmetrical Setup on page 179 11 6 7 5 Configuring the Reference Range The ...

Page 677: ...or for the RRC filter The RRC filter is available if the power reference is the channel power Suffix sb 1 to 3 Sub block in a Multi SEM measurement Parameters Alpha Range 0 to 1 RST 0 22 Manual operation See Alpha on page 182 SENSe ESPectrum sb FILTer RRC STATe State This command turns the RRC filter in the reference range on and off The RRC filter is available if the power reference is the channe...

Page 678: ...ine the power classes for SEM measurements CALCulate n LIMit li ESPectrum sb LIMits 678 CALCulate n LIMit li ESPectrum sb MODE 679 CALCulate n LIMit li ESPectrum sb VALue 680 CALCulate n LIMit li ESPectrum sb PCLass pc COUNt 680 CALCulate n LIMit li ESPectrum sb PCLass pc EXCLusive 681 CALCulate n LIMit li ESPectrum sb PCLass pc LIMit STATe 681 CALCulate n LIMit li ESPectrum sb PCLass pc MAXimum 6...

Page 679: ...ange 199 to 199 Max2 must be higher than Max1 Max3 Defines the value range for power class 3 as Max2 to Max3 The value range for power class 4 is defined as Max3 to 200 Only available for CALC LIM ESP PCL COUNT 4 Range 199 to 199 Max3 must be higher than Max2 Example CALC LIM ESP LIM 50 50 70 Defines the following power classes 200 50 50 50 50 70 70 200 Query CALC LIM ESP LIM Response 200 50 50 70...

Page 680: ... same effect as a combination of the CALC LIM ESP MODE MAN and the CALCulate n LIMit li ESPectrum sb PCLass pc EXCLusive commands however the power class to be used is not defined directly but via the expected power As opposed to CALC LIM ESP MODE AUTO the power class is not re assigned to the input signal power dynamically but only once when the command is executed Suffix n irrelevant li irreleva...

Page 681: ...ass used by the measurement if CALCulate n LIMit li ESPectrum sb MODE is set to manual Note that You can only use power classes for which limits are defined Suffix n irrelevant li irrelevant sb 1 to 3 pc 1 n power class Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Example CALC LIM ESP PCL1 ON Activates the first defined power class Manual operation See Used Power Classes on page 182 CALCulate n LIMit li ESPe...

Page 682: ...ation See Used Power Classes on page 182 CALCulate n LIMit li ESPectrum sb PCLass pc MAXimum Level This command defines the upper limit of a particular power class Note The last power class always has an upper limit of 200 dBm The upper limit of a power class must always be the same as the lower limit of the subsequent power class The power class must already exist see CALCulate n LIMit li ESPectr...

Page 683: ...wer value of the second power class to 40 dBm Manual operation See PMin PMax on page 183 11 6 7 7 Configuring the List Evaluation The following commands configure the list evaluation Useful commands for SEM measurements described elsewhere MMEMory STORe n LIST on page 942 Remote commands exclusive to SEM measurements CALCulate n ESPectrum PSEarch AUTO 683 CALCulate n ESPectrum PEAKsearch AUTO 683 ...

Page 684: ...in Threshold CALCulate n ESPectrum PEAKsearch MARGin Margin This command defines the threshold of the list evaluation Suffix n Window Parameters Margin Range 200 to 200 RST 200 Default unit dB Example CALC ESP PSE MARG 100 Sets the margin to 100 dB Manual operation See Margin on page 186 CALCulate n ESPectrum PSEarch PSHow State CALCulate n ESPectrum PEAKsearch PSHow State This command turns the p...

Page 685: ...and perform an SEM measurement Note that this example is primarily meant to demonstrate the remote control commands it does not necessarily reflect a useful measurement task For most common measurement stand ards the R S FPL1000 performs the measurement optimally with the predefined set tings without further configuration Preparing the measurement Reset the instrument RST Preparing the measurement...

Page 686: ...IM ABS Define a relative limit check for class 2 CALC LIM ESP PCL2 LIM REL Define a manual selection of the power class CALC LIM ESP MODE MAN Activate the use of the second power class for the entire measurement CALC LIM ESP PCL2 ON Configuring a Sweep List Insert a range after range 2 ESP RANG2 INS AFT Insert a range before range 1 ESP RANG1 INS BEF Query the number of measurement ranges in the s...

Page 687: ... for all ranges in power class 1 and fails if both limits are violated Since power class 2 is set to be used for the entire measurement values for Limit Check 1 are irrelevant They are defined here to demonstrate the use of the MAX function for relative limits ESP RANG LIM1 STAT AND Enable the use of maximum function for relative limit start If the value exceeds the larger of the absolute 13 dBm a...

Page 688: ...e result of the limit check for all ranges CALC LIM FAIL Query the peak for each range of the SEM measurement as a list TRAC DATA LIST 11 6 8 Measuring Spurious Emissions The following commands are required to perform spurious emissions measurements Initializing the Measurement 688 Configuring a Sweep List 689 Configuring the List Evaluation 697 Adjusting the X Axis to the Range Definitions 699 Pe...

Page 689: ... RANGe ri DETector 691 SENSe LIST RANGe ri FREQuency STARt 691 SENSe LIST RANGe ri FREQuency STOP 692 SENSe LIST RANGe ri FILTer TYPE 692 SENSe LIST RANGe ri INPut ATTenuation 693 SENSe LIST RANGe ri INPut ATTenuation AUTO 693 SENSe LIST RANGe ri INPut GAIN STATe 693 SENSe LIST RANGe ri INPut GAIN VALue 694 SENSe LIST RANGe ri LIMit STARt 694 SENSe LIST RANGe ri LIMit STATe 694 SENSe LIST RANGe ri...

Page 690: ...le video bandwidths Default unit Hz Example LIST RANG2 BAND VID 3KHZ Manual operation See VBW on page 205 SENSe LIST RANGe ri BREak State This command controls the sweep for all ranges Suffix ri irrelevant Parameters State ON 1 The R S FPL1000 stops after measuring one range and the status bit number 10 in the STAT OPER register is set To continue with the next range use INITiate n CONMeas OFF 0 T...

Page 691: ... LIST RANGe ri FREQuency STARt Frequency This command defines the start frequency of a spurious emission measurement range Make sure to set an appropriate span If you set a span that is smaller than the span the sweep list covers the R S FPL1000 will not measure the ranges that are outside the span results may be invalid greater than the span the sweep list covers the R S FPL1000 will adjust the s...

Page 692: ...ue RST 2 52 MHz range 1 2 52 MHz range 2 250 0 MHz range 3 Default unit Hz Example LIST RANG2 STOP 5MHZ Manual operation See Range Start Range Stop on page 205 SENSe LIST RANGe ri FILTer TYPE FilterType This command selects the filter type for a spurious emission measurement range The EMI specific filter types are available if the EMI R S FPL1 K54 measurement option is installed even if EMI measur...

Page 693: ... 10 dB Default unit dB Example LIST RANG2 INP ATT 5 Manual operation See RF Attenuation on page 206 SENSe LIST RANGe ri INPut ATTenuation AUTO State This command turns automatic selection of the input attenuation for a spurious emis sion measurement range on and off Suffix ri 1 n Selects the measurement range Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example LIST RANG2 INP ATT AUTO ON Manual operation See...

Page 694: ...range Parameters Level Absolute limit at the start frequency of a SEM range Range 400 to 400 RST 13 Default unit dBm Example LIST RANG2 LIM STAR 200 Manual operation See Abs Limit Start Abs Limit Stop on page 207 SENSe LIST RANGe ri LIMit STATe State This command turns the limit check for all spurious emission measurement ranges on and off Suffix ri irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Exa...

Page 695: ...ints see Chapter 7 6 1 8 How Much Data is Measured Sweep Points and Sweep Count on page 321 RST 1001 Example LIST RANG2 POIN 1000 Manual operation See Sweep Points on page 206 SENSe LIST RANGe ri RLEVel RefLevel This command defines the reference level for a spurious emission measurement range Suffix ri 1 n Selects the measurement range Parameters RefLevel Reference level Refer to the data sheet f...

Page 696: ...on and off Suffix ri 1 n Selects the measurement range Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example LIST RANG2 SWE TIME AUTO ON Manual operation See Sweep Time Mode on page 205 SENSe LIST RANGe ri TRANsducer Transducer This command selects a transducer factor for a spurious emission measurement range Note that the transducer must cover at least the span of the range the x axis has to be linear the un...

Page 697: ...te n PSEarch PSHow 698 CALCulate n PEAKsearch PSHow 698 CALCulate n PSEarch SUBRanges 698 CALCulate n PEAKsearch SUBRanges 698 CALCulate n PSEarch AUTO State CALCulate n PEAKsearch AUTO State This command turns the list evaluatio n on and off Suffix n Window Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example CALC PSE AUTO OFF Deactivates the list evaluation CALCulate n ESPectrum PSEarch DETails State CALCu...

Page 698: ... Margin on page 209 CALCulate n PSEarch PSHow State CALCulate n PEAKsearch PSHow State This command turns the peak labels in the diagram on and off Peak labels are blue squares Suffix n Window Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Example CALC PSE PSH ON Marks all peaks with blue squares Manual operation See Show Peaks on page 208 CALCulate n PSEarch SUBRanges NumberPeaks CALCulate n PEAKsearch SUBRan...

Page 699: ...Tiate n IMMediate on page 629 see Chapter 11 6 1 Performing Mea surements on page 626 11 6 8 6 Retrieving and Saving Settings and Results The following commands analyze and retrieve measurement results for Spurious mea surements Useful commands for spurious emission measurements described elsewhere CALCulate n LIMit li FAIL on page 914 TRACe n DATA on page 832 TRACe n DATA MEMory on page 833 TRACe...

Page 700: ...andwidth of 500 kHz in range 1 LIST RANG1 BAND VID 5000000 Defines a video bandwidth of 5 MHz for range 1 LIST RANG1 INP ATT AUTO OFF Turns automatic selection of the input attenuation in range 1 off LIST RANG1 INP ATT 10 Defines a input attenuation of 10 dBm for range 1 LIST RANG1 FILT TYPE CFILter Selects an Channel filter for range 1 LIST RANG1 DET SAMP Selects a sample detector for range 1 LIS...

Page 701: ...SPUR WAI Performs a spurious emission measurement and waits until the sweep has finished Retrieving Results CALC LIM1 FAIL Queries the result of the check for limit line 1 TRAC SPUR Queries the peak list of the spurious emission measurement 11 6 9 Analyzing Statistics APD CCDF All remote control commands specific to statistical measurements are described here Activating Statistical Measurements 70...

Page 702: ...ure the measurement Useful commands for configuring statistical measurements described elsewhere SENSe BANDwidth RESolution on page 769 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel on page 777 Make sure the specified reference level is higher than the measured peak value see CALCulate n MARKer m Y on page 858 Remote commands exclusive to statistical measurements CALCulate n MARKer m Y PERCent 702 CALCu...

Page 703: ...tion See Number of Samples on page 218 11 6 9 3 Using Gate Ranges for Statistical Measurements The following commands control gated statistical measurements SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe t COMMent 703 SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe t PERiod 703 SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe t STARt gr 704 SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe t STATe gr 704 SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe t STOP gr 705 SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe t COMMent Comment This comma...

Page 704: ...ENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe t PERiod The following rules apply the start time may not be higher than the length of the gate the start time may not be lower than the stop time of the gate range of a lower order The reset values depend on the gate range for gate range 1 the start time is 0 ms for gate range 3 the start time is 2 ms for gate range 5 the start time is 4 ms Default unit s Example SWE EGAT T...

Page 705: ...an the start time The reset values depend on the gate range for gate range 1 the stop time is 1 ms for gate range 3 the stop time is 3 ms for gate range 5 the stop time is 5 ms Default unit s Example SWE EGAT TRAC1 STOP1 5ms Sets the stopping point for range 1 on trace 1 at 5 ms Manual operation See Range x Start Stop on page 219 11 6 9 4 Scaling the Diagram The following commands set up the diagr...

Page 706: ... and the minimum power for the APD measurement and of the spacing between peak power and mean power for the CCDF measurement In addition the probability scale for the number of test points is adapted To get valid results you have to perform a complete sweep with synchronization to the end of the auto range process This is only possible in single sweep mode Suffix n Window Manual operation See Adju...

Page 707: ...ST 0 dBm Default unit dBm Example CALC STAT SCAL X RLEV 60dBm Manual operation See Ref Level on page 221 CALCulate n STATistics SCALe Y LOWer Magnitude This command defines the lower vertical limit of the diagram Suffix n Window Parameters Magnitude The number is a statistical value and therefore dimensionless Range 1E 9 to 0 1 RST 1E 6 Example CALC STAT SCAL Y LOW 0 001 Manual operation See Y Max...

Page 708: ...on page 629 see Chapter 11 6 1 Performing Mea surements on page 626 11 6 9 6 Retrieving Results The following commands are required to retrieve the measurement results Useful commands for retrieving results described elsewhere CALCulate n MARKer m X on page 845 Remote commands exclusive to statistical results CALCulate n STATistics CCDF X t 708 CALCulate n STATistics RESult res 709 CALCulate n STA...

Page 709: ...ts of all three measurements mentioned before separated by commas mean power peak power crest factor Example CALC STAT RES2 ALL Reads out the three measurement results of trace 2 Example of answer string 5 56 19 25 13 69 i e mean power 5 56 dBm peak power 19 25 dBm crest factor 13 69 dB Usage Query only 11 6 9 7 Programming Example Measuring Statistics This example demonstrates how to determine st...

Page 710: ...nt and waits until the sweep has finished Retrieving Results CALC STAT RES1 MEAN Returns the mean average power for the useful part of the GSM signal Determining the CCDF values CALC STAT CCDF ON Activates CCDF measurement CALC MARK2 Y PERC 95PCT Sets marker 2 to the 95 probability value INIT WAI Initiates a new measurement and waits until the sweep has finished CALC STAT CCDF X P1 Returns the lev...

Page 711: ...omain power measurements CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary AOFF 711 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary AVERage 711 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary PHOLd 712 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary STATe 712 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary MEAN STATe 713 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary PPEak STATe 713 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary RMS STATe 713 CALCulate n MARKer m FU...

Page 712: ...FUNCtion SUMMary PHOLd State This command switches on or off the peak hold function for the active power measure ment in zero span in the window specified by the suffix n If activated the peak for each sweep is compared to the previously stored peak the maximum of the two is stored as the current peak The peak hold function is reset by switching it off and on again Suffix n Window m Marker Paramet...

Page 713: ...Ker m FUNCtion SUMMary PPEak STATe State This command turns the evaluation to determine the positive peak time domain power on and off The R S FPL1000 performs the measurement on the trace marker 1 is positioned on Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Manual operation See Results on page 229 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary RMS STATe State This command turns the evaluati...

Page 714: ... commands query the results for time domain measurements Measuring the Mean Power CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary MEAN AVERage RESult 714 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary MEAN PHOLd RESult 715 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary MEAN RESult 715 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary MEAN AVERage RESult This command queries the average mean time domain power The query is only possi ble ...

Page 715: ...ueries the mean time domain power To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweep mode See also INITiate n CONTinuous on page 628 Suffix n Window m Marker Return values MeanPower Mean power of the signal during the measurement time Usage Query only Manual operat...

Page 716: ...surement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweep mode See also INITiate n CONTinuous on page 628 Suffix n Window m Marker Return values PeakPower Peak power of the signal during the measurement time Usage Query only CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary PPEak RESult This command queries the positive peak time domain power To get a valid result you have to perform a com...

Page 717: ...lt This command queries the maximum RMS of the time domain power The query is only possible if the peak hold function has been activated previously using CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary PHOLd To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweep mode See also IN...

Page 718: ...for single sweep mode See also INITiate n CONTinuous on page 628 Suffix n Window m Marker Return values StandardDeviation Standard deviation of the signal during the measurement time Usage Query only CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary SDEViation PHOLd RESult This command queries the maximum standard deviation of the time domain power The query is only possible if the peak hold function has been...

Page 719: ... Query only 11 6 10 4 Programming Example Time Domain Power This programming example demonstrates the measurement example described in Chapter 7 2 10 6 Measurement Example on page 230 in a remote environment Configuring the Measurement RST Resets the instrument INIT CONT OFF Turns on single sweep mode FREQ CENT 1 8GHz Sets the center frequency to 1 8 GHz BAND RES 100kHz Sets the bandwidth to 100 k...

Page 720: ...rement 721 Performing the Measurement 722 Retrieving Results 722 Example Measuring the Harmonic Distortion 723 11 6 11 1 Activating the Measurement The following command activates harmonic distortion measurement CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion HARMonics STATe 720 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion HARMonics STATe State This command turns the harmonic distortion measurement on and off Note the following I...

Page 721: ...istortion measurements CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion HARMonics BANDwidth AUTO 721 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion HARMonics NHARmonics 721 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion HARMonics PRESet 722 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion HARMonics BANDwidth AUTO State This command selects the resolution bandwidth of the harmonic in respect to the band width of the first harmonic Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters St...

Page 722: ... page 236 11 6 11 3 Performing the Measurement The following commands are required to perform a harmonic distortion measurement INITiate n IMMediate on page 629 see Chapter 11 6 1 Performing Mea surements on page 626 11 6 11 4 Retrieving Results The following commands retrieve the results of the harmonic distortion measurement CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion HARMonics DISTortion 722 CALCulate n MARK...

Page 723: ...r Return values Harmonics Returns one value for every harmonic The first value is the absolute power of the first harmonic The unit is variable The other values are power levels relative to the first harmonic The unit for these is dB 11 6 11 5 Example Measuring the Harmonic Distortion Configuring the Measurement RST Resets the instrument INIT CONT OFF Turns on single sweep mode CALC MARK FUNC HARM...

Page 724: ...58 Remote commands exclusive to TOI measurements CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion TOI STATe 724 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion TOI SEARchsignal ONCE 725 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion TOI RESult 725 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion TOI RESult MAXimum 725 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion TOI RESult MINimum 726 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion TOI STATe State This command initiates a measurement to determine the ...

Page 725: ...To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweep mode See also INITiate n CONTinuous on page 628 Suffix n Window m Marker Return values TOI Third order intercept point Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC MARK FUNC TOI ON Switches the intercep...

Page 726: ...I Usage Query only CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion TOI RESult MINimum This command queries the results for the minimum third order intercept point measure ment see Chapter 7 2 12 3 TOI Results on page 242 To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweep mode See al...

Page 727: ...here Configuring and Performing the Measurement 727 Example Measuring the AM Modulation Depth 728 11 6 13 1 Configuring and Performing the Measurement The following commands control the measurement Useful commands for AM modulation depth described elsewhere CALCulate n DELTamarker m X on page 843 CALCulate n DELTamarker m X RELative on page 857 CALCulate n MARKer m X on page 845 Remote commands ex...

Page 728: ...gnals on page 249 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion MDEPth RESult t This command queries the results of the AM modulation depth measurement To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweep mode See also INITiate n CONTinuous on page 628 Suffix n Window m Marker t Tra...

Page 729: ... Changing the position of the temp markers CALC MARK X 100MHZ Positions the reference marker on 100 MHz CALC DELT2 X 5KHZ Positions delta marker 2 and 3 at a distance of 5 kHz to the reference marker CALC DELT3 X 1KHZ Corrects the position of delta marker 3 by 1 kHz CALC MARK FUNC MDEP RES Queries the measurement results for the repositioned markers 11 6 14 Remote Commands for EMI Measurements The...

Page 730: ...EMI markers described elsewhere CALCulate n MARKer m STATe on page 844 CALCulate n DELTamarker m STATe on page 842 CALCulate n MARKer m STATe on page 844 CALCulate n DELTamarker m STATe on page 842 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MREFerence on page 842 CALCulate n MARKer ms LINK TO MARKer md on page 844 CALCulate n DELTamarker ms LINK TO MARKer md on page 841 CALCulate n DELTamarker m LINK on page 840 C...

Page 731: ... RESolution on page 769 Remote commands exclusive to configuring EMI final tests CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FMEasurement PEAKsearch AUTO 731 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FMEasurement PSEarch AUTO 731 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FMEasurement PSEarch AUTO 731 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FMEasurement PEAKsearch AUTO 731 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FMEasurement DWELl 732 CALCu...

Page 732: ...s required to define limit lines for EMI measurements are described in Chapter 11 8 9 Configuring Display Lines on page 898 11 6 14 5 Controlling LISN The commands required to control a LISN are described here This feature requires the optional additional interfaces R S FPL1 B5 INPut ip LISN FILTer HPASs STATe 732 INPut ip LISN PHASe 733 INPut ip LISN TYPE 733 INPut ip LISN FILTer HPASs STATe Stat...

Page 733: ...Available for networks with four phases R S ESH2Z5 R S ENV4200 and R S ENV432 N RST L1 Example Select phase L1 INP LISN PHAS L1 Manual operation See Phase on page 269 INPut ip LISN TYPE Type This command turns automatic control of a LISN on and off It also selects the type of network Suffix ip 1 2 irrelevant Parameters Type ENV216 R S ENV 216 two phases and highpass are controllable ENV432 R S ENV...

Page 734: ... CALCulate n MARKer m Y on page 858 CALCulate n DELTamarker m Y on page 858 Remote commands exclusive to retrieving EMI measurement results CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FMEasurement RESult 734 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FMEasurement RESult 734 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FMEasurement LIMit li LCONdition 735 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FMEasurement LIMit li LCONdition 735 CALCulat...

Page 735: ...the limit check Example CALC MARK1 FUNC FME LIM2 LCON Queries the condition of marker 1 in relation to limit line 2 Usage Query only CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FMEasurement LIMit li LDELta CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FMEasurement LIMit li LDELta Amplitude This command queries the vertical distance from the marker position to the limit line The unit is dB If the marker has been assigned t...

Page 736: ...z Configure two traces one with peak detector one with average detector DISP TRAC1 ON DISP TRAC2 ON DET1 POS DET2 AVER Configuring the measurement Select EMI measurement CALC MARK FUNC FME STAT ON Configure CISPR filter and RBW BAND TYPE CISP BAND RES 1MHz Define the dwell time CALC MARK FUNC FME DWEL 1ms Configure an auto peak search CALC MARK FUNC FME PEAK AUTO ON Configure a logarithmic frequen...

Page 737: ... LIN as limit line 1 CALC LIM1 NAME EN55011A LIN Configure trace 1 to be checked against limit line 1 CALC LIM1 TRAC1 CHEC ON Clear the results of all previous limit checks CALC LIM CLE Performing the Measurement Select single sweep mode INIT CONT OFF Initiate a new measurement and wait until the sweep has finished INIT WAI Retrieving Results Query the results for the EMI measurement First marker ...

Page 738: ...the trig ger level in the time domain in order for it to take effect for the List Evaluation com mands The list evaluation is incompatible to other measurement functions e g marker func tionality or statistics If you use a command that controls those functions the R S FPL1000 aborts the list evaluation The R S FPL1000 also aborts the list evaluation if you end the remote session The commands can b...

Page 739: ...ng point values separated by commas The unit depends on CALCulate n UNIT POWer Usage Query only SENSe LIST POWer SEQuence This command configures and initiates the List Evaluation measurement The list can contain up to 200 entries frequencies You can define a different instru ment setup for each frequency that is in the list If you synchronize the measurement with OPC the R S FPL1000 produces a se...

Page 740: ...ith SENSe LIST POWer SET The result is a list of floating point values separated by commas The unit depends on CALCulate n UNIT POWer SENSe LIST POWer SET State State State TriggerSource TriggerSlope TriggerOffset GateLength This command defines global List Evaluation parameters These parameters are valid for every frequency you want to measure The state of the first three parameters PeakPower RMS...

Page 741: ...ation The following example shows a list evaluation with the following configuration No Freq MHz Ref Level dBm RF Attenu ation dB El Attenu ation dB Filter RBW VBW Meas Time Trigger Level 1 935 2 0 10 Normal 1 MHz 3 MHz 440 µs 0 2 935 4 0 10 10 Channel 30 kHz 100 kHz 440 µs 0 3 935 6 0 10 20 Channel 30 kHz 100 kHz 440 µs 0 Measurement with synchronization via service request ESE 1 SRE 32 Configure...

Page 742: ... a gated measurement that determines the power over a particular number of pulses The measurement is controlled by an external trig ger or the video signal A separate trigger event is required for each burst included in the measurement In case of an external trigger source the trigger level corresponds to the TTL level In case of a video signal you can define any threshold The figure below shows t...

Page 743: ... power measurements CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion MSUMmary 743 SENSe MPOWer FTYPe 744 SENSe MPOWer RESult LIST 744 SENSe MPOWer SEQuence 744 SENSe MPOWer RESult MIN 746 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion MSUMmary TimeOffset MeasTime PulsePeriod OfPulses This command configures power measurements on pulses in the time domain To evaluate the pulse power the R S FPL1000 uses the data captured during a pre...

Page 744: ...command selects the filter type for pulse power measurements Parameters FilterType CFILter NORMal SENSe MPOWer RESult LIST This command queries the results of the pulse power measurement This command may be used to obtain measurement results in an asynchronous way using the service request mechanism for synchronization to the end of the measure ment If there are no results the command returns an e...

Page 745: ...he results see SENSe LIST POWer RESult Parameters Frequency Defines the pulse frequency Range 0 to Fmax Default unit Hz RBW Defines the resolution bandwidth Default unit HZ MeasTime Defines the measurement time Range 1 µs to 30 s Default unit S TriggerSource Selects a trigger source TriggerLevel Defines a trigger level The trigger level is available for the video trigger In that case the level is ...

Page 746: ...ice request MPOW FTYP NORM Selects a Gaussian filter for the measurement MPOW 935 2MHZ 1MHZ 434us VID 50 5us MEAN 20 OPC Configures and initiates a measurement on 20 pulses with synchronization to the end Analyzer produces a service request On service request MPOW RES Returns the results of the measurements 20 power levels MPOW RES MIN Returns the lowest of the 20 power level that have been measur...

Page 747: ... frequency FREQ SPAN 100MHz Sets the span to 50 MHz on either side of the center frequency Configuring the Bandwidth BAND AUTO OFF BAND 1MHz Defines the RBW as 1 MHz BAND VID 500kHz Decouples the VBW from the RBW and decreases it to smooth the trace Configuring the Sweep SENS SWE COUN 10 Defines 10 sweeps to be performed in each measurement SENS SWE POIN 500 During each sweep 500 trace points will...

Page 748: ...e in the diagram The reference level is displayed as a red line Triggering TRIG SOUR IFP TRIG LEV IFP 10dBm TRIG SLOP POS TRIG DTIM 50ms TRIG IFP HYST 5dB TRIG HOLD 10ms Defines triggering when the second intermediate frequency rises to a level of 10 dBm with a dropout time of 50 ms a hysteresis of 5 dB and a delay of 10 ms SWE EGAT ON SWE EGAT TYPE EDGE SWE EGAT LENG 5ms Defines gating Values are...

Page 749: ...oint for each trace 11 7 Remote Commands for Result Displays Working with Windows in the Display 749 Examples Configuring the Result Display 756 11 7 1 Working with Windows in the Display The following commands are required to change the evaluation type and rearrange the screen layout for a channel setup as you do using the SmartGrid in manual operation Since the available evaluation types depend ...

Page 750: ... the LAYout CATalog WINDow query Direction LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow Direction the new window is added relative to the existing win dow WindowType text value Type of result display evaluation method you want to add See the table below for available parameter values Return values NewWindowName When adding a new window the command returns its name by default the same as its number as a result Example L...

Page 751: ... the name of the window is its index WindowIndex numeric value Index of the window Example LAY CAT Result 2 2 1 1 Two windows are displayed named 2 at the top or left and 1 at the bottom or right Usage Query only LAYout IDENtify WINDow WindowName This command queries the index of a particular display window in the active channel setup Note to query the name of a particular window use the LAYout WI...

Page 752: ...w named 4 to the left of window 1 Example LAY MOVE 1 3 REPL Replaces the window named 3 by window 1 Window 3 is deleted Usage Setting only LAYout REMove WINDow WindowName This command removes a window from the display in the active channel Setting parameters WindowName String containing the name of the window In the default state the name of the window is its index Example LAY REM 2 Removes the re...

Page 753: ...is command changes the position of a splitter and thus controls the size of the win dows on each side of the splitter Note that windows must have a certain minimum size If the position you define con flicts with the minimum size of any of the affected windows the command will not work but does not return an error Figure 11 1 SmartGrid coordinates for remote control of the splitters Setting paramet...

Page 754: ...towards the top 70 of the screen The following commands have the exact same effect as any combination of windows above and below the splitter moves the splitter vertically LAY SPL 3 2 70 LAY SPL 4 1 70 LAY SPL 2 1 70 Usage Setting only LAYout WINDow n ADD Direction WindowType This command adds a measurement window to the display Note that with this com mand the suffix n determines the existing win...

Page 755: ... window is its index Example LAY WIND2 IDEN Queries the name of the result display in window 2 Response 2 Usage Query only LAYout WINDow n REMove This command removes the window specified by the suffix n from the display in the active channel setup The result of this command is identical to the LAYout REMove WINDow command Suffix n Window Example LAY WIND2 REM Removes the result display in window ...

Page 756: ...e demonstrates how to configure result displays in a remote envi ronment 11 7 2 1 Example 1 Adding and Arranging Windows Starting from the default initial display in the Spectrum application Frequency Sweep we will configure the following result displays 1 Frequency Sweep 3 Marker Table 2 Spectrogram 4 Marker Peak List Resetting the instrument RST Adding new windows Add a Spectrogram window beneat...

Page 757: ...k List window to enlarge the Spectrogram display to 60 of the entire width LAY SPL 2 4 60 Querying all displayed windows Query the name and number of all displayed windows from top left to bottom right LAY CAT Result 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 Maximizing a Window Maximize the window 2 Spectrogram DISP WIND2 SIZE LARG Restore multiple window display DISP WIND2 SIZE SMAL 11 7 2 2 Example 2 Replacing and Removi...

Page 758: ...ng the size of individual windows Move the splitter between the Frequency Sweep window and the Marker Table window to enlarge the spectrum display to 80 of the entire height LAY SPL 1 4 80 11 8 Setting Basic Spectrum RF Measurement Parameters Commands required for common spectrum RF measurements are described here Defining the Frequency and Span 759 Configuring Bandwidth and Sweep Settings 768 Con...

Page 759: ...59 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion CSTep 760 DISPlay WINDow n SUBWindow w TRACe t X SPACing 760 SENSe FREQuency CENTer 760 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP 761 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO 761 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK 761 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor 762 SENSe FREQuency OFFSet 762 SENSe FREQuency SPAN 762 SENSe FREQuency SPAN FULL 763 SENSe FREQuency STARt 763 SENSe FREQuency STOP ...

Page 760: ...ar Linear scaling RST LINear Example DISP TRAC X SPAC LOG Manual operation See Frequency Axis Scaling on page 268 SENSe FREQuency CENTer Frequency This command defines the center frequency Parameters Frequency The allowed range and fmax is specified in the data sheet UP Increases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP command DOWN Decreases the center freque...

Page 761: ...l operation See Center Frequency Stepsize on page 305 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO State This command couples or decouples the center frequency step size to the span In time domain zero span measurements the center frequency is coupled to the RBW Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example FREQ CENT STEP AUTO ON Activates the coupling of the step size to the span SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK...

Page 762: ...LINK FACT 20PCT Manual operation See Center Frequency Stepsize on page 305 SENSe FREQuency OFFSet Offset This command defines a frequency offset If this value is not 0 Hz the application assumes that the input signal was frequency shifted outside the application All results of type frequency will be corrected for this shift numerically by the application See also Frequency Offset on page 305 Param...

Page 763: ...ency This command defines a start frequency for measurements in the frequency domain Parameters Frequency 0 to fmax min span RST 0 Default unit HZ Example FREQ STAR 20MHz Manual operation See Frequency Sweep on page 97 See Start Stop on page 304 SENSe FREQuency STOP Frequency This command defines a stop frequency for measurements in the frequency domain Parameters Frequency min span to fmax RST fm...

Page 764: ...vel Example ADJ ALL Manual operation See Adjusting all Determinable Settings Automatically Auto All on page 344 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation Duration In order to determine the ideal reference level the R S FPL1000 performs a measure ment on the current input data This command defines the length of the measurement if SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE is set to MANual Parameters Duration Numer...

Page 765: ...mplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines a lower threshold the signal must fall below compared to the last measurement before the reference level is adapted auto matically Parameters Threshold Range 0 dB to 200 dB RST 1 dB Default unit dB Example SENS ADJ CONF HYST LOW 2 For an input s...

Page 766: ...tion off ON 1 Switches the function on SENSe ADJust FREQuency This command sets the center frequency to the frequency with the highest signal level in the current frequency range Example ADJ FREQ Manual operation See Adjusting the Center Frequency Automatically Auto Fre quency on page 344 SENSe ADJust LEVel This command initiates a single internal measurement that evaluates and sets the ideal refe...

Page 767: ...command turns signal tracking on and off Suffix n irrelevant m irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on Example Activate signal tracking to keep the center frequency on the signal pea After each sweep the maximum on trace 1 is searched within a range of 2 around the center frequency It must have a minimum power of 90dBm CALC MARK FUNC STR...

Page 768: ...ST 120 dBm Default unit DBM Manual operation See Signal Tracking on page 306 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion STRack TRACe TraceNumber This command selects the trace on which the largest signal is searched for Suffix n irrelevant m irrelevant Parameters TraceNumber 1 to 6 Range 1 to 6 RST 1 Manual operation See Signal Tracking on page 306 11 8 2 Configuring Bandwidth and Sweep Settings The commands r...

Page 769: ...width SENSe BANDwidth RESolution Bandwidth This command defines the resolution bandwidth and decouples the resolution band width from the span For statistics measurements this command defines the demodulation bandwidth Parameters Bandwidth refer to data sheet RST RBW AUTO is set to ON DBW 3MHz Default unit Hz Example BAND 1 MHz Sets the resolution bandwidth to 1 MHz Manual operation See Analysis B...

Page 770: ... FilterType This command selects the resolution filter type When you change the filter type the command selects the next larger filter bandwidth if the same bandwidth is unavailable for that filter The EMI specific filter types are available if the EMI R S FPL1 K54 measurement option is installed even if EMI measurement is not active For details see Resolution Bandwidth and Filter Types on page 25...

Page 771: ...h VIDeo AUTO State SENSe BANDwidth VIDeo AUTO State This command couples and decouples the video bandwidth to the resolution band width Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example BAND VID AUTO OFF Manual operation See VBW on page 324 See RBW VBW on page 325 See Default Coupling on page 326 SENSe BWIDth VIDeo RATio Ratio SENSe BANDwidth VIDeo RATio Ratio This command defines the coupling ratio of th...

Page 772: ... TYPE LIN Video filter ahead of the logarithmic amplifier 11 8 2 2 Configuring the Sweep Useful commands for configuring sweeps described elsewhere SENSe AVERage n COUNt on page 818 SENSe AVERage n STATe t on page 819 SENSe AVERage n TYPE on page 819 Remote commands exclusive to configuring sweeps SENSe SWEep COUNt 772 SENSe SWEep DURation 773 SENSe SWEep OPTimize 773 SENSe SWEep WINDow n POINts 7...

Page 773: ...required to capture the data and process it This time span may be considerably longer than the actual sweep time see SENSe SWEep TIME on page 775 Tip To determine the necessary timeout for data capturing in a remote control pro gram double the estimated time and add 1 second Return values Time Example SWE TIME 1s SWE DUR Reply 27 9734842578 Usage Query only Manual operation See Sweep Time on page ...

Page 774: ...ge and a fast sweep rate The autorange function for the internal IF gain calculation is activated to obtain the best control range for the A D converter Zero span mode For zero span measurements the optimization mode defines the selection of the A D converter prefilter Table 11 5 Optimization parameters in zero span mode Optimization mode Description DYNamic The narrowest filter possible depending...

Page 775: ... Time refer to data sheet RST depends on current settings determined automati cally Default unit S Manual operation See Sweep Time on page 138 See Sweep Time on page 324 See Sweep Time on page 336 SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO State This command couples and decouples the sweep time to the span and the resolution and video bandwidths Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example SWE TIME AUTO ON Activates auto...

Page 776: ...ation CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion REFerence 776 CALCulate n UNIT POWer 776 UNIT n POWer 776 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel 777 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet 777 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion REFerence This command matches the reference level to the power level of a marker If you use the command in combination with a delta marker that delta marker is turned into a normal...

Page 777: ...l is modified by the offset Suffix n irrelevant t irrelevant Parameters ReferenceLevel The unit is variable Range see datasheet RST 0 dBm Default unit DBM Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV 60dBm Manual operation See Reference Level on page 311 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet Offset This command defines a reference level offset for all traces in all windows Suffix n irrelevant t irrelevant Pa...

Page 778: ...5 dB with optional electr attenuator 1 dB RST 10 dB AUTO is set to ON Default unit DB Example INP ATT 30dB Defines a 30 dB attenuation and decouples the attenuation from the reference level Manual operation See Attenuation Mode Value on page 313 INPut ip EATT AUTO State INPut ip ATTenuation AUTO State This command couples or decouples the attenuation to the reference level Thus when the reference ...

Page 779: ...itches on 20 dB preamplification Manual operation See Preamplifier on page 313 11 8 3 4 Scaling the Y Axis DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe 779 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe AUTO ONCE 780 DISPlay WINDow n SUBWindow w TRACe t Y SCALe MODE 780 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RPOSition 780 DISPlay WINDow n SUBWindow w TRACe t Y SPACing 781 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe Range This command defin...

Page 780: ...uring remote control is off this command has no immediate effect Suffix n Window w subwindow t irrelevant Parameters Mode ABSolute absolute scaling of the y axis RELative relative scaling of the y axis RST ABSolute Example DISP TRAC Y MODE REL Manual operation See Scaling on page 315 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RPOSition Position This command defines the vertical position of the reference lev...

Page 781: ...cts the scaling of the y axis for all traces t is irrelevant Suffix n Window w subwindow t Trace Parameters ScalingType LOGarithmic Logarithmic scaling LINear Linear scaling in LDB Linear scaling in the specified unit PERCent Linear scaling in RST LOGarithmic Example DISP TRAC Y SPAC LIN Selects linear scaling in Manual operation See Scaling on page 315 11 8 4 Configuring Triggered and Gated Measu...

Page 782: ...nce LEVel IFPower 784 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IQPower 784 TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe 785 TRIGger SEQuence SOURce 785 TRIGger SEQuence TIME RINTerval 786 TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe DropoutTime Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before a trigger is detected again Parameters DropoutTime Dropout time of the trigger Range 0 s to 10 0 s RST 0 s Default unit S Manual operation See...

Page 783: ...n combination with the IF Power trigger the R S FPL1000 ignores the holding time for frequency sweep FFT sweep zero span and I Q data measurements Parameters Period Range 0 s to 10 s RST 0 s Default unit S Example TRIG SOUR EXT Sets an external trigger source TRIG IFP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns Manual operation See Trigger Holdoff on page 339 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis Hy...

Page 784: ...igger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed If defined a reference level offset is also considered Parameters TriggerLevel For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet RST 10 dBm Default unit DBM Example TRIG LEV IFP 30DBM Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 337 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IQPo...

Page 785: ... 336 Note on external triggers If a measurement is configured to wait for an external trigger signal in a remote control program remote control is blocked until the trigger is received and the program can continue Make sure this situation is avoided in your remote control programs For troubleshooting tips see Incompleted sequential commands blocked remote channels on page 1026 Parameters Source IM...

Page 786: ...G TIME RINT 50 The sweep starts every 50 s Manual operation See Repetition Interval on page 338 11 8 4 2 Configuring Gated Measurements SENSe SWEep EGATe 786 SENSe SWEep EGATe HOLDoff 787 SENSe SWEep EGATe LENGth 787 SENSe SWEep EGATe POLarity 787 SENSe SWEep EGATe SOURce 788 SENSe SWEep EGATe TYPE 788 SENSe SWEep EGATe State This command turns gated measurements on and off The measurement ends wh...

Page 787: ...r trigger the R S FPL1000 ignores the holding time for frequency sweep FFT sweep zero span and I Q mode measurements Parameters DelayTime Range 0 s to 30 s RST 0 s Default unit S Example SWE EGAT HOLD 100us Manual operation See Gate Delay on page 342 SENSe SWEep EGATe LENGth GateLength This command defines the gate length Parameters GateLength Range 125 ns to 30 s RST 400μs Default unit S Example ...

Page 788: ...e This command selects the way gated measurements are triggered Parameters Type LEVel The trigger event for the gate to open is a particular power level After the gate signal has been detected the gate remains open until the signal disappears Note If you perform gated measurements in combination with the IF Power trigger the R S FPL1000 ignores the holding time for frequency sweep FFT sweep zero s...

Page 789: ...bit 3 in the STAT QUES POW status register and the INPUT OVLD message in the status bar are cleared See STATus QUEStionable POWer EVENt on page 1012 and STA Tus QUEStionable POWer Register on page 571 The command works only if the overload condition has been eliminated first For details on the protection mechanism see RF Input Protection on page 276 Suffix ip 1 2 irrelevant Example INP ATT PROT RE...

Page 790: ... 75 Manual operation See Impedance on page 276 See Unit on page 312 INPut ip SELect Source This command selects the signal source for measurements i e it defines which con nector is used to input data to the R S FPL1000 If no additional input options are installed only RF input is supported Suffix ip 1 2 irrelevant Parameters Source RF Radio Frequency RF INPUT connector RST RF Manual operation See...

Page 791: ... 5 and 7 are active 11 8 5 2 Working with Power Sensors The following commands describe how to work with power sensors These commands require the use of a Rohde Schwarz power sensor For a list of supported sensors see the data sheet The Sensor connector is provided by the Additional Interfaces option R S FPL1 B5 Additionally the power sensor measurement requires the option R S FPL1 K9 Configuring ...

Page 792: ...berSensors Number of connected power sensors Example SYST COMM RDEV PMET COUN Usage Query only Manual operation See Select on page 279 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer p DEFine Placeholder Type Interface SerialNo This command assigns the power sensor with the specified serial number to the selected power sensor index configuration The query returns the power sensor type and serial number of the s...

Page 793: ... DCYCle STATe 795 SENSe PMETer p DCYCle VALue 795 SENSe PMETer p FREQuency 796 SENSe PMETer p FREQuency LINK 796 SENSe PMETer p MTIMe 796 SENSe PMETer p MTIMe AVERage COUNt 797 SENSe PMETer p MTIMe AVERage STATe 797 SENSe PMETer p ROFFset STATe 798 SENSe PMETer p SOFFset 798 SENSe PMETer p STATe 798 SENSe PMETer p UPDate STATe 799 UNIT n PMETer p POWer 799 UNIT n PMETer p POWer RATio 799 CALibrati...

Page 794: ...Nitude AUTO ONCE This command sets the current measurement result as the reference level for relative measurements Suffix n Window p Power sensor index Example CALC PMET2 REL AUTO ONCE Takes the current measurement value as reference value for rel ative measurements for power sensor 2 Usage Event Manual operation See Setting the Reference Level from the Measurement Meas Ref on page 280 CALCulate n...

Page 795: ...ETer p DCYCle STATe State This command turns the duty cycle correction on and off Suffix p Power sensor index Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on Example PMET2 DCYC STAT ON Manual operation See Duty Cycle on page 281 SENSe PMETer p DCYCle VALue Percentage This command defines the duty cycle for the correction of pulse signals The power sensor u...

Page 796: ...ower sensor to 1 GHz Manual operation See Frequency Manual on page 279 SENSe PMETer p FREQuency LINK Coupling This command selects the frequency coupling for power sensor measurements Suffix p Power sensor index Parameters Coupling CENTer Couples the frequency to the center frequency of the analyzer MARKer1 Couples the frequency to the position of marker 1 OFF Switches the frequency coupling off R...

Page 797: ...ls with a low power because it minimizes the effects of noise Suffix p Power sensor index Parameters NumberReadings An average count of 0 or 1 performs one power reading Range 0 to 256 Increment binary steps 1 2 4 8 Example PMET2 MTIM AVER ON Activates manual averaging PMET2 MTIM AVER COUN 8 Sets the number of readings to 8 Manual operation See Average Count Number of Readings on page 281 SENSe PM...

Page 798: ...Ter p SOFFset SensorOffset Takes the specified offset into account for the measured power Only available if SENSe PMETer p ROFFset STATe is disabled Suffix p Power sensor index Parameters SensorOffset Default unit DB Example PMET2 TRIG SOFF 0 001 Manual operation See Sensor Level Offset on page 281 SENSe PMETer p STATe State This command turns a power sensor on and off Suffix p Power sensor index ...

Page 799: ... continuously Manual operation See Continuous Value Update on page 279 UNIT n PMETer p POWer Unit This command selects the unit for absolute power sensor measurements Suffix n irrelevant p Power sensor index Parameters Unit DBM WATT W DB PCT RST DBM Example UNIT PMET POW DBM Manual operation See Unit Scale on page 280 UNIT n PMETer p POWer RATio Unit This command selects the unit for relative powe...

Page 800: ... for a Tracking Generator 807 Independant CW Source Commands The following commands are required to configure an internal generator as an inde pendant CW source OUTPut up STATe 800 SOURce si INTernal FREQuency 800 SOURce si POWer LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude 801 SOURce si POWer LEVel IMMediate OFFSet 801 OUTPut up STATe State Enables or disables the internal generator The generator signal is output a...

Page 801: ...is command defines a level offset for the external generator level Thus for exam ple attenuators or amplifiers at the output of the external generator can be taken into account for the setting Suffix si irrelevant Parameters Offset Range 200 dB to 200 dB RST 0dB Default unit DB Example Define a level offset on the external generator SOUR POW OFFS 10dB Manual operation See Level Offset on page 291 ...

Page 802: ...les the usage of the internal generator as a tracking generator The tracking generator is only available for frequency sweeps in the Spectrum application Suffix si 1 n Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the tracking generator off ON 1 Switches the tracking generator on RST 0 Example SOUR FREQ COUP STAT ON Manual operation See Usage on page 291 SOURce si INTernal FREQuency OFFSet FreqOffset...

Page 803: ...ransmission measurement is performed see SENSe CORRection METHod on page 804 To obtain a correct reference measurement a complete sweep with synchronization to the end of the sweep must have been carried out This is only possible in the single sweep mode This command is only available if the Tracking Generator is active see OUTPut up STATe on page 800 Setting parameters MeasType THRough OPEN THRou...

Page 804: ... configuration used for calibration This command is only available if the Tracking Generator is active see OUTPut up STATe on page 800 Example CORR REC Manual operation See Recall Cal Settings on page 295 SENSe CORRection TRANsducer GENerate Name This command uses the normalized measurement data to generate a transducer factor with up to 1001 points The trace data is converted to a transducer with...

Page 805: ...ep Commands The following commands are required to configure a power sweep using an internal tracking generator For an example of performing a power sweep remotely see Chapter 11 6 3 2 Pro gramming Example Measuring Compression Points on page 638 Useful commands for power sweeps described elsewhere OUTPut up STATe on page 800 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RPOSition on page 780 SOURce si INTerna...

Page 806: ...SOURce si POWer STOP on page 806 Suffix si irrelevant Parameters StartLevel Range 60 to 10 RST 30 Default unit DBM Example SOUR POW MODE SWE SOUR POW STAR 50 SOUR POW STOP 10 Manual operation See Level Start Level Stop on page 297 SOURce si POWer STOP StopLevel Defines the end power level of the internal generator signal for power sweeps This value must be higher than the start level see SOURce si...

Page 807: ...erforming the calibration measurement Perform a transmission measurement with direct connection between the generator and the analyzer and wait till the end SENS CORR METH TRAN SENS CORR COLL ACQ THR WAI Retrieving the calibration trace results Retrieve the measured frequencies 10 Hz 10 MHz TRAC DATA X TRACE1 Retrieve the measured power levels TRAC DATA TRACE1 Normalizing the calibration trace res...

Page 808: ...L1000 on and off Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on Example DIAG SERV NSO ON Manual operation See Noise Source Control on page 300 OUTPut up IF SOURce Source Defines the type of signal available at one of the output connectors of the R S FPL1000 Suffix up Parameters Source IF The measured IF value is available at the IF VIDEO output con nector...

Page 809: ...on See Data Output on page 300 OUTPut up UPORt STATe State This command toggles the control lines of the user ports for the AUX PORT connector This 9 pole SUB D male connector is located on the rear panel of the R S FPL1000 Suffix up irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 User port is switched to INPut ON 1 User port is switched to OUTPut Example OUTP UPOR STAT ON OUTPut up UPORt VALue Value...

Page 810: ...s the instrument is ready to receive a trigger HIGH A high signal 5 V indicates the instrument is ready to receive a trigger Example OUTP UPOR WTR POL HIGH The R S FPL1000 waits for a 5 V signal at the AUX PORT con nector before accepting a trigger signal SYSTem SPEaker STATe State This command switches the built in loudspeaker on or off for demodulated signals This setting applies only to the cur...

Page 811: ...ctrum mode and in Analog Modu lation Analysis mode Note that you must switch the loudspeaker on first using the SYSTem SPEaker STATe command Parameters Volume Percentage of the maximum possible volume Range 0 to 1 RST 0 5 Example SYST SPE VOL 0 Switches the loudspeaker to mute Manual operation See Data Output on page 300 See Audio Output Volume on page 378 11 8 6 Zooming into the Display 11 8 6 1 ...

Page 812: ...e diagram that define the zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT x2 Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define the zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT y2...

Page 813: ...Original Display on page 441 11 8 6 2 Using the Multiple Zoom DISPlay WINDow n SUBWindow w ZOOM MULTiple zn AREA 813 DISPlay WINDow n SUBWindow w ZOOM MULTiple zn STATe 814 DISPlay WINDow n SUBWindow w ZOOM MULTiple zn AREA x1 y1 x2 y2 This command defines the zoom area for a multiple zoom To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on 1 origin of coordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point ...

Page 814: ... is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT y2 Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define the zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT Manual operation See Multi Zoom on page 440 DISPlay WINDow ...

Page 815: ...lay WINDow n SUBWindow w TRACe t Y SPACing on page 781 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe on page 779 Remote commands exclusive to trace configuration DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t MODE 815 DISPlay WINDow n SUBWindow w TRACe t MODE HCONtinuous 816 DISPlay WINDow n SUBWindow w TRACe t STATe 817 DISPlay WINDow n SUBWindow w TRACe t SMOothing APERture 817 DISPlay WINDow n SUBWindow w TRACe t SMOothing STATe...

Page 816: ...he new value is lower than the previous one VIEW The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and dis played BLANk Hides the selected trace RST Trace 1 WRITe Trace 2 6 BLANk Example INIT CONT OFF Switching to single sweep mode SWE COUN 16 Sets the number of measurements to 16 DISP TRAC3 MODE WRIT Selects clear write mode for trace 3 INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of t...

Page 817: ...ntinues in the background Suffix n Window w subwindow Not supported by all applications t Trace Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on Example DISP TRAC3 ON Manual operation See Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 on page 393 See Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Softkeys on page 397 DISPlay WINDow n SUBWindow w TRACe t SMOothing APERtur...

Page 818: ...r more information see Trace Smoothing on page 392 Suffix n Window w subwindow t Trace Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on Example DISP3 TRAC2 SMO ON Turns on trace smoothing for trace 2 in window 3 Manual operation See Smoothing on page 395 SENSe AVERage n COUNt AverageCount This command defines the number of sweeps that the application uses t...

Page 819: ...ff Suffix n Window t Trace Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 SENSe AVERage n TYPE Mode This command selects the trace averaging mode Suffix n 1 n Window Parameters Mode VIDeo The logarithmic power values are averaged LINear The power values are averaged before they are converted to logarithmic values POWer The power level values are converted into unit Watt prior to averaging After the averaging the dat...

Page 820: ... are available even if EMI measurement is not active For details see Detectors and Dwell Time on page 253 Suffix n Window t Trace Parameters Detector APEak Autopeak NEGative Negative peak POSitive Positive peak QPEak Quasipeak CISPR filter only SAMPle First value detected per trace point RMS RMS value AVERage Average CAVerage CISPR Average CISPR filter only CRMS CISPR RMS CISPR filter only RST APE...

Page 821: ...vides a spectrogram display of the measured data A spectrogram shows how the spectral density of a signal varies over time The x axis shows the frequency the y axis shows the time The commands required to configure spectrograms in a remote environment are described here For details and manual operation see Chapter 7 10 2 2 Spectrogram Settings on page 407 When configuring spectrograms the window s...

Page 822: ...ram TSTamp DATA 826 CALCulate n SGRam TSTamp STATe 826 CALCulate n SPECtrogram TSTamp STATe 826 CALCulate n SGRam CLEar IMMediate CALCulate n SPECtrogram CLEar IMMediate This command resets the spectrogram and clears the history buffer Suffix n Window Example Reset the result display and clear the memory CALC SGR CLE Manual operation See Clear Spectrogram on page 329 CALCulate n SGRam CONTinuous S...

Page 823: ...f frames depends on the history depth Range 1 to history depth Increment 1 RST 1 Example Select single sweep mode INIT CONT OFF Set the number of frames to 200 CALC SGR FRAM COUN 200 Manual operation See Frame Count on page 329 CALCulate n SGRam FRAMe SELect Frame Time CALCulate n SPECtrogram FRAMe SELect Frame Time This command selects a specific frame for further analysis The command is availabl...

Page 824: ...20000 Increment 1 RST 3000 Example Set the history depth to 1500 CALC SGR SPEC 1500 Manual operation See History Depth on page 409 CALCulate n SGRam LAYout State CALCulate n SPECtrogram LAYout State This command selects the state and size of spectrograms The command is available for result displays that support spectrograms Suffix n Window Parameters State ON Spectrogram and trace diagram share a ...

Page 825: ...s a 3 dimensional spectrogram for the selected result display Suffix n Window Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on RST 0 Example CALC SPEC THR STAT ON Manual operation See 3D Spectrogram State on page 408 CALCulate n SGRam TRACe Trace CALCulate n SPECtrogram TRACe Trace This command determines the trace in the result display the Spectrogram is b...

Page 826: ...nt frame Return values Seconds Number of seconds that have passed since 01 01 1970 till the frame start Nanoseconds Number of nanoseconds that have passed in addition to the Seconds since 01 01 1970 till the frame start Reserved The third value is reserved for future uses Reserved The fourth value is reserved for future uses Example CALC SGR TST ON Activates the time stamp CALC SGR TST DATA ALL Re...

Page 827: ...lay WINDow n SPECtrogram COLor SHAPe 828 DISPlay WINDow n SGRam COLor UPPer 828 DISPlay WINDow n SPECtrogram COLor UPPer 828 DISPlay WINDow n SGRam COLor STYLe 828 DISPlay WINDow n SPECtrogram COLor STYLe 828 DISPlay WINDow n SGRam COLor DEFault DISPlay WINDow n SPECtrogram COLor DEFault This command restores the original color map Suffix n Window Manual operation See Set to Default on page 412 DI...

Page 828: ...INDow n SPECtrogram COLor UPPer Percentage This command defines the end point of the color map Suffix n Window Parameters Percentage Statistical frequency percentage Range 0 to 66 RST 0 Default unit Example DISP WIND SGR COL UPP 95 Sets the start of the color map to 95 Manual operation See Start Stop on page 411 DISPlay WINDow n SGRam COLor STYLe ColorScheme DISPlay WINDow n SPECtrogram COLor STYL...

Page 829: ...ATH t POSition 830 CALCulate n MATH t STATe 830 CALCulate n MATH t EXPRession DEFine Expression This command selects the mathematical expression for trace mathematics Before you can use the command you have to turn trace mathematics on Suffix n Window t irrelevant Parameters Expression TRACE1 TRACE2 Subtracts trace 2 from trace 1 TRACE1 TRACE3 Subtracts trace 3 from trace 1 TRACE1 TRACE4 Subtracts...

Page 830: ...operation See Trace Math Mode on page 417 CALCulate n MATH t POSition Position This command defines the position of the trace resulting from the mathematical opera tion Suffix n Window t irrelevant Parameters Position Vertical position of the trace in of the height of the diagram area 100 PCT corresponds to the upper diagram border Range 100 to 200 RST 50 Default unit PCT Example CALC MATH POS 100...

Page 831: ...other result data are described in Chap ter 11 9 5 Storing Measurement Results on page 941 FORMat DATA 831 TRACe n DATA 832 TRACe n DATA MEMory 833 TRACe n DATA X 834 FORMat DATA Format BitLength This command selects the data format that is used for transmission of trace data from the R S FPL1000 to the controlling computer Note that the command has no effect for data that you send to the R S FPL1...

Page 832: ...ameters Trace Selects the trace to write the data to TRACE1 TRACE2 TRACE3 TRACE4 TRACE5 TRACE6 Data Contains the data to transfer Query parameters ResultType Selects the type of result to be returned TRACE1 TRACE6 Returns the trace data for the corresponding trace For details see Table 11 6 LIST Returns the results of the peak list evaluation for Spurious Emis sion and Spectrum Emission Mask measu...

Page 833: ...akFreq frequency of the peak in a range PowerAbs absolute power of the peak in dBm PowerRel power of the peak in relation to the channel power in dBc PowerDelta distance from the peak to the limit line in dB positive values indicate a failed limit check LimitCheck state of the limit check 0 PASS 1 FAIL Unused1 Unused2 reserved 0 0 Table 11 8 Return values for SPECtrogram parameter For every frame ...

Page 834: ...indow Query parameters TraceNumber TRACE1 TRACE2 TRACE3 TRACE4 TRACE5 TRACE6 Trace number TRACE1 TRACE6 Return values X Values Example TRAC3 X TRACE1 Returns the x values for trace 1 in window 3 Usage Query only 11 8 7 5 Formats for Returned Values ASCII Format and Binary Format When trace data is retrieved using the TRAC DATA or TRAC IQ DATA command the data is returned in the format defined usin...

Page 835: ...ich the data file was created or will be evaluated a comma sep arated list CSV or a plain data format DAT file may be required Parameters FileFormat CSV DAT RST DAT Example FORM DEXP FORM CSV Manual operation See File Type on page 449 FORMat DEXPort TRACes Selection This command selects the data to be included in a data export file see MMEMory STORe n TRACe on page 836 For details on exporting dat...

Page 836: ...r Data from the import file for currently not active traces is not imported The trace parameter for the MMEMory LOAD n TRACe on page 836 command is ignored RST SINGle Manual operation See Import All Traces Import to Trace on page 449 See Import ASCII File to Trace on page 449 MMEMory LOAD n TRACe Trace FileName This command imports trace data from the specified window to an ASCII file Suffix n Win...

Page 837: ... page 858 Basic trace settings are demonstrated in the Chapter 11 6 17 Programming Example Performing a Basic Frequency Sweep on page 747 Preparing the Measurement RST Resets the instrument LAY ADD 1 BEL SGR Displays a new window below window 1 and activates spectrogram display The new window name is returned as a result 2 The spectrogram is updated with each new sweep INIT CONT OFF Selects single...

Page 838: ...LC MARK1 SGR Y MIN Sets marker 1 to the minimum level for the same frequency the marker is currently positioned at in all frames CALC MARK2 SGR XY MAX Sets marker 2 to the maximum level in the entire spectrogram CALC DELT1 SGR FRAM 3s Sets the deltamarker 1 to the frame captured 3 seconds after marker 1 By default it is set to the peak of that frame and displays the level difference to marker 1 No...

Page 839: ...ace data for the spectrogram For each frame the power level and frequency at each sweep point are returned TRAC DATA TRACE1 Retrieves the trace data for the selected frame only 11 8 8 Working with Markers The commands required to work with markers and marker functions in a remote envi ronment are described here The tasks for manual operation are described in Chap ter 7 9 Marker Usage on page 345 I...

Page 840: ...m X 843 CALCulate n MARKer m AOFF 843 CALCulate n MARKer ms LINK TO MARKer md 844 CALCulate n MARKer m STATe 844 CALCulate n MARKer m TRACe 844 CALCulate n MARKer m X 845 CALCulate n DELTamarker m AOFF This command turns off all delta markers Suffix n Window m irrelevant Example CALC DELT AOFF Turns off all delta markers CALCulate n DELTamarker m LINK State This command links delta marker m to mar...

Page 841: ...e ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on Example CALC DELT4 LINK TO MARK2 ON Links the delta marker 4 to the marker 2 Manual operation See Linking to Another Marker on page 263 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MODE Mode This command defines whether the position of a delta marker is provided as an abso lute value or relative to a reference marker Note that when the positi...

Page 842: ...n See Reference Marker on page 263 CALCulate n DELTamarker m STATe State This command turns delta markers on and off If necessary the command activates the delta marker first No suffix at DELTamarker turns on delta marker 1 Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on Example CALC DELT2 ON Turns on delta marker 2 Manual operatio...

Page 843: ... The position is relative to the reference marker To select an absolute position you have to change the delta marker mode with CALCulate n DELTamarker m MODE on page 841 A query returns the absolute position of the delta marker Range The value range and unit depend on the measure ment and scale of the x axis Default unit HZ Example CALC DELT X Outputs the absolute x value of delta marker 1 Manual ...

Page 844: ... Manual operation See Linking to Another Marker on page 263 CALCulate n MARKer m STATe State This command turns markers on and off If the corresponding marker number is cur rently active as a delta marker it is turned into a normal marker Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on Example CALC MARK3 ON Switches on marker 3 Man...

Page 845: ...arker Parameters Position Numeric value that defines the marker position on the x axis The unit depends on the result display Range The range depends on the current x axis range Default unit Hz Example CALC MARK2 X 1 7MHz Positions marker 2 to frequency 1 7 MHz Manual operation See Marker Table on page 117 See Marker Peak List on page 118 See Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 Marker 4 on page 244 See Mar...

Page 846: ...STATe State This command turns the marker information in all diagrams on and off Suffix n irrelevant Parameters State ON 1 Displays the marker information in the diagrams OFF 0 Hides the marker information in the diagrams RST 1 Example DISP MINF OFF Hides the marker information Manual operation See Marker Info on page 353 CALCulate n MARKer m X SSIZe StepSize This command selects the marker step s...

Page 847: ...r m X SLIMits LEFT 848 CALCulate n MARKer m X SLIMits RIGHt 849 CALCulate n MARKer m X SLIMits ZOOM STATe 850 CALCulate n THReshold 850 CALCulate n THReshold STATe 850 CALCulate n MARKer m LOEXclude State This command turns the suppression of the local oscillator during automatic marker positioning on and off for all markers in all windows Suffix n irrelevant m irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF 0...

Page 848: ...CALCulate n MARKer m X SLIMits STATe State This command turns marker search limits on and off for all markers in all windows If you perform a measurement in the time domain this command limits the range of the trace to be analyzed Suffix n irrelevant m irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on Example CALC MARK X SLIM ON Switches on search...

Page 849: ...e Left Limit Right Limit on page 229 CALCulate n MARKer m X SLIMits RIGHt SearchLimit This command defines the right limit of the marker search range for all markers in all windows If you perform a measurement in the time domain this command limits the range of the trace to be analyzed Suffix n irrelevant m irrelevant Parameters Limit The value range depends on the frequency range or sweep time Th...

Page 850: ...20 MHz Manual operation See Use Zoom Limits on page 357 CALCulate n THReshold Level This command defines a threshold level for the marker peak search for all markers in all windows Suffix n irrelevant Parameters Level Numeric value The value range and unit are variable RST 120 dBm Default unit DBM Example CALC THR 82DBM Sets the threshold value to 82 dBm Manual operation See Search Threshold on pa...

Page 851: ...Ker m MAXimum PEAK 852 CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum RIGHt 852 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum AUTO 853 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum LEFT 853 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum NEXT 853 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum PEAK 854 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum RIGHt 854 CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum AUTO State This command turns an automatic marker peak search for a trace maximum on and off The R S FPL1000 performs ...

Page 852: ...al marker position remains the same Suffix n Window m Marker Manual operation See Search Next Peak on page 361 CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the highest level In the spectrogram the command moves a marker horizontally to the maximum level in the currently selected frame The vertical marker position remains the same If the marker is not yet active the command firs...

Page 853: ...eration See Auto Max Peak Search Auto Min Peak Search on page 356 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum LEFT This command moves a marker to the next minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion In the spectrogram the command moves a marker horizontally to the minimum level in the currently selected frame The vertical marker position remains the same...

Page 854: ...to the right of the current marker posi tion In the spectrogram the command moves a marker horizontally to the minimum level in the currently selected frame The vertical marker position remains the same Suffix n Window m Marker Manual operation See Search Next Minimum on page 362 Positioning Delta Markers The following commands position delta markers on the trace CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum ...

Page 855: ...arker Manual operation See Search Next Peak on page 361 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the highest level In the spectrogram the command moves a marker horizontally to the maximum level in the currently selected frame The vertical marker position remains the same If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Suffix n Window m Mar...

Page 856: ...rogram the command moves a marker horizontally to the minimum level in the currently selected frame The vertical marker position remains the same Suffix n Window m Marker Manual operation See Search Next Minimum on page 362 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the minimum level In the spectrogram the command moves a marker horizontally to the minimum level in...

Page 857: ... on page 845 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks COUNt on page 871 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks X on page 873 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks Y on page 873 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion NOISe RESult on page 874 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion PNOise RESult on page 875 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion BPOWer RESult on page 880 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion BPOWer RESult on page 8...

Page 858: ...on page 248 CALCulate n DELTamarker m Y Queries the result at the position of the specified delta marker Suffix n 1 n m 1 n Return values Result Result at the position of the delta marker The unit is variable and depends on the one you have currently set Default unit DBM CALCulate n MARKer m Y Queries the result at the position of the specified marker Suffix n 1 n m 1 n Return values Result Defaul...

Page 859: ...GRam SARea 860 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram SARea 860 CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam XY MAXimum PEAK 860 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram XY MAXimum PEAK 860 CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam XY MINimum PEAK 861 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram XY MINimum PEAK 861 CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam Y MAXimum ABOVe 861 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum ABOVe 861 CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam Y MAXimum BELow...

Page 860: ...2s Sets second marker on the frame 2 seconds ago Manual operation See Frame Spectrogram only on page 350 CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam SARea SearchArea CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram SARea SearchArea This command defines the marker search area for all spectrogram markers in the channel setup Suffix n irrelevant m irrelevant Parameters SearchArea VISible Performs a search within the visible frames N...

Page 861: ...r Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak in Y Direction on page 358 CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam Y MAXimum BELow CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum BELow This command moves a marker vertically to the next lower peak level for the current frequency The search includes only frames below the current marker position It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Suffix n Window...

Page 862: ... SPECtrogram Y MINimum ABOVe This command moves a marker vertically to the next higher minimum level for the cur rent frequency The search includes only frames above the current marker position It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Suffix n Window m Marker Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak in Y Direction on page 358 CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam Y MINimum BELow CALCula...

Page 863: ...ommand first looks for the peak level for all frequencies and moves the marker vertically to the minimum level Suffix n Window m Marker Using Delta Markers The following commands control spectrogram delta markers Useful commands for spectrogram markers described elsewhere The following commands define the horizontal position of the delta markers CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum LEFT on page 854 C...

Page 864: ...um BELow 867 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MINimum BELow 867 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MINimum NEXT 867 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MINimum NEXT 867 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MINimum PEAK 867 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MINimum PEAK 867 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam FRAMe Frame CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram FRAMe Frame This command positi...

Page 865: ...te n DELTamarker m SGRam XY MAXimum PEAK CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram XY MAXimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the highest level of the spectrogram over all fre quencies Suffix n Window m Marker CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam XY MINimum PEAK CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram XY MINimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the minimum level of the spectrogram over all frequ...

Page 866: ...mum NEXT CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum NEXT This command moves a delta marker vertically to the next higher level for the current frequency The search includes all frames It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Suffix n Window m Marker Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak in Y Direction on page 358 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MAXimum PEAK CALCulat...

Page 867: ...rames below the current marker position It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Suffix n Window m Marker Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak in Y Direction on page 358 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MINimum NEXT CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MINimum NEXT This command moves a delta marker vertically to the next minimum level for the cur rent frequency The se...

Page 868: ...moves the fixed reference marker to the peak power Suffix n Window m Marker Example CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO MAX Sets the reference point level for delta markers to the peak of the selected trace Manual operation See Defining a Fixed Reference on page 354 See Defining Reference Point on page 370 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed RPOint X RefPoint This command defines the horizontal position o...

Page 869: ...elta markers to 10 dBm Manual operation See Defining a Fixed Reference on page 354 See Defining Reference Point on page 370 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed RPOint Y OFFSet Offset This command defines a level offset for the fixed delta marker reference point Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters Offset Numeric value RST 0 Default unit dB CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed STATe State T...

Page 870: ...n PEAK on page 942 Chapter 11 8 8 3 Configuring and Performing a Marker Search on page 847 Remote commands exclusive to peak lists CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks ANNotation LABel STATe 870 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks COUNt 871 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks IMMediate 871 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks LIST SIZE 872 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks SORT 872 CALCulate ...

Page 871: ... irrelevant Return values NumberOfPeaks Example CALC MARK FUNC FPE COUN Queries the number of peaks Usage Query only CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks IMMediate Peaks This command initiates a peak search Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters Peaks This parameter defines the number of peaks to find during the search Note that the actual number of peaks found during the search also depends on the p...

Page 872: ...on page 382 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks SORT SortMode This command selects the order in which the results of a peak search are returned Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters SortMode X Sorts the peaks according to increasing position on the x axis Y Sorts the peaks according to decreasing position on the y axis RST X Example CALC MARK FUNC FPE SORT Y Sets the sort mode to decreasing y value...

Page 873: ... Query only CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks Y This command queries the position of the peaks on the y axis The order depends on the sort order that has been set with CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks SORT Suffix n irrelevant m irrelevant Return values PeakPosition Position of the peaks on the y axis The unit depends on the measurement Usage Query only 11 8 8 9 Noise Measurement Marker The ...

Page 874: ...es NoiseLevel Current noise level The unit is the one currently active Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC MARK2 ON Switches on marker 2 CALC MARK2 FUNC NOIS ON Switches on noise measurement for marker 2 INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end CALC MARK2 FUNC NOIS RES Outputs the noise result of marker 2 Usage Query only Manual operation See Noise Measurement State on pa...

Page 875: ... 875 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion PNOise RESult 875 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion PNOise STATe 876 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion PNOise AOFF 877 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion PNOise RESult 877 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion PNOise STATe 877 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion PNOise AUTO State This command turns an automatic peak search for the fixed reference marker at the end of a sweep...

Page 876: ...oise measurement at the delta marker position on and off The reference marker for phase noise measurements is either a normal marker or a fixed reference If necessary the command turns on the reference marker The correction values for the bandwidth and the log amplifier are taken into account in the measurement Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON...

Page 877: ...sured carrier power and the noise power at the position of the specified normal marker Example CALC MARK2 FUNC PNO RES Outputs the result of phase noise measurement of the marker 2 Usage Query only CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion PNOise STATe State This command turns the phase noise measurement at the marker position on and off Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the ...

Page 878: ...r a band power marker are displayed Note relative power results are only availabe for delta markers see CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion BPOWer MODE on page 880 Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters Mode POWer Result is displayed as an absolute power The power unit depends on the CALCulate n UNIT POWer setting DENSity Result is displayed as a density in dBm Hz RST POWer Example CALC MARK4 FUNC BPO...

Page 879: ...n and R S FPL1000 model RST 5 of current span Default unit Hz Example CALC MARK FUNC BPOW SPAN 2MHz Measures the band power over 2 MHz around the marker Manual operation See Span on page 376 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion BPOWer STATe State This command turns markers for band power measurements on and off Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Swit...

Page 880: ...ilable for a delta band power marker The result is the difference between the absolute power in the band around the delta marker and the absolute power for the reference marker The powers are subtracted logarithmically so the result is a dB value Relative band power Delta2 in dB absolute band power Delta2 in dBm absolute band power of reference marker in dBm For details see Relative band power mar...

Page 881: ...off ON 1 Switches the function on Manual operation See Band Power Measurement State on page 375 See Switching All Band Power Measurements Off on page 376 11 8 8 12 n dB Down Marker The following commands control the n dB down markers CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion NDBDown 881 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion NDBDown FREQuency 882 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion NDBDown QFACtor 883 CALCulate n MARKer m F...

Page 882: ...mplete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweep mode See also INITiate n CONTinuous on page 628 Suffix n irrelevant m irrelevant Return values Frequency frequency 1 absolute frequency of the n dB marker to the left of the reference marker in Hz frequency 2 absolute frequency of the n dB marker to the right ...

Page 883: ...age 628 Suffix n irrelevant m irrelevant Return values Distance The result depends on the span In case of frequency domain measurements the command returns the bandwidth between the two n dB down markers in Hz In case of time domain measurements the command returns the pulse width between the two n dB down markers in seconds Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC MARK FUNC NDBD O...

Page 884: ... the result This is only possible for single sweep mode See also INITiate n CONTinuous on page 628 Suffix n irrelevant m irrelevant Return values TimeX1 absolute position in time of the n dB marker to the left of the ref erence marker in seconds TimeX2 absolute position in time of the n dB marker to the right of the reference marker in seconds Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CA...

Page 885: ...ng out the result This is only possible for single sweep mode See also INITiate n CONTinuous on page 628 Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC MARK ON Switches on marker 1 CALC MARK COUN ON Switches on the frequency counter for marker 1 INIT WAI Starts a sweep and w...

Page 886: ...e on page 364 CALCulate n MARKer m COUNt RESolution Resolution This command defines the resolution of the frequency counter Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters Resolution 0 001 0 01 0 1 1 10 100 1000 10000 Hz RST 0 1 Hz Default unit HZ Example CALC MARK COUN RES 1kHz Sets the resolution of the frequency counter to 1 kHz Manual operation See Resolution on page 364 11 8 8 14 Marker Demodulation The ...

Page 887: ...nd off In the time domain continuous demodulation is always on Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on Example CALC2 MARK3 FUNC DEM CONT ON Switches on the continuous demodulation Manual operation See Continuous Demodulation on page 378 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DEModulation HOLDoff Duration This command defines for how...

Page 888: ... and off when the measurement rea ches a marker position Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on Example CALC MARK3 FUNC DEM ON Switches on the demodulation for marker 3 Manual operation See Marker Demodulation State on page 377 SENSe DEMod SQUelch LEVel Threshold This command defines the threshold for selective demodulatio...

Page 889: ...arkers 889 Example Marker Search in Spectrograms 891 Basic Frequency Sweep Measurement for Marker Function Examples 892 Example Using a Fixed Reference Marker 892 Example Obtaining a Marker Peak List 892 Example Measuring Noise Density 893 Example Measuring Phase Noise 893 Example Measuring the Power in a Channel Using Band Power Markers 894 Example Measuring Characteristic Bandwidths Using the n ...

Page 890: ...150 MHz on trace 1 CALC MARK4 TRAC 4 Activates marker 4 and sets it to the peak of trace 4 CALC MARK1 MAX AUTO ON Moves M1 to the current peak of trace 1 after each sweep CALC MARK2 MAX NEXT Moves M2 to the next lower peak of trace 2 CALC DELT5 ON CALC DELT5 LINK ON Activates delta marker 5 and links it to marker 1 If M1 moves so does D5 CALC DELT5 MREF 4 Changes the reference for D5 to marker 4 D...

Page 891: ...r1 on the peak power in the most recent spectrum and query its position CALC2 SPEC FRAM SEL 0 CALC2 MARK1 ON CALC2 MARK1 X CALC2 MARK1 Y Set marker2 on the peak power in frame at 324ms and query its position CALC2 MARK2 ON CALC2 MARK2 SGR FRAM 324ms CALC2 MARK2 X CALC2 MARK2 Y Set marker3 on peak power level in the entire spectrogram in memory and query its position CALC2 MARK3 ON CALC2 MARK SPEC ...

Page 892: ...es that the basic frequency sweep described in Basic Frequency Sweep Measurement for Marker Function Exam ples on page 892 has been performed and thus does not begin by presetting the instrument Configuring the reference marker Activate a fixed reference marker It is set to the current maximum of trace 1 CALC DELT FUNC FIX ON Set the reference frequency to 128 MHz CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO X 128 MHZ ...

Page 893: ...E COUN CALC MARK FUNC FPE X CALC MARK FUNC FPE Y Exporting the peak list MMEM STOR PEAK PeakList Example Measuring Noise Density This example demonstrates how to measure noise density using noise markers in a basic spectrum measurement in a remote environment It assumes that the basic fre quency sweep described in Basic Frequency Sweep Measurement for Marker Func tion Examples on page 892 has been...

Page 894: ... noise results CALC DELT1 FUNC PNO RES CALC DELT2 FUNC PNO RES CALC DELT3 FUNC PNO RES CALC DELT4 FUNC PNO RES Queries the difference in level between the peak and the noise power density measured at the deltamarkers referred to the carrier power level dBc Example Measuring the Power in a Channel Using Band Power Markers This example demonstrates how to measure the power in a specific channel or b...

Page 895: ... to be a density power per Hz bandwidth Retrieving Results CALC MARK1 FUNC BPOW RES Returns the power sum for the specified bandwidth around marker 1 CALC DELT2 FUNC BPOW RES Returns the power sum for the specified bandwidth around deltamarker 2 CALC DELT3 FUNC BPOW RES Returns the power sum for the specified bandwidth around deltamarker 3 Example Measuring Characteristic Bandwidths Using the n dB...

Page 896: ... Sweep on page 747 has been performed and thus does not begin by presetting the instrument Audio output is provided for 5s each time the signal reaches its initial maximum how ever only if it is higher than 90 dBm 10 of the total y axis range in order to ignore noise Configuring the marker demodulation CALC MARK1 ON Activates marker1 and sets it to the maximum power level CALC MARK1 FUNC DEM SEL F...

Page 897: ...sing the Sig nal Count Marker This example demonstrates how to determine highly accurate frequency values using signal count markers in a basic spectrum measurement in a remote environment It assumes that the basic frequency sweep described in Chapter 11 6 17 Programming Example Performing a Basic Frequency Sweep on page 747 has been performed and thus does not begin by presetting the instrument C...

Page 898: ...e Suffix n Window dl 1 2 Parameters Position The value range is variable You can use any unit you want the R S FPL1000 then converts the unit to the currently selected unit If you omit a unit the R S FPL1000 uses the currently selected unit RST state is OFF Default unit DBM Example CALC DLIN2 20dBm Positions the second display line at 20 dBm Manual operation See Horizontal Line 1 Horizontal Line 2...

Page 899: ...ple CALC FLIN2 120MHz Sets frequency line 2 to a frequency of 120 MHz Manual operation See Vertical Line x on page 420 CALCulate n FLINe dl STATe State This command turns a frequency line on and off Suffix n Window dl 1 to 4 frequency line Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on Example CALC FLIN2 STAT ON Turns frequency line 2 on CALCulate n PLINe...

Page 900: ...ine Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on Example CALC PLIN2 STAT ON Turns power line 2 on CALCulate n TLINe dl Time This command defines the position of a time line Suffix n Window dl 1 to 4 time line Parameters Time Note that you can not set a time line to a position that is higher than the current sweep time Range 0 s to 1600 s RST STATe to OF...

Page 901: ...er limit lines Configuring Limit Lines 901 Managing Limit Lines 911 Checking the Results of a Limit Check 914 Programming Example Using Limit Lines 915 11 8 10 1 Configuring Limit Lines CALCulate n LIMit li COMMent 902 CALCulate n LIMit li CONTrol DATA 902 CALCulate n LIMit li CONTrol DOMain 902 CALCulate n LIMit li CONTrol MODE 903 CALCulate n LIMit li CONTrol OFFSet 903 CALCulate n LIMit li CONT...

Page 902: ... Manual operation See Comment on page 429 CALCulate n LIMit li CONTrol DATA LimitLinePoints This command defines the horizontal definition points of a limit line Suffix n irrelevant li Limit line Parameters LimitLinePoints Variable number of x axis values Note that the number of horizontal values has to be the same as the number of vertical values set with CALCulate n LIMit li LOWer DATA or CALCul...

Page 903: ... Limit line Parameters Mode ABSolute Limit line is defined by absolute physical values Hz or s RELative Limit line is defined by relative values related to the center fre quency frequency domain or the left diagram border time domain RST ABSolute CALCulate n LIMit li CONTrol OFFSet Offset This command defines an offset for a complete limit line Compared to shifting the limit line an offset does no...

Page 904: ...fault unit HZ Manual operation See Shift x on page 431 CALCulate n LIMit li CONTrol SPACing InterpolMode This command selects linear or logarithmic interpolation for the calculation of limit lines from one horizontal point to the next Suffix n Window li Limit line Parameters InterpolMode LINear LOGarithmic RST LIN Example CALC LIM CONT SPAC LIN Manual operation See X Axis on page 430 CALCulate n L...

Page 905: ...mmand defines an area around a lower limit line where limit check violations are still tolerated Suffix n irrelevant li Limit line Parameters Margin numeric value RST 0 Default unit dB Manual operation See Margin on page 430 CALCulate n LIMit li LOWer MODE Mode This command selects the vertical limit line scaling Suffix n Window li Limit line Parameters Mode ABSolute Limit line is defined by absol...

Page 906: ...nts by the value you define Suffix n Window li Limit line Parameters Distance Defines the distance that the limit line moves The unit depends on CALCulate n LIMit li UNIT on page 908 Default unit DB Manual operation See Shift y on page 431 CALCulate n LIMit li LOWer SPACing InterpolType This command selects linear or logarithmic interpolation for the calculation of a lower limit line from one hori...

Page 907: ...it lines The R S FPL1000 uses the threshold for the limit check if the limit line violates the threshold Suffix n irrelevant li Limit line Parameters Threshold Numeric value The unit depends on CALCulate n LIMit li UNIT on page 908 RST 200 dBm Default unit DBM Manual operation See Threshold on page 429 CALCulate n LIMit li NAME Name This command selects a limit line that already exists or defines ...

Page 908: ...e Suffix n irrelevant li Limit line Parameters LimitLinePoints Variable number of level values Note that the number of vertical values has to be the same as the number of horizontal values set with CALCulate n LIMit li CONTrol DATA If not the R S FPL1000 either adds missing values or ignores surplus values The unit depends on CALCulate n LIMit li UNIT on page 908 RST Limit line state is OFF Defaul...

Page 909: ...age 430 CALCulate n LIMit li UPPer OFFSet Offset This command defines an offset for a complete upper limit line Compared to shifting the limit line an offset does not actually change the limit line defi nition points Suffix n irrelevant li Limit line Parameters Offset Numeric value RST 0 Default unit dB Manual operation See Y Offset on page 428 CALCulate n LIMit li UPPer SHIFt Distance This comman...

Page 910: ...ual operation See Y Axis on page 430 CALCulate n LIMit li UPPer STATe State This command turns an upper limit line on and off Before you can use the command you have to select a limit line with CALCulate n LIMit li NAME on page 907 Suffix n irrelevant li Limit line Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on Manual operation See Visibility on page 427 ...

Page 911: ...Culate n LIMit li COPY 911 CALCulate n LIMit li DELete 912 CALCulate n LIMit li STATe 912 CALCulate n LIMit li TRACe t CHECk 913 MMEMory LOAD n LIMit 913 MMEMory STORe n LIMit 913 CALCulate n LIMit li ACTive This command queries the names of all active limit lines Suffix n irrelevant li irrelevant Return values LimitLines String containing the names of all active limit lines in alphabeti cal order...

Page 912: ... See Delete Line on page 428 CALCulate n LIMit li STATe State This command turns the limit check for a specific limit line on and off To query the limit check result use CALCulate n LIMit li FAIL Note that a new command exists to activate the limit check and define the trace to be checked in one step see CALCulate n LIMit li TRACe t CHECk on page 913 Suffix n irrelevant li Limit line Parameters St...

Page 913: ...oads the limit line from the selected file in CSV format Suffix n irrelevant Parameters FileName String containing the path and name of the CSV import file Example MMEM LOAD LIM C TEST CSV Manual operation See Import on page 431 MMEMory STORe n LIMit FileName LimitLineName This command exports limit line data to an ASCII CSV file For details on the file format see Chapter 7 11 2 4 Reference Limit ...

Page 914: ...ck in the specified window Note that for SEM measurements the limit line suffix li is irrelevant as only one spe cific SEM limit line is checked for the currently relevant power class To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweep mode See also INITiate n CONTi...

Page 915: ... UPP MODE ABS Selects an absolute vertical scale for limit line 1 CALC LIM1 UNIT DBM Selects the unit dBm for limit line 1 CALC LIM1 UPP 10 5 0 5 10 Defines 5 definition points for limit line 1 CALC LIM1 UPP MARG 5dB Defines an area of 5 dB around limit line 1 where limit check violations are still tolerated CALC LIM1 UPP SHIF 10DB Shifts the limit line 1 by 10 dB CALC LIM1 UPP OFFS 3dB Defines an...

Page 916: ...e Configuring Limit Lines on page 915 are assumed to exist and be active Preparing the instrument RST Resets the instrument INIT CONT OFF Selects single sweep mode Configuring the measurement FREQ CENT 100MHz Defines the center frequency FREQ SPAN 200MHz Sets the span to 100 MHz on either side of the center frequency SENS SWE COUN 10 Defines 10 sweeps to be performed in each measurement DISP TRAC1...

Page 917: ...e upper limit line check CALC LIM3 FAIL Queries the result of the lower limit line check 11 9 Managing Settings and Results The commands required to store and load instrument settings and import and export measurement results in a remote environment are described here Addressing drives The various drives can be addressed via the mass storage instrument specifier msis using the conventional Windows...

Page 918: ...xamples Managing Data 953 11 9 1 General Data Storage and Loading Commands The following commands are available for all applications See also FORMat DATA on page 831 FORMat DEXPort DSEParator 918 MMEMory CATalog 919 MMEMory CATalog LONG 919 MMEMory CDIRectory 920 MMEMory COMMent 920 MMEMory COPY 920 MMEMory DATA 920 MMEMory DELete IMMediate 921 MMEMory MDIRectory 921 MMEMory MOVE 921 MMEMory MSIS ...

Page 919: ...y on page 920 The path may be relative or absolute Using wildcards is possible to query a certain type of files only If you use a specific file as a parameter the command returns the name of the file if the file is found in the specified directory or an error if the file is not found 256 File name not found Example MMEM CAT C Data SPOOL PNG Returns all files in C Data whose names start with SPOOL ...

Page 920: ...ent Example MMEMory COMMent ACP measurement with Standard Tetra from 23 05 MMEMory MMEMory STORe1 STATe 1 ACP_T As a result in the selection list for recall settings the comment ACP measurement with Standard Tetra from 23 05 is added to the ACP entry Manual operation See Comment on page 463 MMEMory COPY FileName FileName This command copies one or more files to another directory Parameters FileNam...

Page 921: ...he length information 20 bytes 2 digits 20 indicates the number of subsequent binary data bytes Contents of the file store 20 binary bytes characters to the file MMEM DATA Testfile txt Returns the contents of the file MMEMory DELete IMMediate FileName This command deletes a file Parameters FileName String containing the path and file name of the file to delete The path may be relative or absolute ...

Page 922: ...text it is used in It creates a new and empty file It defines the file name for screenshots taken with HCOPy IMMediate 1 2 Note that you have to route the printer output to a file It defines the name and directory of a test report Parameters FileName String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM NAME C Data PRINT1 BMP Selects the file name Manual operation See Report Path on ...

Page 923: ...ser Name The password is optional State ON OFF 1 0 ON 1 Reconnects at logon with the same user name OFF 0 Does not reconnect at logon MMEMory NETWork UNUSeddrives This command returns a list of unused network drives MMEMory NETWork USEDdrives State This command returns a list of all network drives in use Parameters State You do not have to use the parameter If you do not include the parameter the ...

Page 924: ...EM SGRam 926 MMEMory SELect ITEM SPECtrogram 926 MMEMory SELect ITEM SGRam 926 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM TRACe ACTive 926 MMEMory SELect ITEM TRACe 1 3 ACTive 926 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM TRANsducer ALL 926 MMEMory SELect ITEM TRANsducer ALL 926 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM ALL MMEMory SELect ITEM ALL This command includes all items when storing or loading a configuration file The items are Ha...

Page 925: ...tings configuration for the hardcopy output Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example MMEM SEL HWS ON Manual operation See Items on page 463 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM LINes ALL State MMEMory SELect ITEM LINes ALL State This command includes or excludes all limit lines active and inactive when storing or loading a configuration file Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Example MMEM SEL LIN ALL ON Ma...

Page 926: ...list of data subsets Manual operation See Items on page 463 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM TRACe ACTive State MMEMory SELect ITEM TRACe 1 3 ACTive State This command includes or excludes trace data when storing or loading a configuration file Suffix 1 3 irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 i e no traces are stored Example MMEM SEL TRAC ON Manual operation See Items on page 463 MMEMory SELect ...

Page 927: ...ample MMEM CLE ALL MMEMory CLEar STATe 1 FileName This command deletes an instrument configuration file Parameters 1 FileName String containing the path and name of the file to delete The string may or may not contain the file s extension Example MMEM CLE STAT 1 TEST MMEMory LOAD AUTO 1 FileName This command restores an instrument configuration and defines that configuration as the default state T...

Page 928: ...ands remote operation the settings are identical in both cases By default the selection is limited to the user settings User Settings selection in the dialogs HWSettings in SCPI The selection is not reset by Preset or RST As a consequence the results of a SCPI script using the MMEMory LOAD STATe com mand without a previous MMEMory SELect ITEM command may vary depending on previous actions in the G...

Page 929: ...ined Reloads user settings and all limit lines Restart the instrument Switch the ON OFF key off and on MMEM LOAD STAT 1 C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Analyzer user TEST01 Selected items are set to default Reloads only the user set tings Manual operation See Recall on page 460 See Recall in New Channel Recall in Current Channel on page 463 MMEMory LOAD TYPE Type This command defines whethe...

Page 930: ...nt Parameters 1 FileName String containing the path and name of the target file The file extension is dfl Example MMEM STOR STAT 1 Save Saves the current instrument settings in the file Save dfl Manual operation See Save File on page 463 See Save on page 530 MMEMory STORe 1 2 STATe NEXT This command saves the current instrument configuration in a dfl file The file name depends on the one you have ...

Page 931: ...MMEM STOR TYPE CHAN Specifies that channel setup data is to be stored SYSTem PRESet This command presets the R S FPL1000 It is identical to RST Example SYST PRES Usage Event SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXEC This command restores the default instrument settings in the current channel setup Use INST SEL to select the channel setup For details see Chapter 8 1 Restoring the Default Instrument Configuration ...

Page 932: ...HCOPy PAGE MARGin 1 2 LEFT 937 HCOPy PAGE MARGin 1 2 RIGHt 937 HCOPy PAGE MARGin 1 2 TOP 937 HCOPy PAGE MARGin 1 2 UNIT 937 HCOPy PAGE ORIentation 1 2 938 HCOPy PAGE WINDow 1 2 CHANnel STATe 938 HCOPy PAGE WINDow 1 2 COUNt 939 HCOPy PAGE WINDow 1 2 SCALe 939 HCOPy PAGE WINDow 1 2 STATe 940 HCOPy TDSTamp STATe 1 2 940 SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter ENUMerate FIRSt 940 SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter ENUMera...

Page 933: ...ile or the clipboard it is automatically changed to be a PDF file HCOPy Selects all measurement results displayed on the screen for the current channel setup or MultiView diagrams traces mark ers marker lists limit lines etc including the channel setup bar and status bar for printout on a single page Displayed items belonging to the software user interface e g softkeys are not included The size an...

Page 934: ... is always printed in white and the grid in black HCOP CMAP DEF2 Screen Colors Screenshot Selects the current screen colors without any changes for a screenshot HCOP CMAP DEF4 HCOPy DESTination 1 2 arg0 This command selects the destination of a print job Suffix 1 2 Irrelevant Parameters arg0 MMEM Sends the hardcopy to a file You can select the file name with MMEMory NAME You can select the file fo...

Page 935: ...ile The printer driver configured under Windows is used to generate a printer specific file format BMP JPG PNG Data format for output to files only Example HCOP DEV LANG1 PNG Manual operation See Destination on page 477 See File type on page 488 See File type on page 497 HCOPy IMMediate 1 2 This command initiates a print job If you are printing to a file the file name depends on MMEMory NAME Suffi...

Page 936: ...or printouts consisting of multi ple pages HCOPy CONTent on page 933 Parameters arg0 1 0 ON OFF 1 ON The page number is printed 0 OFF The page number is not printed RST 1 Example HCOP PAGE COUN STAT ON Manual operation See Print Page Count on page 473 HCOPy PAGE MARGin 1 2 BOTTom arg0 This command defines the margin at the bottom of the printout page on which no ele ments are printed The margins a...

Page 937: ...ich no elements are printed The margins are defined according to HCOPy PAGE MARGin 1 2 UNIT on page 937 Suffix 1 2 1 2 Irrelevant Parameters arg0 RST 4 23 mm Example HCOP PAGE MARG2 RIGH 2 Manual operation See Margins on page 480 HCOPy PAGE MARGin 1 2 TOP arg0 This command defines the margin at the top of the printout page on which no elements are printed The margins are defined according to HCOPy...

Page 938: ...NDscape PORTrait RST PORTrait Example HCOP DEV LANG1 PDF HCOP PAGE ORI2 LAND Manual operation See Orientation on page 479 HCOPy PAGE WINDow 1 2 CHANnel STATe arg0 arg1 This command selects all windows of the specified channel setup to be included in the printout for HCOPy CONTent on page 933 Suffix 1 2 irrelevant Parameters arg0 String containing the name of the channel setup For a list of availab...

Page 939: ...eration See Windows Per Page on page 479 HCOPy PAGE WINDow 1 2 SCALe arg0 This command determines the scaling of the windows in the printout for HCOPy CONTent on page 933 Suffix 1 2 irrelevant Parameters arg0 1 0 ON OFF 1 ON Each window is scaled to fit the page size optimally not regard ing the aspect ratio of the original display If more than one win dow is printed on one page see HCOPy PAGE WIN...

Page 940: ...active windows in the active channel setup use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query arg2 1 0 ON OFF 1 ON The window is included in the printout 0 OFF The window is not included in the printout RST 1 Example HCOP PAGE WIND2 STAT IQ Analyzer 1 1 Manual operation See Print Multiple Windows on page 473 HCOPy TDSTamp STATe 1 2 arg0 This command includes or excludes the time and date in the printout Suffix 1...

Page 941: ...000 Use HCOPy DESTination 1 2 to select another output destination Suffix 1 2 1 2 Irrelevant Parameters arg0 String containing the printer name Use SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter ENUMerate FIRSt on page 940and SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter ENUMerate NEXT on page 941 to query all available printers RST NONE Manual operation See Printer Name on page 478 11 9 5 Storing Measurement Results The following comm...

Page 942: ...rget file Example MMEM STOR LIST test Stores the current list evaluation results in the test dat file Manual operation See Saving the Result Summary Evaluation List to a File on page 187 See Save Evaluation List on page 209 MMEMory STORe n PEAK FileName This command exports the marker peak list to a file Suffix n Window Parameters FileName String containing the path name and extension of the targe...

Page 943: ...SPUR test Saves the current marker peak list in the file test dat 11 9 6 Test Reports Commands to create test reports described elsewhere HCOPy DEVice LANGuage 1 2 on page 935 HCOPy IMMediate 1 2 on page 935 MMEMory NAME on page 922 HCOPy MODE 944 HCOPy TREPort APPend 944 HCOPy TREPort DESCription 944 HCOPy TREPort ITEM DEFault 945 HCOPy TREPort ITEM HEADer LINE line CONTrol 945 HCOPy TREPort ITEM...

Page 944: ...ning the measurement report Manual operation See Save on page 498 HCOPy TREPort APPend This command adds the current measurement results to the test report The saved data depends on the items you have selected with HCOPy TREPort ITEM SELect on page 948 Example Perform a measurement then HCOP TREP NEW Creates a new test report with the results of the first measure ment Perform another measurement t...

Page 945: ... Selects the header line Parameters Repetition GLOBal The selected header line is displayed at the top of every page of the report NEVer The selected header line is displayed on no page of the report Note that a line that does not contain anything is still displayed in the report as a blank line If you select NEVer the line is not dis played at all SECTion The selected header line is displayed aft...

Page 946: ...ion See Value on page 493 HCOPy TREPort ITEM HEADer LINE line TITLe Title This command defines a custom name for one of the items part of the report header You can define up to 6 items in the header Use HCOPy TREPort ITEM HEADer LINE line TEXT to add a value to each item Use HCOPy TREPort ITEM HEADer LINE line CONTrol to select the condition under which each item is shown Suffix line 1 6 Selects t...

Page 947: ...guration for When you omit the parameter the command returns the configu ration of the currently selected channel Example HCOP TREP ITEM LIST SAN Queries the items that are included in the test reports of the Spectrum application Usage Query only Table 11 9 Available ChannelTypes ChannelType SAN Spectrum HCOPy TREPort ITEM LOGO FileName This command selects a graphic for example a company logo tha...

Page 948: ... Item Item Item This command defines the type of information that a test report is made up out of Parameters ChannelType Optional parameter to define the channel type that the selection applies to When you omit the ChannelType parameter the selection applies to the currently active channel Item String containing the information you want to include in the test report Note that the items separated b...

Page 949: ...cer Characteristics of the transducer LISN Information about LISNs HCOPy TREPort ITEM TEMPlate CATalog This command queries the test report templates available in the default report directory and its subdirectories Return values Templates String containing the name of the templates as a comma sepa rated list Example HCOP TREP ITEM TEMP CAT would return e g TemplateX TemplateY TemplateZ Usage Query...

Page 950: ...ITEM TEMP SAVE myTemplate xml Saves a test report template Usage Event Manual operation See Save on page 496 HCOPy TREPort NEW This command creates a new dataset for a new test report Creating a new test report deletes all previously saved datasets The current measure ment results are added as the first dataset to the new report The R S FPL1000 saves the data selected with HCOPy TREPort ITEM SELec...

Page 951: ...HCOPy TREPort PCOLors STATe State This command turns the use of printer friendly colors on and off Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example HCOP TREP PCOL ON Creates the test report with printer friendly colors Manual operation See Use Screen Colors on page 488 HCOPy TREPort TDSTamp STATe State This command includes or excludes date and time from the test report Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Examp...

Page 952: ...sets the command returns an error Example HCOP TREP TEST REM 2 Deletes the second dataset from the current test report Manual operation See Selecting items to include in the report on page 498 HCOPy TREPort TEST REMove ALL This command removes all existing datasets from the test report Example HCOP TREP TEST REM ALL Deletes all datasets that are currently in the test report Usage Event Manual oper...

Page 953: ...W MAP Q Server ACLRTest Maps drive Q to the directory Server ACLRTest Saving data on the instrument MMEM MDIR C R_S INSTR USER Results Creates a directory called Results on drive C MMEM NAME C R_S INSTR USER Results Test001 txt Defines a file called Test001 txt MMEM COMM ACLR test results Creates a comment for the settings to be displayed in gui MMEM DATA Test001 txt 212FileContents Creates the fi...

Page 954: ...TR USER Results 11 9 7 3 Storing Instrument Settings In this example we will store the instrument settings for the Spectrum channel setup INST SEL SPECTRUM Selects measurement channel SPECTRUM MEMM STOR TYPE CHAN Specifies that channel specific data is to be stored MMEM STOR STAT 1 C R_S Instr user Spectrum Stores the channel settings from the Spectrum channel to the file Spectrum dfl 11 9 7 4 Loa...

Page 955: ...71 Using Service Functions 975 11 10 1 Configuring the Reference Frequency SENSe ROSCillator SOURce 955 SENSe ROSCillator SOURce Source This command selects the reference oscillator If you want to select the external reference it must be connected to the R S FPL1000 Parameters Source INTernal The internal reference is used 10 MHz EXTernal The external reference from the REF INPUT 10 MHZ connec tor...

Page 956: ... correction data has been completed Parameters CalState ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Calibration was successful ON 1 Calibration was not successful Example CLS Resets the status management SRE 16 Enables MAV bit in the Service Request Enable register CAL Starts the correction data recording and then a service request is generated Manual operation See Start Self Alignment on page 536 CALibration RESult This co...

Page 957: ...GHz This command only takes effect if a microwave calibration signal is selected for input DIAGnostic SERVice INPut SELect on page 957 Parameters Frequency RST 7 GHz Default unit Hz Example DIAG SERV INP PULS MCFR 7 1 GHz DIAGnostic SERVice INPut RF SPECtrum Bandwidth This command selects the bandwidth of the calibration signal Parameters Bandwidth NARRowband BROadband NARRowband Narrowband signal...

Page 958: ... used as a ref erence for a continuous temperature check during operation If the current temperature deviates from the stored self alignment temperature by a certain degree a warning is displayed in the status bar indicating the resulting deviation in the measured power lev els A status bit in the STATUs QUEStionable TEMPerature register indicates a possible deviation Suffix si irrelevant Return v...

Page 959: ...e CORRection TRANsducer CATalog This command queries all transducer factors stored on the R S FPL1000 After general data for the transducer storage directory data for the individual files is lis ted The result is a comma separated list of values with the following syntax UsedMem FreeMem FileSize FileName FileSize FileName Return values UsedDiskSpace numeric value in bytes Amount of storage space r...

Page 960: ... is Hz which may or may not be omit ted Frequencies have to be sorted in ascending order Default unit Hz Level The unit for Level depends on SENSe CORRection TRANsducer UNIT Example SENSe1 CORRection TRANsducer UNIT DB Frequency Span 0 Hz to 4 Ghz SENSe1 CORRection TRANsducer DATA 0 8 2GHz 5 4GHz 3 Creates the transducer points Manual operation See Data Points on page 529 Frequency Level 0 Hz 8 dB...

Page 961: ...age 527 See Create New Line on page 527 See Name on page 529 SENSe CORRection TRANsducer STATe State This command turns the selected transducer factor on or off Before you can use the command you have to select a transducer Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Manual operation See Activating Deactivating on page 527 SENSe CORRection TRANsducer UNIT Unit This command selects the unit of the transducer...

Page 962: ...e n TFACtor FileName TransdName This command exports transducer factor data to an ASCII CSV file For details on the file format see Chapter 9 7 3 Reference Transducer Factor File Format on page 531 Suffix n irrelevant Parameters FileName Name of the transducer factor to be exported TransdName Name of the transducer factor to be exported Example MMEM STOR TFAC C TEST Transducer1 Stores the transduc...

Page 963: ...AR STATe 964 DISPlay TOUChscreen STATe 964 DISPlay WINDow n TIME 965 DISPlay WINDow n TIME FORMat 965 SYSTem DISPlay FPANel STATe 965 DISPlay ANNotation CBAR State This command hides or displays the channel bar information Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example DISP ANN CBAR OFF Manual operation See Channel Bar on page 505 DISPlay BLIGhting Brightness Changes the brightness of the display in ei...

Page 964: ...s STATe State This command turns the softkey bar on and off Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example DISP SKEY OFF Manual operation See Softkey Bar on page 505 DISPlay TBAR STATe State This command turns the toolbar on or off Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Example DISP TBAR ON Manual operation See Toolbar on page 504 DISPlay TOUChscreen STATe State This command controls the touch screen functi...

Page 965: ...0 RST 0 Example DISP TIME ON Manual operation See Date and Time on page 505 DISPlay WINDow n TIME FORMat Format This command selects the time and date format Suffix n irrelevant Parameters Format US DE DE dd mm yyyy hh mm ss 24 hour format US mm dd yyyy hh mm ss 12 hour format RST DE Example DISP TIME ON Switches the screen display of date and time on DISP TIME FORM US Switches the date and time f...

Page 966: ...nd themes DISPlay CMAP it DEFault ci 966 DISPlay THEMe CATalog 966 DISPlay THEMe SELect 967 DISPlay CMAP it DEFault ci This command resets the color scheme for the display The query returns the default color scheme Suffix it Irrelevant ci 1 Current colors with a white background and a black grid 2 Optimized colors 4 Current screen colors setting for hardcopies Suffix irrelevant for query Return va...

Page 967: ...Tem DISPlay LANGuage 967 SYSTem DISPlay LANGuage Language Defines the language of the software defined interface elements such as softkeys dialog boxes diagram texts etc Parameters Language EN ZH_CH ZH_TW JA KO RU ZH_CH Simplified Chinese ZH_TW Traditional Chinese RST EN Example SYST DISP LANG JA Switches the language of the instrument to Japanese 11 10 6 Configuring the Network and Remote Control...

Page 968: ...ence on this parameter factory default 20 Example SYST COMM GPIB ADDR 18 Manual operation See GPIB Address on page 582 SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF RTERminator Terminator This command selects the GPIB receive terminator Output of binary data from the instrument to the control computer does not require such a terminator change Parameters Terminator LFEOI EOI LFEOI According to the standard the term...

Page 969: ... off during remote control operation Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Example SYST DISP UPD ON Manual operation See Remote Display Update on page 583 SYSTem ERRor DISPlay State This command the error display during remote operation on and off If activated the R S FPL1000 displays a message box at the bottom of the screen that contains the most recent type of error and the command that caused the ...

Page 970: ...rol Manual operation See Local on page 590 SYSTem LANGuage Language This function is used to emulate previous R S signal and spectrum analyzers Parameters Language FSV SCPI RST SCPI Example SYST LANG FSV The commands and settings for the R S FSV instrument are used SYSTem LXI INFO This command queries the LXI settings Return values LXIInfo current version LXI class Computername MAC adress IP adres...

Page 971: ...urn values Password The query returns the current password Manual operation See LXI Password on page 587 SYSTem REVision FACTory Resets the response to the REV query to the factory default value Usage Event Manual operation See Resetting the Factory Revision on page 586 11 10 7 Checking the System Configuration The following commands are required to check the system configuration on the R S FPL100...

Page 972: ...g containing the BIOS version Example DIAG SERV BIOS Returns the BIOS version Usage Query only DIAGnostic SERVice HWINfo This command queries hardware information Return values Hardware String containing the following information for every hardware component component name of the hardware component serial serial number of the component order order number of the component model model of the compone...

Page 973: ...nded MessageType ChannelName This command queries all system messages or all messages of a defined type dis played in the status bar for a specific channel setup application Note This command queries the strings displayed for manual operation For remote programs do not define processing steps depending on these results Instead query the results of the STATus QUEStionable EXTended INFO status regis...

Page 974: ...tomatically cleared when the R S FPL1000 is shut down Return values SystemMessages String containing all messages in the System Messages table RemoteErrors Error_no Description Command Date Time Comma separated list of errors from the Remote Errors table where Error_no device specific error code Description brief description of the error Command remote command causing the error Date Time date and ...

Page 975: ...Format is also compatible to the R S FSL and R S FSV family RST not reset 11 10 8 Using Service Functions DIAGnostic SERVice SFUNction 975 DIAGnostic SERVice SFUNction LASTresult 976 DIAGnostic SERVice SFUNction RESults DELete 976 DIAGnostic SERVice SFUNction RESults SAVE 976 DIAGnostic SERVice SINFo 976 SYSTem PASSword CENable 977 SYSTem PASSword RESet 977 DIAGnostic SERVice SFUNction ServiceFunc...

Page 976: ...RVice SINFo This command creates a zip file with important support information The zip file con tains the system configuration information device footprint the current eeprom data and a screenshot of the screen display if available As a result of this command the created file name including the drive and path is returned If you contact the Rohde Schwarz support to get help for a certain problem se...

Page 977: ...HP and PSA instruments For details see Chapter 10 2 GPIB Languages on page 577 Setting up Instrument Emulation 977 Reference GPIB Commands of Emulated HP Models 980 Reference Command Set of Emulated CXA EXA Models 1007 11 11 1 Setting up Instrument Emulation The following commands are required to set up the use of commands to emulate other instruments Useful commands for emulating other instrument...

Page 978: ...vailable if a HP language is selected using SYSTem LANGuage on page 978 Parameters Mode NORMal PULSe NORMal Optimized for high dynamic range overload limit is close to ref erence level PULSe Optimized for pulsed signals overload limit up to 10 dB above reference level RST NORM Example SYST IFG MODE PULS Manual operation See IF Gain on page 585 SYSTem LANGuage Language This command selects the syst...

Page 979: ...se 920528 Set the response to NewRevision SYST REV STR NewRevision Query the response SYST REV STR Response NewRevision Manual operation See Revision String on page 586 SYSTem RSWeep State Controls a repeated sweep of the E1 and MKPK HI HP model commands for details on the commands refer to Chapter 11 11 2 Reference GPIB Commands of Emulated HP Models on page 980 If the repeated sweep is OFF the m...

Page 980: ...of Models 8560E 8561E 8562E 8563E 8564E 8565E 8566A B 8568A B 8591E 8594E 71100C 71200C and 71209A 980 Special Features of the Syntax Parsing Algorithms for 8566A and 8568A Models 1003 Special Behavior of Commands 1004 Model Dependent Default Settings 1005 Data Output Formats 1006 Trace Data Output Formats 1006 Trace Data Input Formats 1007 GPIB Status Reporting 1007 11 11 2 1 Command Set of Model...

Page 981: ...HP 8594E available ADJIF 2 ADJIF Auto adjust IF HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available AMB AMB ON OFF AMB 1 0 AMB Trace A B Trace A HP 856xE HP 8594E available AMBPL AMBPL ON OFF AMBPL 1 0 AMBPL HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available ANNOT ANNOT ON OFF ANNOT 1 0 ANNOT Annotation HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available APB APB Trace A B Trace A HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594...

Page 982: ...HP 8566A HP 8568A available B2 B2 Max Hold B HP 8566A HP 8568A available B3 B3 View B HP 8566A HP 8568A available B4 B4 Blank B HP 8566A HP 8568A available BL BL Trace B Display Line Trace B HP 8566A HP 8568A available BML BML Trace B Display Line Trace B HP 856xE HP8594E available BTC BTC Transfer Trace B C HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available BXC BXC Exchange Trace B and C HP 856xE HP 8...

Page 983: ...E available CHANPWR CHANPWR TRA TRB numeric_value Channel Power Mea surement HP 856xE HP 8594E available CHPWRBW CHPWRBW numeric_value HZ KHZ MHZ GHZ Channel Power Band width HP 856xE HP 8594E available CLRW CLRW TRA TRB TRC Clear Write Trace HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available CLS 1 CLS Clear all status bits HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available CONTS CONTS HP 856xE HP 8566B HP ...

Page 984: ...r HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available DEMODAGC 2 DEMODAGC ON OFF 1 0 DEMODAGC Demodulation AGC HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available DEMODT DEMODT numeric_value S MS US SC DEMODT UP DN DEMODT Demodulation time HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available DET DET POS SMP NEG DET Detector HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available DISPOSE 2 ONEOS TRMATH ONSWP ALL numeric_value ...

Page 985: ...566A HP 8568A available E4 E4 Marker to Ref Level available available EDITDONE limit line edit done HP 856xE available EDITLIML edit limit line HP 856xE available ERR ERR 250 cal level error ERR 300 LO unlock ERR 472 cal error digital filter ERR 473 cal error ana log filter ERR 552 cal error log amp ERR 902 unscale track ing generator ERR 906 oven cold ERR 117 numeric unit error ERR 112 Unrecogniz...

Page 986: ...y off 8560E 8561E 8562E 8563E 8564E 8565E available FOFFSET 1 FOFFSET numeric_value HZ KHZ MHZ GHZ FOFFSET Frequency Offset HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available FREF FREF INT EXT Reference Frequency HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available FS FS Full Span HP 8566A HP 8568A available FUNCDEF Define Function Function must be in one line between delimiters HP 8594E HP 856xE HP 8566B ava...

Page 987: ... HP 8568B HP 8594E available GRAT 2 GRAT ON OFF Graticule HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available I1 I1 HP 8566A HP 8568A available I2 I2 HP 8566A HP 8568A available ID ID ID Identify HP 8566A HP 8568A HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available INZ 1 INZ 75 INZ 50 INZ Input Impedance HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available IP IP Instrument preset HP 8566A HP 8568A available KEYDEF K...

Page 988: ...lable KSB KSB Amplitude Units in dBmV HP 8566A HP 8568A available KSC KSC Amplitude Units in dBuV HP 8566A HP 8568A available KSD KSD Amplitude Units in V HP 8566A HP 8568A available KSE KSE numeric_value char data Title mode HP 8566A HP 8568A available KSG KSG KSG ON KSG numeric_value Video Averaging on HP 8566A HP 8568A available KSH KSH Video Averaging Off HP 8566A HP 8568A available KSK Marker...

Page 989: ... KSZ numeric_value DB KSZ Reference Value Offset HP 8566A HP 8568A available KSa KSa Normal Detection HP 8566A HP 8568A available KSb KSb Pos Peak Detection HP 8566A HP 8568A available KSd KSd Neg Peak Detection HP 8566A HP 8568A available KSe KSe Sample Detection HP 8566A HP 8568A available KSg CRT beam off available KSh CRT beam on available KSj KSj View Trace C HP 8566A HP 8568A available KSk K...

Page 990: ...available LIMF limit line frequency HP 856xE available LIMIFAIL limit fail query HP 856xE available LIMIPURGE purge limit line HP 856xE available LIMIRCL recall limit line HP 856xE available LIMIREL relative limit line HP 856xE available LIMISAV save limit line HP 856xE available LIMITEST limit line test HP 856xE available LIML lower limit line value HP 856xE available LIMM middle limit line value...

Page 991: ...N M3 UP M3 Delta Marker HP 8566A HP 8568A available M4 M4 numeric_value HZ KHZ MHZ GHZ Marker Zoom HP 8566A HP 8568A available MA MA Marker Amplitude HP 8566A HP 8568A available MC0 MC0 Marker Count off HP 8566A HP 8568A available MC1 MC1 Marker Count on HP 8566A HP 8568A available MDS MDS Measurement data size HP 8566B available MEAS Measurement status HP 856xE available MF MF MF Marker Frequency...

Page 992: ... 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available MKD MKD MKD numeric_value HZ KHZ MHZ GHZ MKD DN MKD UP MKD ON MKD OFF MKD Delta Marker HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available MKDR MKDR numeric_value HZ KHZ MHZ GHZ S SC MS MSEC USMKDR Delta Marker reverse HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available MKDR Delta Marker reverse query available MKF MKF numeric_value HZ KHZ MHZ GHZ MKF Set Marker Frequency HP...

Page 993: ...MKN OFF MKN Normal Marker HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available MKNOISE MKNOISE ON OFF MKNOISE 1 0 MKNOISE Noise Measurement HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available MKOFF MKOFF MKOFF ALL Marker off HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available MKP MKP numeric_value MKP Marker position HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available MKPK MKPK MKPK HI MKPK NH MKPK NR MKPK NL Marker Searc...

Page 994: ...xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available MKT MKT numeric_value S MS US SC MKT MKF fstart MKT SWT Span HP 856xE HP 8594E available MKTRACE MKTRACE TRA TRB TRC Marker to Trace HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available MKTRACK MKTRACK ON OFF MKTRACK 1 0 MKTRACK Signal Track HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available MKTYPE MKTYPE AMP MK TYPE Marker type HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E avail...

Page 995: ..._value NRL Normalize position HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available O1 O1 Format ASCII Values 0 to 4095 HP 8566A HP 8568A available O2 O2 Format Binary Values 0 to 4095 HP 8566A HP 8568A available O3 O3 Format ASCII HP 8566A HP 8568A available OA OA Output All HP 8566A HP 8568A available OL OL 80 characters OL Output Learn String HP 8566A HP 8568A available OT OT Output Trace Annota tions ...

Page 996: ...er integration fre quency in Hz HP 856xE available PH_EXIT Quits phase noise HP 856xE available PH_F_UDT Updates internal fre quency variables HP 856xE available PH_LMT_L Apply limits to PH_FMIN and PH_FMAX HP 856xE available PH_MEAS Generates log frequency plot HP 856xE available PH_MKF_D Updates the spot fre quency HP 856xE available PH_RMS Requests the rms phase noise HP 856xE available PH_RMSF...

Page 997: ...Pen Up HP 8566A HP 8568A available PWRBW PWRBW Power Bandwidth HP 8566B HP 859x HP 856xE available R1 R1 Set Status Bit Enable HP 8566A HP 8568A available R2 R2 Set Status Bit Enable HP 8566A HP 8568A available R3 R3 Set Status Bit Enable HP 8566A HP 8568A available R4 R4 Set Status Bit Enable HP 8566A HP 8568A available RB RB numeric_value HZ KHZ MHZ GHZ RB DN RB UP RB AUTO RB Resolution Bandwidt...

Page 998: ...L UP RL Reference Level HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available RLCAL RLCAL numeric_value RL Reference Level Calibra tion HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available RCLOSCAL RCLOSCAL Recall Open Short Aver age HP 856xE HP 8594E not available RCLTHRU RCLTHRU Recall Thru HP 856xE HP 8594E not available RLPOS 1 RLPOS numeric_value RLPOS DN RLPOS UP RLPOS Reference Level Position HP 856xE HP ...

Page 999: ... available SDON limit line segment done HP 856xE available SEDI edit limit line segment HP 856xE available SMOOTH SMOOTH TRA TRB TRC number of points Smooth Trace HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available SNGLS SNGLS Single Sweep HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available SQUELCH 2 SQUELCH numeric_value DM DB SQUELCH UP DN SQUELCH ON OFF Squelch HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available...

Page 1000: ...SS numeric_value HZ KHZ MHZ GHZ SS DN SS UP SS AUTO SS CF Step Size HP 8566A HP 8568A HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available ST ST numeric_value US MS SC ST DN ST UP ST AUTO ST Sweep Time HP 8566A HP 8568A HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available STB STB Status byte query HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available STOREOPEN STOREOPEN Store Open HP 856xE HP 8594E not available STORES...

Page 1001: ...ailable T0 T0 Threshold off HP 8566A HP 8568A available T1 T1 Free Run Trigger HP 8566A HP 8568A available T2 2 T2 Line Trigger HP 8566A HP 8568A available T3 T3 External Trigger HP 8566A HP 8568A available T4 T4 Video Trigger HP 8566A HP 8568A available TA TA Transfer A HP 8566A HP 8568A available TACL TACL Returns instantaneous measurement results See TRACe trace IMMediate LEVel for full descrip...

Page 1002: ... ON OFF Threshold Line enable HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available TIMEDSP 1 TIMEDSP ON OFF TIMEDSP 1 0 TIMEDSP Time Display HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available TM TM FREE VID EXT LINE2 TM Trigger Mode HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available TM LINE 2 TM LINE Trigger Line HP 8566B available TRA TRA B TRA A TRA I Transfer A HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available TRB ...

Page 1003: ...B HP 8568B HP 8594E available VBR 1 VBR numeric_value VBR DN VBR UP VBR Video Bandwidth Ratio HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available VIEW VIEW TRA TRB TRC HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available VTL VTL numeric_value DB DM VTL DN VTL UP VTL Video Trigger Level HP 856xE HP 8594E not available 1 HP 8594E only 2 Command is accepted without error message but is ignored 11 11 2 2 Special F...

Page 1004: ... identified and evaluated during syntax analysis 11 11 2 3 Special Behavior of Commands Command Known Differences ABORT Does not automatically set the command complete bit bit 4 in the status byte An addi tional DONE is required for that purpose ANNOT Only frequency axis annotation is affected AT AT DN UP Step size CAL The CAL commands do not automatically set the command complete bit bit 4 in the...

Page 1005: ...ings The contents of the 80 characters read does not correspond to the original data contents of the 8566A 8568A family RB Default value range step size RL Default value step size RLPOS Adapts the position of the reference level even if the tracking generator normalization is not active RQS Supported bits 1 Units key pressed 2 End of Sweep 3 Device error 4 Command complete 5 Illegal command 11 11 ...

Page 1006: ...ccurately defined with respect to the number of digits The memory areas for reading instrument data have therefore been adapted accordingly in the remote control pro grams for instruments of this series Therefore in response to a query the R S FPL1000 returns data of the same struc ture as that used by the original instruments this applies in particular to the number of characters returned Two for...

Page 1007: ...not used value 0 1 Units key pressed 2 End of Sweep 3 Device Error 4 Command Complete 5 Illegal Command 6 Service Request 7 not used value 0 Bits 0 and 7 are not used and always have the value 0 Please note that the R S FPL1000 reports any key pressed on the front panel rather than only the unit keys if bit 1 was enabled Another difference is the behavior of bit 6 when using the STB query On the H...

Page 1008: ...T CENTer CALCulate MARKer 1 2 12 SET RLEVel CALCulate MARKer 1 2 12 SET STARt CALCulate MARKer 1 2 12 SET STOP CALCulate MARKer 1 2 12 STATe OFF ON 0 1 CALCulate MARKer 1 2 12 X freq time CALCulate MARKer 1 2 12 X POSition real CALCulate MARKer 1 2 4 X SPAN CALCulate MARKer 1 2 4 X STARt CALCulate MARKer 1 2 4 X STOP CALCulate MARKer 1 2 12 Y real CALibration ALL CALibration AUTO ON PARTial OFF AL...

Page 1009: ...olution AUTO OFF ON 0 1 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo freq SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo AUTO OFF ON 0 1 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio real SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio AUTO OFF ON 0 1 SENSe DETector AUTO ON OFF 1 0 SENSe FREQuency CENTer freq SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO OFF ON 0 1 SENSe FREQuency OFFSet freq SENSe FREQuency SPAN freq SENSe FREQuency SPAN FULL SENSe FREQuency STARt f...

Page 1010: ...or more information on the contents of the status registers see STATus OPERation Register on page 565 STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit Register on page 567 STATus QUEStionable EXTended Register on page 568 STATus QUEStionable FREQuency Register on page 569 STATus QUEStionable LIMit Register on page 570 STATus QUEStionable LMARgin Register on page 570 STATus QUEStionable POWer Register on page 571 STAT...

Page 1011: ... Query only 11 12 2 Reading Out the CONDition Part For more information on the condition part see Chapter 10 1 7 2 Structure of a SCPI Status Register on page 561 STATus OPERation CONDition STATus QUEStionable CONDition STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit CONDition ChannelName STATus QUEStionable EXTended CONDition ChannelName STATus QUEStionable EXTended INFO CONDition ChannelName STATus QUEStionable FR...

Page 1012: ...the EVENt section Suffix n Window Query parameters ChannelName String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Usage Query only 11 12 4 Controlling the ENABle Part For more information on the enable part see Chapter 10 1 7 2 Structure of a SCPI Status Register on page 561 STATus OPERation ENABle SumBit STATus QUE...

Page 1013: ...ion SumBit ChannelName STATus QUEStionable EXTended INFO NTRansition SumBit ChannelName STATus QUEStionable FREQuency NTRansition SumBit ChannelName STATus QUEStionable LIMit n NTRansition SumBit ChannelName STATus QUEStionable LMARgin n NTRansition SumBit ChannelName STATus QUEStionable POWer NTRansition SumBit ChannelName STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature NTRansition SumBit ChannelName STATus QUES...

Page 1014: ...o the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Suffix n Window Parameters SumBit Range 0 to 65535 ChannelName String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel 11 12 7 Service Request The service request routine requires an extended initialization of the instrument in which the relevant bits of the transi...

Page 1015: ...tead of using resource string For example on TCP use TCPIP0 192 168 1 2 inst0 INSTR mbSession CType ResourceManager GetLocalManager Open Analyzer _ MessageBasedSession mbSession TerminationCharacterEnabled True Try mbSession Write CLS Reset status reporting system mbSession Write SRE 168 Enable service request for STAT OPER STAT QUES and ESR register mbSession Write ESE 60 Set event enable bit for...

Page 1016: ...aiting for the Arrival of a Service Request There are basically two methods of waiting for the arrival of a service request Blocking user inputs not possible This method is appropriate if the waiting time until the event to be signaled by an SRQ is short shorter than the selected timeout if no response to user inputs is required during the waiting time and if as the main criterion the event is abs...

Page 1017: ... not certain to occur This method is therefore the preferable choice for waiting for the end of measurements i e the output of results especially in the case of triggered measurements The method necessitates a waiting loop that checks the status of the SRQ line at regu lar intervals and returns control to the operating system during the time the expected event has not yet occurred In this way the ...

Page 1018: ...instrument setting to be completed The following programming example describes the Hold function which returns control to the operating system for the period of the waiting time selectable in millisec onds Rem Rem The waiting function below expects the transfer of the desired Rem waiting time in milliseconds The keyboard and the mouse remain Rem operative during the waiting period thus allowing de...

Page 1019: ...ng Service Request Routine mySTB ToString If mySTB 0 Then This instrument has bits set in the STB If mySTB And 16 0 Then Call Outputqueue If mySTB And 4 0 Then Call ErrorQueueHandler If mySTB And 8 0 Then Call Questionablestatus If mySTB And 128 0 Then Call Operationstatus If mySTB And 32 0 Then Call Esrread End If Catch exp As Exception Console WriteLine exp Message End Try End Sub End of SRQ rou...

Page 1020: ...ine for reading the error queue Sub ErrorQueueHandler Dim result As String Dim hasErr As Boolean True Do mbSession Write SYST ERR result mbSession ReadString Dim parts As String result Split If parts 0 0 Then hasErr False Console WriteLine result Else Console WriteLine result End If Loop While hasErr End Sub 11 12 7 7 Evaluation of SCPI Status Registers REM Subroutine for evaluating Questionable S...

Page 1021: ...perationstatus Dim myOSR As String Nothing Try myOSR mbSession Query STATus OPERation EVENt Read OSR Console WriteLine Operation Status myOSR Catch exp As Exception Console WriteLine exp Message End Try End Sub 11 12 7 8 Evaluation of Event Status Register REM Subroutine for evaluating the Event Status Register Public SUB Esrread Esr SPACE 20 Preallocate blanks to text variable CALL InstrWrite ana...

Page 1022: ...Console WriteLine Command Error Program aborted Output error message Stop Stop software End If If myESR And 64 0 Then Console WriteLine User request If myESR And 128 0 Then Console WriteLine Power on Catch exp As Exception Console WriteLine exp Message End Try End Sub 11 13 Deprecated Commands The following commands are provided for compatibility to other signal analyzers only For new remote contr...

Page 1023: ...isplay on page 749 Suffix n Window Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on DISPlay WINDow n TYPE WindowType This command selects the results displayed in a measurement window Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the LAYout commands for new remote control programs see Chapter 11 7 1 Working with Win dows in the Dis...

Page 1024: ...ed or com pleted correctly Orange Warning An irregular situation occurred during measurement e g the settings no lon ger match the displayed results or the connection to an external device was interrupted temporarily Gray Information Information on the status of individual processing steps No color No errors No message displayed normal operation Green Measurement successful Some applications visua...

Page 1025: ...ample after a firmware update Record the correction data by performing a self alignment For details refer to Chapter 5 1 13 Performing a Self Alignment on page 29 WRONG_FW The firmware version is out of date and does not support the currently installed hard ware Until the firmware version is updated this error message is displayed and self alignment fails For details refer to Chapter 9 4 4 Firmwar...

Page 1026: ...s message is displayed when the selected printer is not included in the list of available output devices A possible cause is that the required printer driver is missing or incorrectly installed 2034 CPU Temperature is too high This message is displayed when the temperature of the processor exceeds 70 C 12 3 Troubleshooting Remote Operation If problems arise during measurement in remote operation t...

Page 1027: ... does not provide the expected results and you are using a GPIB connection you can log the commands and any errors that may occur To activate the SCPI error log function in the Network Remote dialog box in the GPIB tab select I O Logging All remote control commands received by the R S FPL1000 are recorded in log files with the following syntax C ProgramData Rohde Schwarz ZNL FPL ScpiLogging ScpiLo...

Page 1028: ...R S FPL1000 s LXI browser interface several users can access and oper ate the same instrument simultaneously This is useful for troubleshooting or training purposes Type the instrument s host name or IP address in the address field of the browser on your PC for example http 10 113 10 203 The instrument home page welcome page opens Note This function can be deactivated for the instrument After a fi...

Page 1029: ...the updated limit values can be created 12 5 System Recovery For instruments running Windows 10 the system drive is delivered with a recovery partition that allows you to restore the original operating system image and firmware To restore the original operating system image and firmware 1 Open the Windows control panel 2 Select Update Security Recovery Restart Now The R S Recovery Environment star...

Page 1030: ... information on page 1030 Error Log The RSError log file in the C ProgramData Rohde Schwarz ZNL FPL log directory contains a chro nological record of errors Support file a zip file with important support information can be created auto matically in the C ProgramData Rohde Schwarz ZNL FPL user directory The zip file contains the system configuration information Device Footprint the current eeprom d...

Page 1031: ... needs to be transported or shipped observe the notes described in Chapter 13 Transporting on page 1033 12 7 Contacting Customer Support Technical support where and when you need it For quick expert help with any Rohde Schwarz product contact our customer sup port center A team of highly qualified engineers provides support and works with you to find a solution to your query on any aspect of the o...

Page 1032: ...Troubleshooting R S FPL1000 1032 User Manual 1178 3370 02 09 Figure 12 2 QR code to the Rohde Schwarz support page Contacting Customer Support ...

Page 1033: ...ro tection and packing material designed for the product If you do not have the original packaging use similar materials that provide the same level of protection Securing When moving the product in a vehicle or using transporting equipment make sure that the product is properly secured Only use items intended for securing objects Transport altitude Unless otherwise specified in the data sheet the...

Page 1034: ...he AC power supply connector Only use fuses of the type 5A T IEC60127 2 V order no 0099 6735 00 Such fuses are used for all of the specified nominal AC supply vol tages If the R S FPL1000 does not start it is possible that a blown fuse is the cause The fuse is located in the socket of the power supply 1 WARNING The fuse is part of the main power supply Handling the fuse while the power is on can l...

Page 1035: ...ach other or come into contact with metallic objects in the storage container 14 4 Storage Protect the product against dust Ensure that the environmental conditions e g tem perature range and climatic load meet the values specified in the data sheet 14 5 Disposal Rohde Schwarz is committed to making careful ecologically sound use of natural resources and minimizing the environmental footprint of o...

Page 1036: ...tery cannot be disposed of in the normal household waste after it has come to the end of its service life It is labeled as follows Figure 14 2 Labeling in line with Battery Directive 2006 66 EC Dispose of batteries as specified by the local waste disposal agency Alternatively you can contact the Rohde Schwarz local service representative For information on returning batteries to Rohde Schwarz subs...

Page 1037: ... RESolution RATio 770 SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE 770 SENSe BWIDth VIDeo 771 SENSe BWIDth VIDeo AUTO 771 SENSe BWIDth VIDeo RATio 771 SENSe BWIDth VIDeo TYPE 772 SENSe BWIDth RESolution 769 SENSe BWIDth RESolution AUTO 769 SENSe BWIDth RESolution RATio 770 SENSe BWIDth RESolution TYPE 770 SENSe CORRection COLLect ACQuire 803 SENSe CORRection METHod 804 SENSe CORRection RECall 804 SENSe CORRect...

Page 1038: ...RANGe ri LIMit li RELative STARt FUNCtion 670 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri LIMit li RELative STOP 671 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri LIMit li RELative STOP ABS 672 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri LIMit li RELative STOP FUNCtion 672 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri LIMit li STATe 673 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri MLCalc 674 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri POINts MINimum VALue 674 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri RLEVel 67...

Page 1039: ...ENSe LIST RANGe ri FREQuency STOP 692 SENSe LIST XADJust 699 SENSe MPOWer FTYPe 744 SENSe MPOWer RESult MIN 746 SENSe MPOWer RESult LIST 744 SENSe MPOWer SEQuence 744 SENSe PMETer p DCYCle VALue 795 SENSe PMETer p DCYCle STATe 795 SENSe PMETer p FREQuency 796 SENSe PMETer p FREQuency LINK 796 SENSe PMETer p MTIMe 796 SENSe PMETer p MTIMe AVERage COUNt 797 SENSe PMETer p MTIMe AVERage STATe 797 SEN...

Page 1040: ... CHANnel ch 643 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ACHannel 642 SENSe POWer ACHannel TXCHannel COUNt 643 SENSe POWer BANDwidth 658 SENSe POWer BWIDth 658 SENSe POWer TRACe 633 SENSe ROSCillator SOURce 955 SENSe SWEep COUNt 772 SENSe SWEep COUNt CURRent 629 SENSe SWEep DURation 773 SENSe SWEep EGATe 786 SENSe SWEep EGATe HOLDoff 787 SENSe SWEep EGATe LENGth 787 SENSe SWEep EGATe POLarity 787 SENSe SWEep ...

Page 1041: ... PSEarch AUTO 731 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FMEasurement RESult 734 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FMEasurement STATe 730 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion PNOise AUTO 875 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion PNOise RESult 875 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion PNOise STATe 876 CALCulate n DELTamarker m LINK 840 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum LEFT 854 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXim...

Page 1042: ... dl 898 CALCulate n DLINe dl STATe 898 CALCulate n ESPectrum PEAKsearch AUTO 683 CALCulate n ESPectrum PEAKsearch DETails 697 CALCulate n ESPectrum PEAKsearch MARGin 684 CALCulate n ESPectrum PEAKsearch PSHow 684 CALCulate n ESPectrum PEAKsearch IMMediate 684 CALCulate n ESPectrum PSEarch AUTO 683 CALCulate n ESPectrum PSEarch DETails 697 CALCulate n ESPectrum PSEarch MARGin 684 CALCulate n ESPect...

Page 1043: ...r SPACing 906 CALCulate n LIMit li LOWer STATe 906 CALCulate n LIMit li LOWer THReshold 907 CALCulate n LIMit li LOWer DATA 904 CALCulate n LIMit li NAME 907 CALCulate n LIMit li STATe 912 CALCulate n LIMit li TRACe t 1022 CALCulate n LIMit li TRACe t CHECk 913 CALCulate n LIMit li UNIT 908 CALCulate n LIMit li UPPer MARGin 908 CALCulate n LIMit li UPPer MODE 909 CALCulate n LIMit li UPPer OFFSet ...

Page 1044: ...r m FUNCtion HARMonics NHARmonics 721 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion HARMonics PRESet 722 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion HARMonics STATe 720 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion MDEPth RESult t 728 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion MDEPth SEARchsignal ONCE 728 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion MDEPth STATe 727 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion MSUMmary 743 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion NDBDown 881 CALCulate n MARKer m...

Page 1045: ...VERage RESult 718 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary SDEViation PHOLd RESult 718 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary SDEViation RESult 719 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary SDEViation STATe 714 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary STATe 712 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion TOI RESult MAXimum 725 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion TOI RESult MINimum 726 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion TOI RESult 72...

Page 1046: ... 848 CALCulate n MARKer m X SLIMits RIGHt 849 CALCulate n MARKer m X SLIMits ZOOM STATe 850 CALCulate n MARKer m X SLIMits STATe 848 CALCulate n MARKer m X SSIZe 846 CALCulate n MARKer m Y 858 CALCulate n MARKer m Y PERCent 702 CALCulate n MARKer m STATe 844 CALCulate n MARKer ms LINK TO MARKer md 844 CALCulate n MATH t MODE 830 CALCulate n MATH t POSition 830 CALCulate n MATH t STATe 830 CALCulat...

Page 1047: ...e n STATistics SCALe AUTO ONCE 706 CALCulate n STATistics SCALe X RANGe 706 CALCulate n STATistics SCALe X RLEVel 707 CALCulate n STATistics SCALe Y LOWer 707 CALCulate n STATistics SCALe Y UNIT 707 CALCulate n STATistics SCALe Y UPPer 708 CALCulate n THReshold 850 CALCulate n THReshold STATe 850 CALCulate n TLINe dl 900 CALCulate n TLINe dl STATe 901 CALCulate n UNIT POWer 776 CALibration PMETer ...

Page 1048: ...or STYLe 828 DISPlay WINDow n SPECtrogram COLor DEFault 827 DISPlay WINDow n SPECtrogram COLor LOWer 827 DISPlay WINDow n SPECtrogram COLor SHAPe 828 DISPlay WINDow n SPECtrogram COLor UPPer 828 DISPlay WINDow n SPECtrogram COLor STYLe 828 DISPlay WINDow n STATe 1023 DISPlay WINDow n TIME 965 DISPlay WINDow n TIME FORMat 965 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t MODE 815 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe 779 DI...

Page 1049: ...COUNt STATe 936 HCOPy PAGE MARGin 1 2 BOTTom 936 HCOPy PAGE MARGin 1 2 LEFT 937 HCOPy PAGE MARGin 1 2 RIGHt 937 HCOPy PAGE MARGin 1 2 TOP 937 HCOPy PAGE MARGin 1 2 UNIT 937 HCOPy PAGE ORIentation 1 2 938 HCOPy PAGE WINDow 1 2 CHANnel STATe 938 HCOPy PAGE WINDow 1 2 COUNt 939 HCOPy PAGE WINDow 1 2 SCALe 939 HCOPy PAGE WINDow 1 2 STATe 940 HCOPy TDSTamp STATe 1 2 940 HCOPy TREPort APPend 944 HCOPy T...

Page 1050: ...uation 778 INPut ip ATTenuation AUTO 778 INPut ip ATTenuation PROTection RESet 789 INPut ip EATT AUTO 778 INPut ip FILTer SAW 789 INPut ip GAIN STATe 779 INPut ip IMPedance 790 INPut ip LISN FILTer HPASs STATe 732 INPut ip LISN PHASe 733 INPut ip LISN TYPE 733 INPut ip SELect 790 INPut ip UPORt STATe 790 INPut ip UPORt VALue 791 INSTrument CREate DUPLicate 619 INSTrument CREate REPLace 620 INSTrum...

Page 1051: ...el ITEM DEFault 924 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM HWSettings 925 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM LINes ALL 925 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM NONE 925 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM SGRam 926 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM SPECtrogram 926 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM TRACe ACTive 926 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM TRANsducer ALL 926 MMEMory SELect ITEM ALL 924 MMEMory SELect ITEM DEFault 924 MMEMory SELect ITEM HWSe...

Page 1052: ...it ENABle 1012 STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit NTRansition 1013 STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit PTRansition 1014 STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit EVENt 1012 STATus QUEStionable CONDition 1011 STATus QUEStionable ENABle 1012 STATus QUEStionable EXTended CONDition 1011 STATus QUEStionable EXTended ENABle 1012 STATus QUEStionable EXTended INFO CONDition 1011 STATus QUEStionable EXTended INFO ENABle 1012 STATus...

Page 1053: ... QUEStionable TIME CONDition 1011 STATus QUEStionable TIME ENABle 1012 STATus QUEStionable TIME NTRansition 1013 STATus QUEStionable TIME PTRansition 1014 STATus QUEStionable TIME EVENt 1012 STATus QUEStionable EVENt 1012 STATus QUEue NEXT 1011 SYSTem CLOGging 618 SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF ADDRess 968 SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF RTERminator 968 SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter ENUMerate FIRSt 940 SY...

Page 1054: ...79 SYSTem RSWeep 979 SYSTem SEQuencer 623 SYSTem SHUTdown 618 SYSTem SPEaker MUTE 811 SYSTem SPEaker VOLume 811 SYSTem SPEaker STATe 810 TRACe n COPY 821 TRACe n DATA 832 TRACe n DATA MEMory 833 TRACe n DATA X 834 TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe 782 TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME 782 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff 783 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis 783 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IFPower 784 TRIGger SEQue...

Page 1055: ... 224 Optimizing display 315 Probability white noise 224 Scaling 315 Settings 310 Analog Demodulation Application 80 Analysis bandwidth 217 Statistics 217 224 226 Analysis BW Softkey APD CCDF 217 Annotations Hiding restoring 505 AP trace information 65 APD 212 About 212 Activating remote control 701 Application 213 Configuring 217 Gate remote control 703 Gate ranges 218 Gated trigger 215 218 Measur...

Page 1056: ...ernal generator 294 Reflection short measurement external generator 294 Remote 614 Remote control 956 Removing component effects tracking generator 298 Restoring settings external generator 295 Restoring settings internal generator 288 Results remote control 956 RF 520 Settings 520 Signal 520 Signal as RF input 43 Storing results internal generator 286 Transmission measurement external generator 2...

Page 1057: ...nctions 66 Colon 554 Color curve Shape 405 411 Spectrograms 405 415 Color mapping Color curve 411 Color range 411 412 Color scheme 412 Softkey 409 Spectrograms 404 409 410 414 Step by step 414 Value range 405 Color scheme Spectrogram 404 412 Colors Display 507 Editing 507 Editing remote 966 Print 508 Printing 507 Comma 554 Command sequence Recommendation 576 Remote 617 Commands 548 Brackets 554 Co...

Page 1058: ... mode 137 Power Unit 137 Predefined Settings 135 Predefined standards 148 RBW 131 Reference channel 136 Reference channel remote control 646 Reference level 133 Results 128 653 Setting up channels 142 Setting up channels remote control 640 Standards 135 Standards remote control 639 Standards Softkey 135 Sweep Time 130 138 Trace averaging 133 Trace Selection 137 Troubleshooting 147 User defined sta...

Page 1059: ...339 Electromagnetic compatibility see EMC 250 Electronic input attenuation 313 EMC 250 EMI 250 Detectors 253 Measurement 251 Refining results 260 EMI marker evaluation 260 EMI measurement Programming example 736 ENABle 561 Enable registers Remote 616 Entering data 73 EOI GPIB terminator 583 Error log 1029 Error messages Status bar 67 1024 Error queue 563 Errors IF OVLD 311 571 1025 Increase sweep ...

Page 1060: ...s 184 462 465 Filter type EMI 253 268 Filter types 266 320 325 SEM range 175 Spurious Emissions range 205 Filters Channel 320 Configuration 321 FFT 327 Gaussian 3dB 320 Overview 330 RBW 317 VBW 318 Weighting remote 644 Final test 260 Firmware Updating 515 Firmware Update Remote control 975 Fixed reference Configuring 383 Defining 354 372 Delta markers 383 Remote control 868 Format Data 834 Data re...

Page 1061: ...ring 237 RBW 236 Results 234 Results remote control 721 Sweep time 236 Harmonics Basics 232 High sensitivity 234 Measurement example 384 Measurement rules 233 Measurement time 234 Number 236 Origin 234 Power 235 Second harmonic intercept 232 Headphones Connector 41 Help 77 Hiding restoring Display items 503 Highpass filter LISN control EMI 269 HiSLIP 540 Protocol 542 Resource string 541 History Sp...

Page 1062: ... Key DOWN 36 LEFT 36 Power 33 RIGHT 36 UP 36 Keyboard On screen 72 Keypad Overview 35 Keys MKR 349 MKR 354 361 MKR FUNCT 362 Peak Search 361 PRESET 456 RUN CONT 98 328 409 RUN SINGLE 98 327 328 410 Keywords see Mnemonics 549 L LAN Configuring 595 Connector 39 Interface 540 IP address 541 Remote control interface 539 Reset 588 VISA 540 VXI protocol 542 Last span Softkey 304 LFEOI GPIB terminator 58...

Page 1063: ...rd 587 Ping 597 Remote control 543 Reset LCI 588 Settings 586 M Maintenance 1034 Manual peak search 259 Margins Limit lines 422 430 Peaks SEM 186 Peaks Spurious Emissions 209 Violation 423 Marker Information 65 Search area softkey 359 Search type softkey 359 Marker demodulation 270 Marker functions Deactivating 382 Measurement example 384 Marker peak list see Peak list 381 Marker Peak List Program...

Page 1064: ...time 267 Auto settings 344 345 Power sensor 280 Remote 773 775 Measurement zoom 76 Measurements All Functions off 98 APD 212 Carrier to Noise 149 CCDF 212 CP ACLR 127 Evaluation methods 88 Frequency sweep 97 Harmonic Distortion 231 OBW 152 153 SEM 159 Spurious Emissions 200 Statistics 212 Time Domain Power 226 TOI 237 Zero span 97 Measurementsition time Statistics 218 Menus Context sensitive 71 Me...

Page 1065: ...287 External generator 294 297 Internal generator 287 NTRansition 561 Number of Readings Power sensor 281 Numeric parameters 73 552 Numeric values Special 552 O OBW 152 Power remote control 657 Power Bandwidth 156 Adjust Settings 157 Channel Bandwidth 157 Channel bandwidth remote control 657 Configuring 155 Deactivating limits 157 357 361 Determining 155 158 Limits 157 357 360 Measurement 153 Meas...

Page 1066: ...M 186 Margin Spurious Emissions 209 Marker positioning 361 Next 361 per range Spurious Emissions 209 SEM results 162 Softkey 361 Spurious Emissions 201 Percent marker CCDF 215 Softkey CCDF 217 Performing EMI measurement 270 Period Gate ranges statistics 219 Persistence spectrum Spectrogram 405 Phase 269 EMI 258 LISN control EMI 269 Phase noise markers Programming example 893 Phase noise measuremen...

Page 1067: ...891 Markers 889 n dB down markers 895 Noise markers 893 Phase noise markers 893 Reference Marker 892 SEM 685 Sequencer 624 Service request 1014 Signal count markers 897 Spectrogram 837 Spurious Emissions measurement 699 Statistics 638 709 892 915 916 TOI 727 Protection RF input remote 789 Protocol VXI 542 PTRansition 561 Pulsed signals EMI detector 254 256 Pwr Swp channel setting 63 Q Quasipeak de...

Page 1068: ...as transducer factor internal generator 288 Reflection measurement How to tracking generator 298 Registers 560 Release notes 14 Remote commands Deprecated 1022 Remote control Blocked 1026 Errors 1026 Ignored commands 576 Interfaces 539 LXI settings 586 Protocols 539 Sequential commands 1026 Remote Desktop 591 603 Client 605 Ending session 608 Setting up a connection 608 Setting up controller 605 S...

Page 1069: ...lt statistics 221 Statistics 220 X axis remote control 760 Y axis 310 315 Y axis remote control 781 SCPI Parameters 551 Syntax 549 version 547 SCPI confirmed commands 548 Screenshots Printing 476 481 Saving 476 481 Trying out 59 SDC 547 Search limits Deactivating 157 357 361 OBW 154 156 Search Limits Activating 157 357 360 Search Mode Spectrogram markers 357 Search range Zoom area 439 Search setti...

Page 1070: ...50 Sequences Aborting remote 622 Mode remote 623 Sequential commands 557 Errors 1026 Service functions 517 521 Passwords 522 Results 522 Service manual 13 Service packs 28 Service request SRQ 539 560 563 573 Service request enable register SRE 560 563 Remote 616 Set CP Reference Softkey 137 Setting commands 548 Settings filename 184 462 465 Format description SEM 193 Loading 465 Managing 456 Provi...

Page 1071: ...nfig 302 Full Span 304 Gated Trigger 218 Harmonic RBW Auto 236 Harmonic Sweep Time 236 History Depth 409 Horizontal Line 1 2 420 I Q Export 470 IF Power 337 Import 468 Install Printer 478 Last Span 304 List evaluation 185 Lower Level Hysteresis 345 Marker 1 2 3 248 Marker 1 2 3 4 244 Marker Config 349 352 Marker Search Area 359 Marker Search Type 359 Marker to Trace 263 351 Meastime Auto 344 Meast...

Page 1072: ... 206 Displaying peaks 208 Evaluation list 201 Exporting results 210 Filter type 205 Format description of export files 211 Inserting ranges 207 Limit absolute 207 Limit check 207 Limit lines 202 List details 209 List evaluation 208 List evaluation state 208 Measurement remote control 688 Measurement result list 208 Peak margins 209 Peaks 201 Peaks per range 209 Performing 203 209 Preamplifier 206 ...

Page 1073: ...ndows Spectrogram 408 Suffixes 550 Common 613 Support 1029 Information 518 Information remote 975 Suppressing File name dialog 478 Sweep Aborting 327 328 409 410 Configuration Softkey 321 Continuous 98 Count 321 Count Spectrograms 401 Default settings 316 Mode 98 321 Performing 98 Points 321 386 Points SEM range 178 Points Spurious Emissions range 206 Settings Spectrogram 329 Single 98 Time remote...

Page 1074: ...es Configuring 329 Continuing 329 Navigating 329 402 per sweep 329 Selecting 329 409 Spectrograms 400 Time trigger Repetition interval 338 Softkey 337 Timestamps Softkey Spectrogram 409 Spectrograms 401 409 TOI 237 About the measurement 238 Basics 238 Calculation method 240 Configuring 243 Determining 244 Markers 244 Programming example 727 Results 242 Search signals 244 TOI marker functions 66 To...

Page 1075: ...1 Offset 332 338 Slope 339 785 Status register 565 Trigger In Connector 39 Trigger level 337 External trigger remote 784 I Q Power remote 784 IF Power remote 784 Trigger source 332 336 External 337 Free Run 336 IF Power 337 Time 337 Video 337 Trigger Gate Configuration Softkey 335 TRK marker functions 66 Trk Gen channel setting 64 289 Troubleshooting CP ACLR 147 File name error 927 Input overload ...

Page 1076: ... remote 825 Querying remote 751 Replacing remote 752 Size 93 Splitting remote 825 Types remote 750 WRONG_FW Error 515 534 1025 X X axis Adjusting Spurious Emissions 207 Limit lines 430 Scaling 268 304 Transducer lines 529 X Offset Limit lines 427 X value Marker 262 350 Y Y axis Limit lines 430 Max Min statistics 221 Optimizing display 315 Scaling 310 315 Settings 314 Y Offset Limit lines 428 Yello...

Reviews:

No comments

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands